JP2019213962A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To allow a game to be played without winning a bonus, in a game state in which the bonus is being carried over.SOLUTION: A game machine of the present invention can determine a first special combination when the number of bets is a predetermined number, and can determine a second special combination when the number of bets is a specific number. In the game machine, games can be played in a first specific game state in which the first special combination is carried over and in a second specific game state in which the second special combination is carried over. When the number of bets is a specific number in the first specific game state, a first special game does not operate, when the number of bets is a specific number in the second specific game state, a second special game does not operate, the first special game state is more advantageous than the second specific game state, a notification is made that the number of bets is set to a predetermined number in the game state in which the first and second special combinations are not carried over, and a notification is made that the number of bets is set to a specific number in the second specific game state.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 8

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  Conventionally, a game called pachi-slot, comprising a plurality of reels each having a plurality of symbols provided on the surface, a start switch, a stop switch, a stepping motor provided for each reel, and a control unit. The machine is known. The start switch detects that the start lever has been operated by the player (hereinafter also referred to as “start operation”) after a game medium such as a medal or coin has been inserted into the gaming machine, and the rotation of all reels is detected. Outputs a signal requesting start. The stop switch detects that a stop button provided for each reel has been pressed by the player (hereinafter also referred to as “stop operation”), and outputs a signal requesting the rotation of the corresponding reel to stop. To do. The stepping motor transmits the driving force to the corresponding reel. Further, the control unit controls the operation of the stepping motor based on the signals output from the start switch and the stop switch, and performs the rotation operation and stop operation of each reel.

  In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected, lottery processing using random numbers (hereinafter referred to as “internal lottery processing”) is performed on the program, and the result of the lottery (hereinafter referred to as “internal winning combination”). And the rotation of the reel is stopped based on the timing of the stop operation. Then, when the rotation of all the reels is stopped and the symbol combination related to the winning is displayed, a privilege corresponding to the symbol combination is given to the player. As an example of a privilege granted to a player, a replay (hereinafter also referred to as “replay”) in which an internal lottery process is performed again without paying out game media (medals, etc.) or consuming the game media. An operation of a bonus game in which a game medium payout opportunity increases can be cited.

  Conventionally, a gaming machine having the above configuration has a function of navigating the establishment of a specific small role (role related to payout of medals) by a lamp or the like, that is, a function of an assist time (hereinafter, referred to as “AT”). Gaming machines are being developed. Furthermore, conventionally, in addition to the AT function, when a specific symbol combination is displayed, a function in which a gaming state in which the winning probability of replay is higher than normal is activated, that is, a function of replay time (hereinafter referred to as “RT”). A gaming machine is also being developed. In a general gaming machine having an AT function, an AT lottery is performed by using a lottery table defined according to the determined internal winning combination and the gaming state, and the AT game starts when the AT lottery is won. Is done.

  In a gaming machine having an AT function, a pressing order rule (for example, the first stop of the left reel) is often set in advance with respect to the stop operation order of the stop button in a non-AT game. Further, in such a gaming machine, when a plurality of reels are stopped in a specific stop order (for example, a first stop other than the left reel) as a winning combination, a bonus is given to the player (a shift to a high RT, a medal of a medal). There is also a player provided with a hand (hereinafter, referred to as a “push order winning prize”) for giving payout (for example, see Patent Document 1).

  In the gaming machine of Patent Literature 1, the specific stop order of the stop button corresponding to the “push order winning combination” is different from the stop order set by the push order rule of the non-AT game (for example, the right reel or the middle reel). The reel is set to the first stop). In Patent Literature 1, when a plurality of reels are stopped in a specific stop order (a stop order not intended by a designer) in a non-AT game, a technique of imposing a penalty of prohibiting the AT random determination from the next game for a certain period is imposed. Is disclosed. In the case where such a penalty function is provided, even if the reels are stopped in a specific stop order in the non-AT game and the “push order winning combination” is won, then the AT lottery is prohibited for a certain period of time. , So that no loss is caused.

JP 2011-125640 A

  By the way, for example, in a gaming state in which a bonus is being carried over, there is a demand for a gaming machine capable of performing a game without winning the bonus.

  The present invention has been made in order to solve the above problem, and an object of the present invention is, for example, in a gaming state in which a bonus is being carried over, a gaming machine capable of performing a game without winning the bonus. It is to propose.

  In order to solve the above problems, the present invention provides a gaming machine having the following configuration.

When the number of bets is a predetermined number (for example, two to be described later), a first special combination (for example, “2 MB” to be described later) related to the operation of the first special game can be determined,
When the bet number is a specific number (for example, three cards described later) different from the predetermined number, a second special combination (for example, “3 MB” described later) related to the operation of the second special game can be determined. Yes,
A first specific game state in which the first special role is carried over (for example, a state between 2 MB flags described later) and a second specific game state in which the second special role is carried over (for example, a 3 MB flag described later) Gaming machine that can be played in the
In the first specific game state, when the bet number is the specific number, the first special game does not operate,
In the second specific game state, when the bet number is the predetermined number, the second special game does not operate,
The first specific gaming state is a more advantageous gaming state than the second specific gaming state,
In a gaming state in which the first special combination and the second special combination have not been carried over (for example, a general gaming state described later), a notification is given to instruct the bet number to be the predetermined number,
In the second specific gaming state, a notification is provided to instruct the user to set the bet number to the specific number.

Further, the gaming machine of the present invention includes an internal winning combination determining means for determining an internal winning combination with a predetermined probability according to the number of bets,
When the bet number is the specific number, the probability that no internal winning combination is determined in the first specific gaming state is lower than the probability that no internal winning combination is determined in the second specific gaming state. It may be.

  Further, in the gaming machine of the present invention, in the first specific gaming state, a notification that an instruction to set the bet number to the specific number may be given.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention having the above-described configuration, for example, in a gaming state in which a bonus is being carried over (first specific gaming state), a game can be played without winning the bonus.

It is a figure for demonstrating the function flow of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a perspective view which shows the external appearance structure of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the internal structure of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the internal structure of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the whole circuit structure with which the game machine of one Embodiment of this invention is provided. It is a block diagram which shows the internal structure of the main control circuit in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the internal structure of the sub control circuit in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a transition flow figure of RT game state of the gaming machine in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol arrangement | positioning table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table (the 3) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure showing an example of an internal lottery table (for 3 sheets) for general (RT0) game state in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of an internal lottery table (for 3 sheets) for 2MB flag (RT1) game state for one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table (for 3 sheets) for 3MB flag (RT2) game state in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure showing an example of an internal lottery table (two pieces) for general (RT0) game state in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of an internal lottery table (for two sheets) for 2MB flag (RT1) game state for one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table (for 2 sheets) for 3MB flag (RT2) game state for one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure showing an example of an internal lottery table for 2MB game state in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of an internal lottery table for 3MB game state in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of the symbol combination decision table (the 1) in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of the symbol combination decision table (the 2) in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of the symbol combination decision table (the 3) in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of an internal winning combination storage area in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the display combination storage area in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure showing an example of a carryover combination storage area in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the game state flag storage area in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the operation stop button storage area | region in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the pressing order storage area | region in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol code storage area in one Embodiment of this invention. 10 is a correspondence table between abbreviations of internal winning combinations used in the control of the sub CPU and abbreviations of internal winning combinations used in the control of the main CPU. It is a figure showing an example of a race runner MAP lottery table in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of a race information MAP data table in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of a winning candidate lottery table in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of a race winning rate MAP lottery table in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of a race winning rate MAP data table in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of a race winning rate MAP data table (percent display) in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of a race result lottery table in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of an AT race victory expectation data selection lottery table in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of a race winning rate data rewriting lottery (during penalty) table in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of a pseudo BB lottery (general medium) table in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the pseudo BB lottery (AT during / AT preparation / during a race) table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure showing an example of a pseudo BB precursor lottery table in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of the cycle shortening lottery table (the 1) in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of the cycle shortening lottery table (the 2) in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of a pseudo BB cycle shortening lottery table in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of a direct addition lottery table in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of AT start game number lottery (at the time of female A victory) table in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of the AT start game number lottery (at the time of Kappa victory) table (the 1) in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of the AT start game number random determination (at the time of Kappa victory) table (the 2) in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of AT start game number lottery (at the time of Kappa victory) table (the 3) in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of AT start game number lottery (at the time of Kappa victory) table (the 4) in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of a Kappa sushi MAP data table in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of the kappa game number acquisition lottery table in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of a kappa sushi data conversion occurrence lottery table in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of a kappa sushi data conversion lottery (the 1st plate) table in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of a kappa sushi data conversion lottery (the 2nd plate) table in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of a kappa sushi data conversion lottery (third plate) table in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of a kappa sushi data conversion lottery (fourth plate) table in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of a kappa sushi data conversion lottery (the 5th plate) table in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the non-MB MAX MAX bet button light-off determination table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the MAX bet button ON / OFF determination table in MB in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a main flowchart which shows the process example of the main control circuit of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. 5 is a flowchart illustrating an example of power-on processing according to an embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of medal acceptance and start check processing in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of MAXBET insertion processing in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the internal lottery process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the reel stop initial setting process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the attraction | saving priority order storage process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the drawing priority order table selection process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the symbol code storage process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the reel stop control process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the priority drawing-in control process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the bonus completion | finish check process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the bonus operation | movement check process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the interruption process by control of main CPU in one Embodiment of this invention. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a power-on process performed by a sub CPU according to an embodiment of the present invention. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a power interruption detection process performed by a sub CPU according to an embodiment of the present invention. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a lamp control task performed by a sub CPU according to an embodiment of the present invention. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a sound control task performed by a sub CPU according to an embodiment of the present invention. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a mother task performed by a sub CPU according to an embodiment of the present invention. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a main task performed by a sub CPU according to an embodiment of the present invention. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a random number update process according to an embodiment of the present invention. 5 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a random number acquisition process according to an embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the main board | substrate communication task performed by sub CPU in one Embodiment of this invention. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of an animation task performed by a sub CPU according to an embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of animation task management processing in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of period information display processing in one embodiment of the present invention. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a command analysis process according to an embodiment of the present invention. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a command sequence check process according to an embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the effect content determination processing (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the effect content determination processing (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of processing at the time of receiving an initialization command according to an embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows the example of the race information lottery processing in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the process at the time of the medal insertion command reception in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the process at the time of the start command reception in one Embodiment of this invention. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a variable setting process (part 1) according to an embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the variable setting process (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a general medium_variable setting process according to an embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the _variable in BB_variable setting process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of AT under preparation_variable setting processing in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of AT_variable setting processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of race_variable setting processing in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of general end time_variable setting processing in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the time_variable setting process at the time of the end of general BB in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of race end_variable setting processing in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the time_of_AT-BB end_variable setting process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the payout state update processing in one Embodiment of this invention. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a Bns state setting process according to an embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of BB winning time_Bns state setting processing in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of BB flag _Bns state setting processing in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of BB operation waiting_Bns state setting processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of BB_Bns state setting processing in one embodiment of the present invention. 11 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a JAC_Bns state setting process according to an embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of _Bns state setup processing in ChaBB in one embodiment of the present invention. 11 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a ChaJAC_Bns state setting process according to an embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing (the 1) at the time of general middle_game start in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing (the 2) at the time of general middle_game start in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of pseudo BB lottery processing in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows the example of processing at the time of general middle BB_ game start at one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of BB rush judgment processing (at the time of game start) in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of BBJAC shift judging processing (at the time of game start) in one embodiment of the present invention. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a BB counter management process according to an embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing at the time of a race_game start at one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the process at the time of AT preparation_game start at one embodiment of this invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing at the time of female A victory_game start at one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of Kappa victory_game start time processing in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing at the time of AT_game start at one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the process at the time of BB_game start during AT in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the game state setting process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of general medium_game state setup processing in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of general BB_ game state setting processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the in-race_game state setting process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of AT preparations_game state setting processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of BB_ during-AT game state setting processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the process at the time of the reel stop command reception in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the general medium penalty process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the penalty process in BB in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing at the time of receiving a winning operation command in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing at the time of general middle BB_win in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of BB rush judgment processing (at the time of a prize) in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of BBJAC shift judging processing (at the time of a prize) in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing at the time of [during a prize] in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing at the time of BB_win during AT in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing at the time of payment end command reception in one embodiment of the present invention. 5 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a no-operation command reception process according to an embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing at the time of AT preparation button press in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of female A_AT start game number decision processing in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table at the time of a race_loss in the first modification. 19 is a flowchart illustrating an example of processing during a race_game start in Modification Example 1. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table at the time of a race_loss in the second modification. 18 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process at the time of receiving a reel stop command in Modification 6. 15 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process at the time of receiving a reel stop command in a modification 7; 18 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process at the time of receiving a reel stop command in a modification example 8. 30 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a during-race_variable setting process in Modification 8.

  Hereinafter, a pachislot machine will be exemplified as a gaming machine showing an embodiment of the present invention, and the configuration and operation thereof will be described with reference to the drawings. In the present embodiment, a pachislot having an AT function will be described.

<Function flow>
First, the functional flow of the pachislot will be described with reference to FIG. In the pachislot machine of this embodiment, medals are used as game media for playing games. In addition to medals, for example, coins, game balls, game point data, tokens, or the like can be applied as game media.

  When a player inserts a medal into the pachislot and operates the start lever, one value (hereinafter referred to as an internal lottery random number value) is extracted from random numbers in a predetermined numerical range (for example, 0 to 65535). You.

  The internal lottery means performs lottery based on the extracted internal random number random number and determines an internal winning combination. This internal lottery means is one of various processing means (processing functions) provided in a main control circuit described later. By determining the internal winning combination, a combination of symbols that permits display along an after-mentioned effective line (winning determination line) is determined. Note that the types of symbol combinations include those related to “winning” in which benefits such as payout of medals, replay (replay) operation, bonus operation, etc. are given to the player, and other so-called “losing” Such a thing is provided.

  Further, when the start lever is operated, a plurality of reels are rotated. Thereafter, when the player presses the stop button corresponding to the predetermined reel, the reel stop control means performs control to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel based on the internal winning combination and the timing when the stop button is pressed. Do. This reel stop control means is one of various processing means (processing functions) provided in a main control circuit described later.

  In the pachislot, basically, a control for stopping the rotation of the corresponding reel is performed within a specified time (190 msec or 75 msec) from when the stop button is pressed. In the present embodiment, the number of symbols that move with the rotation of the reel within the specified time is referred to as “the number of sliding symbols”. In this embodiment, when the specified period is 190 msec, the maximum number of sliding pieces (maximum number of sliding pieces) is set to 4 symbols, and when the specified period is 75 msec, the maximum sliding piece Set the number to one symbol.

  When the internal winning combination that permits the display of the combination of the symbols related to the winning is determined, the reel stop control unit normally changes the combination of the symbols along the activated line within a specified time of 190 msec (for four symbols of the symbol). And stop the rotation of the reel so as to be displayed as much as possible. In addition, the reel stop control means, for example, when a challenge bonus (hereinafter, referred to as “CB”), which is a second type special accessory, and an “MB” (middle bonus) for continuously operating “CB”, operate as 1 With respect to one or more reels, the rotation of the reels is stopped so that the combination of the symbols is displayed as much as possible along the winning determination line within a specified time of 75 msec (for one symbol). Furthermore, the reel stop control means uses various specified times corresponding to the gaming state to stop the rotation of the reels so that combinations of symbols that are not permitted to be displayed by the internal winning combination are not displayed along the active line. Let

  Thus, when the rotation of the plurality of reels is all stopped, the winning determination means determines whether or not the combination of symbols displayed along the active line relates to winning. This winning determination means is also one of various processing means (processing functions) provided in the main control circuit described later. Then, when it is determined that the displayed symbol combination is related to winning by the winning determination means, a bonus such as a medal payout is given to the player. In the pachislot, a series of flows as described above is performed as one game (unit game).

  Also, in the pachislot, in the above-described series of gaming operations, video display performed by a display device such as a liquid crystal display device, light output performed by various lamps, sound output performed by a speaker, or a combination thereof is performed. Various effects are performed using it.

  Specifically, when the start lever is operated, a random number value for effect (hereinafter referred to as a random number value for effect) is extracted separately from the random number value for internal lottery used for determining the internal winning combination described above. You. When the effect random number is extracted, the effect content determination means determines the effect to be executed this time from lots of effects related to the internal winning combination. This effect content determination means is one of various processing means (processing functions) provided in a sub-control circuit described later.

  Next, when the content of the effect is determined by the effect content determination means, the effect execution means responds in conjunction with each opportunity such as when the rotation of the reel starts, when the rotation of each reel stops, or when the presence or absence of a prize is determined. Execute. In this way, in the pachislot, for example, by executing the production contents associated with the internal winning combination, there is an opportunity to know or predict the determined internal winning combination (in other words, the combination of symbols to be aimed at) It is provided to the player and the player's interest can be improved.

<Pachislot structure>
Next, the structure of the pachislot machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The pachislot according to the present embodiment mainly includes a main control unit that performs various operations related to the progress of a game and controls the various operations, a sub-control unit that performs a game effect, and a main control unit. And a gaming machine housing for mounting the sub-control unit. The main control unit includes a main control circuit (main control board) described later and various peripheral devices (various operation buttons, reel units, and the like) connected thereto. The sub-control unit includes a sub-control circuit (sub-control board) described later and various peripheral devices controlled by the sub-control circuit (including various effect devices such as a liquid crystal display device, a speaker, and a lamp (LED)). Hereinafter, the content of each component will be described more specifically.

[Appearance structure]
FIG. 2 is a perspective view showing the external structure of the pachi-slot 1.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the pachi-slot 1 includes an exterior body 2. The exterior body 2 includes a cabinet 2a that accommodates reels, circuit boards, and the like, and a front door 2b that is attached to the cabinet 2a so as to be openable and closable. Handles 7 are provided on both side surfaces of the cabinet 2a (only one handle 7 is shown in FIG. 2). The handle 7 is a recess that can be put by a carrier when the pachislot 1 is carried.

  Inside the cabinet 2a, three reels 3L, 3C, 3R (variation display means) are provided side by side. Hereinafter, the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are also referred to as a left reel 3L, a middle reel 3C, and a right reel 3R, respectively. Each of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R (display row) has a cylindrical reel body and a light-transmissive sheet material mounted on the peripheral surface of the reel body. A plurality of (for example, 20) symbols are drawn on the surface of the sheet material at predetermined intervals along the circumferential direction.

  Above the center of the front door 2b, an upper panel unit 10 and a liquid crystal display device 11 (display device, notification means) are provided. The upper panel unit 10 is provided in the upper end region of the front door 2b, and the liquid crystal display device 11 is disposed below the upper panel unit 10. The upper panel unit 10 has a light source, and performs an effect by light emitted from the light source. In addition, the liquid crystal display device 11 performs an effect by displaying an image.

  A pedestal 12 is provided in the center of the front door 2b. The pedestal portion 12 is provided with a frame member 13 and various devices to be operated by the player.

  The frame member 13 includes a symbol display area 4, an information display window 14, and a stop button attachment portion 15. As shown in FIG. 2, the symbol display area 4 and the information display window 14 are provided in the opening portion of the frame member 13, and the stop button attachment portion 15 is provided in the lower portion of the opening portion of the frame member 13.

  The symbol display area 4 is an area that overlaps the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R when viewed from the front (the player side), and is arranged on the front side (the player side) of the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R. The symbol display area 4 functions as a display window, and has a configuration in which three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R disposed behind (the cabinet 2a side) can be seen through. Therefore, in the following, the symbol display area 4 is referred to as a reel display window 4.

  When the rotation of the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R provided behind the reel display window 4 is stopped, among the plurality of symbols provided on the peripheral surface of each reel, three reels 3 One symbol is displayed in the frame. That is, when the rotation of the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R is stopped, one symbol is provided in each of the upper, middle, and lower regions for each reel in the frame of the reel display window 4 (three symbols in total). ) Is displayed. In the present embodiment, a pseudo line (center line) connecting the middle region of the left reel 3L, the middle region of the middle reel 3C, and the middle region of the right reel 3R is set within the frame of the reel display window 4. It is defined as an effective line (judgment line) for judging whether or not a prize has been won.

  The information display window 14 is provided continuously below the reel display window 4 and is arranged so that the surface direction of the information display surface faces upward. The information display window 14 and the reel display window 4 are covered with a transparent window cover 16. The window cover 16 is disposed on the inner surface side of the frame member 13, and has a configuration that cannot be removed from the front surface side of the front door 2b.

  Further, the frame member 13 has a sheet placement portion 17 that faces the information display surface of the information display window 14 with the window cover 16 interposed therebetween. And between the sheet | seat mounting part 17 and the window cover 16, the sheet | seat member (information sheet) in which the information regarding a game was described is arrange | positioned. Therefore, the information sheet is covered with the window cover 16 having a smooth surface without irregularities or gaps, and the window cover 16 serves as an attachment portion of the information sheet.

  As described above, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the window cover 16 cannot be removed from the front side of the front door 2b, and has a smooth surface free from irregularities and gaps. It is possible to prevent an illegal act of accessing the inside of the pachislot 1 via the. The replacement of the information sheet will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the example in which the information display window 14 is formed continuously with the reel display window 4 in the opening of the frame member 13 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. The information display window 14 may not be formed continuously with the reel display window 4. That is, the opening of the reel display window 4 and the opening of the information display window 14 may be arranged side by side in the vertical direction.

  The stop button mounting portion 15 is configured by a flat plate member having a substantially trapezoidal surface shape. The stop button mounting portion 15 is provided below the information display window 14, and is provided such that the substantially trapezoidal surface faces the front (the player side). The substantially trapezoidal surface of the stop button mounting portion 15 is provided with three through holes through which the three stop buttons 19L, 19C, and 19R pass side by side.

  The three stop buttons 19L, 19C, 19R are provided corresponding to the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R, respectively, and each stop button is provided to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel. These stop buttons 19L, 19C, and 19R are one of various devices that are operated by the player. Hereinafter, the stop buttons 19L, 19C, and 19R are also referred to as a left stop button 19L, a middle stop button 19C, and a right stop button 19R, respectively.

  In addition to the stop button, the pedestal section 12 is provided with a medal slot 20, a MAX bet button 21 (bet operation means), a bet button 22, and a start lever 23 as various devices to be operated by the player. .

  The medal slot 20 is provided for receiving a medal dropped from the outside on the pachislot 1 by the player. The medals accepted from the medal slot 20 are used for one game with the preset number (for example, three) as the upper limit, and the amount exceeding the preset number is deposited in the pachislot 1. Can do. That is, the pachislo 1 has a so-called credit function (game medium storage means).

  The MAX bet button 21 and the 1 bet button 22 are provided in order to determine the number used for one game from medals deposited inside the pachislot 1. The start lever 23 is provided to start the rotation of all the reels (3L, 3C, 3R).

  Further, as viewed from the front, a 7-segment display 24 including a 7-segment LED (Light Emitting Diode) is provided on the left side of the reel display window 4 of the front door 2b. The 7-segment display 24 displays information such as the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a privilege (hereinafter referred to as the number of payouts), the number of medals deposited inside the pachislot 1 (hereinafter referred to as the number of credits), and the like. Digital display. Further, a selection button 25 (chance button) is provided on the right side of the reel display window 4 of the front door 2b. The selection button 25 is a button that is pressed by the player when a selection operation such as game play is required. For example, in a game for determining the number of AT start games when “Female A” wins, which will be described later, this button is pressed when the player selects one of two types of modes (modes) for determining the number of AT start games. The selection button 25 is connected to a sub-control board 72 described later, and the sub-control board 72 performs detection of pressing of the selection button 25 and control of a selection operation based thereon.

  Side panel units 26L and 26R are provided on both sides of the base 12 of the front door 2b. Each side panel unit has a light source and performs an effect by light emitted from the light source. A settlement button 27 is provided below the left side panel unit 26L. The checkout button 27 is provided to draw out (discharge) medals deposited inside the pachislot machine 1 to the outside.

  A waist panel unit 31 is provided below the pedestal 12 of the front door 2b. The waist panel unit 31 includes a decorative panel on which an arbitrary image is drawn, and a light source that emits light for illuminating the decorative panel from the back side.

  Below the waist panel unit 31, a medal payout port 32, speaker holes 33L and 33R, and a medal tray unit 34 are provided. The medal payout port 32 guides medals discharged by driving a hopper device 51 (medal payout device) described later to the outside. The medal tray unit 34 stores medals discharged from the medal payout opening 32. The speaker holes 33L and 33R are provided to output sound such as sound effects and music corresponding to the contents of the performance.

[Internal structure]
Next, the internal structure of the pachislot machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 3 and 4 are diagrams showing the internal structure of the pachi-slot 1. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a state in which the front door 2b is opened and the middle door 41 provided on the back side of the front door 2b is closed with respect to the front door 2b. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing a state in which the front door 2b is opened and the middle door 41 is opened with respect to the front door 2b.

  The cabinet 2a is a box-shaped member, and has a top plate, a bottom plate, left and right side plates, and a back plate. On the upper side inside the cabinet 2a, for example, a cabinet-side speaker 42 for outputting sound effects is provided.

  A cabinet-side relay board 44 is disposed on one side of the cabinet-side speaker 42 (left side in FIGS. 3 and 4). The cabinet side relay board 44 includes a main control board 71 (see FIG. 5 described later) attached to the middle door 41 (see FIGS. 3 and 4), a hopper device 51, and a medal auxiliary storage switch 75 (described later). 5) and a medal payout count switch (not shown).

  An amplifier board 45 that controls the output of sound from the cabinet-side speaker 42 is disposed in the center of the cabinet 2a. Although not shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, when the interior of the cabinet 2a is viewed from the front (player side), the other side of the amplifier board 45 (right side in FIGS. A concentrated terminal board 47 (see FIG. 5 described later) is disposed. The external concentration terminal board 47 is provided for outputting signals such as a medal insertion signal, a medal payout signal, and a security signal to the outside of the pachislot machine 1.

  A hopper device 51 (medal paying device), a medal auxiliary storage 52, and a power supply device 53 are disposed in the lower part inside the cabinet 2a.

  The hopper device 51 is attached to a substantially central portion of the bottom plate of the cabinet 2a. The hopper device 51 can accommodate a large amount of medals and has a structure capable of discharging them one by one. The hopper device 51 pays out medals when the number of stored medals exceeds 50, for example, or when the settlement button 27 is pressed and the medals are settled. The medals paid out by the hopper device 51 are discharged from the medal payout port 32 (see FIG. 2).

  The medal auxiliary storage 52 stores medals overflowing from the hopper device 51. The medal auxiliary storage 52 is arranged on the right side of the hopper device 51 when the inside of the cabinet 2a is viewed from the front.

  The power supply device 53 includes a power switch 53a and a power supply board 53b (see FIG. 5 described later). The power supply device 53 is disposed on the left side of the hopper device 51 when the inside of the cabinet 2a is viewed from the front. The power supply device 53 converts the power of the AC voltage 100V into the power of the DC voltage necessary for each part, and supplies the converted power to each part.

  As shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, the middle door 41 is disposed at a substantially central portion on the back surface of the front door 2b, and is attached to the front door 2b so that the reel display window 4 (see FIG. 4) can be opened and closed from the back side. It has been.

  As shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, a main control board case 55 accommodating a main control board 71 described later (see FIG. 5 described later) and three reels 3L, 3C, 3R are attached to the middle door 41. Have been. Although not shown, a stepping motor (variation display means) is connected to each of the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R via a gear having a predetermined reduction ratio.

  In this embodiment, when the middle door 41 is opened with respect to the front door 2b, as shown in FIG. 4, the back surface of the window cover 16 and the sheet placing portion 17 are exposed on the back surface of the front door 2b. As described above, between the back surface of the window cover 16 and the sheet placement portion 17, an information sheet on which information related to the game is described is arranged. The information sheet is inserted into a gap formed between the back surface of the window cover 16 and the sheet placement portion 17 in a state where the middle door 41 is opened and the back surface of the window cover 16 and the sheet placement portion 17 are exposed. The When exchanging information sheets, the information sheet is exchanged after the middle door 41 is opened.

  Although not shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, the main control board case 55 is provided with a setting key switch 56 (see FIG. 5 described later). The setting key type switch 56 is used when changing the setting of the pachislot 1 or confirming the setting of the pachislot 1. In the present embodiment, the main control board unit is configured by the main control board case 55 and the main control board 71 accommodated in the main control board case 55.

  The main control board 71 accommodated in the main control board case 55 has a main control circuit 91 (see FIG. 6 described later) described later. The main control circuit 91 is a circuit that controls the main flow of the game in the pachislo 1 such as determination of the internal winning combination, rotation and stop of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R, and determination of winning. A specific configuration of the main control circuit 91 will be described in detail later with reference to the drawings.

  On the upper part of the middle door 41 of the front door 2b, a sub-control board case 57 in which a sub-control board 72 (see FIG. 5 described later) to be described later is accommodated is disposed. The sub control board 72 housed in the sub control board case 57 has a sub control circuit 101 (see FIG. 7 described later). The sub-control circuit 101 (sub-control means) receives the command data transmitted from the main control circuit 91, determines the effect of the game by displaying a video or the like based on the received command data, and It is a circuit for controlling the operation of the determined effect. A specific configuration of the sub control circuit 101 will be described in detail later with reference to the drawings.

  Although not shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, a later-described sub-relay board 61 (see FIG. 5 described later) is disposed on the right side of the sub-control board case 57 when the front door 2 b is viewed from the back side. The sub relay board 61 is a board that relays connection wiring between the sub control board 72 and the main control board 71. The sub relay board 61 is a relay board that electrically connects the sub control board 72 and a board provided around the sub control board 72. In addition, as a board | substrate arrange | positioned around the sub control board 72, the below-mentioned LED board 62A, 62B etc. are mentioned.

  Although not shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, the LED boards 62 </ b> A and 62 </ b> B are provided above the sub control board case 57 when viewed from the back side of the front door 2 b. The LED boards 62A and 62B are provided with various types of LED (Light Emitting Diode) groups 85 (see FIG. 5 described later) according to an effect performed under the control of the sub-control circuit 101 (see FIG. 7 described later). The LED is turned on and off, and a blinking pattern is displayed. Further, the pachislot 1 of the present embodiment includes a plurality of LED boards in addition to the LED boards 62A and 62B. For example, although not shown, the pachislo 1 of the present embodiment includes an LED (light emitting unit) for turning on and off the MAX bet button 21 and an LED board for controlling the operation of the LED. The LED for turning on and off the MAX bet button 21 may be included in the LED group 85. In this case, the operation of the LED is controlled by the LED boards 62A and 62B.

  Although not shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, a 24h door opening / closing monitoring unit 63 described later is disposed below the sub-relay board 61 (see FIG. 5 described later). The 24h door opening / closing monitoring unit 63 stores opening / closing history information of the middle door 41. The 24h door open / close monitoring unit 63 outputs a signal for displaying an error by the liquid crystal display device 11 to the sub control board 72 (sub control circuit 101) when the middle door 41 is opened.

  Below the middle door 41, lower speakers 65L and 65R are disposed as shown in FIGS. The lower speakers 65L and 65R are arranged at positions facing the speaker holes 33L and 33R (see FIG. 2) on the back surface of the front door 2b, respectively.

  In addition, a selector 66 and a door opening / closing monitoring switch 67 described later (see FIG. 5 described later) are disposed above the lower speaker 65L of the front door 2b. The selector 66 is a device for selecting whether or not the medal material and shape are appropriate, and guides an appropriate medal inserted into the medal insertion slot 20 to the hopper device 51. Although not shown, a medal sensor (insertion operation detecting means) for detecting that an appropriate medal has passed is provided on the path through which the medal passes in the selector 66.

  Although not shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, the door open / close monitoring switch 67 is disposed on the left side of the selector 66 when the front door 2 b is viewed from the back side. The door opening / closing monitoring switch 67 outputs a security signal for notifying the opening / closing of the front door 2b to the outside of the pachi-slot 1.

  In addition, a door relay terminal plate 68 is provided in a region below the reel display window 4 and opened and closed by the middle door 41 as shown in FIG. The door relay terminal board 68 is a board that relays connection wiring between the main control board 71 in the main control board case 55 and various buttons and switches, the sub control board 72, the selector 66, and the game operation display board 81. Yes (see FIG. 5 below). Examples of the various buttons and switches include a MAX bet button 21, a 1 bet button 22, a settlement button 27, a door open / close monitoring switch 67, a BET switch 77 described later, a start switch 79, and the like.

<Control system for pachislot>
Next, a control system provided in the pachislo 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a circuit block diagram showing the configuration of the control system of the pachi-slot 1.

  The pachi-slot 1 includes a main control board 71 provided on the middle door 41 and a sub-control board 72 provided on the front door 2b. The pachi-slot 1 includes a reel relay terminal board 74, a setting key switch 56, a cabinet-side relay board 44, and a power supply 53 connected to the main control board 71. Further, the pachi-slot 1 includes an external concentrated terminal plate 47 connected to the main control board 71 via the cabinet-side relay board 44, a hopper device 51, and a medal auxiliary storage switch 75. In addition, since the structure of the external concentration terminal board 47 and the hopper apparatus 51 was mentioned above, those description is abbreviate | omitted here.

  The reel relay terminal plate 74 is disposed inside the reel body of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R. The reel relay terminal plate 74 is electrically connected to a stepping motor (not shown) of each of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R, and relays a signal output from the main control board 71 to the stepping motor.

  The medal auxiliary storage switch 75 is provided in the medal auxiliary storage 52 and detects whether or not the medal auxiliary storage 52 is full of medals.

  The power supply device 53 includes a power supply board 53b connected to the main control board 71 and a power switch 53a connected to the power supply board 53b. The power switch 53a is pressed when supplying the necessary power to the pachi-slot 1.

  In addition, the pachislot 1 has a door relay terminal plate 68 and a selector 66, a door open / close monitoring switch 67, and a BET switch 77 (bet detecting means) connected to the main control board 71 via the door relay terminal plate 68. , A settlement switch 78, a start switch 79, a stop switch board 80, a game operation display board 81, and a sub relay board 61. Since the selector 66, the door open / close monitoring switch 67, and the sub relay board 61 have been described above, the description thereof is omitted here.

  The BET switch 77 detects that the MAX bet button 21 or the 1 bet button 22 has been pressed by the player. The settlement switch 78 detects that the settlement button 27 has been pressed by the player. The start switch 79 (start operation detecting means) detects that the start lever 23 has been operated by the player (start operation).

  The stop switch board 80 (stop operation detecting means) includes a circuit for stopping the spinning reel and a circuit for displaying the stoppable reel by an LED or the like. The stop switch board 80 is provided with a stop switch. The stop switch detects that each stop button 19L, 19C, 19R has been pressed by the player (stop operation).

  The game operation display board 81 is connected to the 7-segment display 24, and is inserted when receiving insertion of a medal, when the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R are rotatable, and when performing a re-game. This is a substrate for displaying the number of medals on the 7-segment display 24. In addition, an LED 82 is connected to the game operation display board 81, and the LED 82 lights, for example, a mark for displaying a game start or a mark for performing a replay based on a signal input from the game operation display board 81. .

  The sub control board 72 is connected to the main control board 71 via the door relay terminal board 68 and the sub relay board 61. The pachislot machine 1 also includes a sound I / O board 84, LED boards 62A and 62B, and a 24h door open / close monitoring unit 63 connected to the sub control board 72 via the sub relay board 61. Since the LED boards 62A and 62B and the 24h door opening / closing monitoring unit 63 have been described above, description thereof will be omitted here.

  The sound I / O board 84 outputs sound to a speaker group including lower speakers 65L and 65R and various speakers (not shown).

  The pachislo 1 has a ROM cartridge substrate 86 (second storage means) and a liquid crystal relay substrate 87 connected to the sub control substrate 72. The ROM cartridge substrate 86 and the liquid crystal relay substrate 87 are housed in the sub control board case 57 together with the sub control board 72.

  The ROM cartridge substrate 86 is a substrate for managing production image (video), sound, light (LED group 85) and communication data. The liquid crystal relay substrate 87 is a substrate that relays connection wiring between the sub control substrate 72 and the liquid crystal display device 11.

<Main control circuit>
Next, the configuration of the main control circuit 91 mounted on the main control board 71 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of the main control circuit 91 of the pachi-slot 1.

  The main control circuit 91 is mainly composed of a microcomputer 92 mounted on the main control board 71. The microcomputer 92 includes a main CPU 93, a main ROM 94, and a main RAM 95.

  The main ROM 94 stores a control program executed by the main CPU 93, a data table, data for transmitting various control commands (commands) to the sub control circuit 101, and the like. The main RAM 95 is provided with a storage area for storing various data such as an internal winning combination determined by execution of the control program.

  The main CPU 93 is connected to a clock pulse generation circuit 96, a frequency divider 97, a random number generator 98 and a sampling circuit 99. The clock pulse generation circuit 96 and the frequency divider 97 generate clock pulses. The main CPU 93 executes a control program based on the generated clock pulse. The random number generator 98 generates a random number in a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 65535). The sampling circuit 99 extracts one value from the generated random numbers.

  The main CPU 93 counts the number of times pulses are output to the stepping motor of each reel after detecting the reel index. Thus, the main CPU 93 manages the rotation angle of each reel (mainly, how many symbols the reel has rotated). The reel index is information indicating that the reel has made one revolution. The reel index includes, for example, an optical sensor having a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit, and a detection piece provided at a predetermined position on each reel and interposed between the light emitting unit and the light receiving unit by rotation of each reel. It is detected by a reel position detection unit (not shown).

  Here, the management of the rotation angle of each reel will be specifically described. The number of pulses output to the stepping motor is counted by a pulse counter provided in the main RAM 95. Each time the output of a predetermined number of pulses necessary for the rotation of one symbol is counted by the pulse counter, the symbol counter provided in the main RAM 95 is incremented by one. The symbol counter is provided for each reel. The value of the symbol counter is cleared when a reel index is detected by a reel position detector (not shown).

  In other words, in the present embodiment, by managing the symbol counter, it is managed how many symbols have been rotated since the reel index was detected. Therefore, the position of each symbol on each reel is detected based on the position where the reel index is detected.

<Sub control circuit>
Next, the configuration of the sub control circuit 101 mounted on the sub control board 72 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 7 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of the sub control circuit 101 of the pachi-slot 1.

  The sub control circuit 101 is electrically connected to the main control circuit 91 and performs processing such as determination and execution of effect contents based on a command transmitted from the main control circuit 91. The sub control circuit 101 basically includes a sub CPU 102, a sub RAM (Dynamic RAM) 103 (first storage unit), a rendering processor 104, a drawing RAM 105, a driver 106, an SRAM (Static RAM) 107, and an RTC (Real Time RAM). Time Clock) 108.

  The sub CPU 102 controls the output of video, sound, and light according to the control program stored in the ROM cartridge substrate 86 in accordance with the command transmitted from the main control circuit 91. The ROM cartridge substrate 86 basically includes a program storage area and a data storage area.

  A control program executed by the sub CPU 102 is stored in the program storage area. For example, the control program includes a main board communication task for controlling communication with the main control circuit 91 and an effect registration task for extracting effect random number values, determining and registering effect contents (effect data). Various programs for executing the program are included. Further, the control program includes a drawing control task (animation task) for controlling display of an image on the liquid crystal display device 11 based on the determined effect content, a lamp control task for controlling light output by a light source such as the LED group 85, and the like. Various programs for executing a sound control task or the like for controlling sound output by the speakers 65L and 65R are also included.

  The data storage area includes a storage area for storing various data tables, a storage area for storing effect data constituting each effect content, and a storage area for storing animation data related to creation of video. Further, the data storage area includes a storage area for storing sound data related to BGM and sound effects, a storage area for storing lamp data related to a light on / off pattern, and the like.

  The sub-RAM 103 is provided with a storage area for registering the determined contents and effects data, and a storage area for storing various data such as an internal winning combination transmitted from the main control circuit 91.

  The sub CPU 102, the rendering processor 104, the drawing RAM (including the frame buffer) 105, and the driver 106 create a video according to the animation data designated by the contents of the presentation, and display the created video on the liquid crystal display device 11.

  Further, the sub CPU 102 causes sounds such as BGM to be output from a group of speakers such as speakers 65L and 65R in accordance with sound data specified by the contents of the effect. Further, the sub CPU 102 controls lighting and extinguishing of the LED group 85 in accordance with the lamp data designated by the contents of the effect.

  The SRAM 107 is a storage device that is used as a backup RAM and backs up predetermined data in the sub RAM 103. The RTC 108 is a clock circuit for date and time.

<RT game state transition flow>
Next, various RT gaming states controlled by the main control circuit 91 (main CPU 93) of the pachislo 1 of the present embodiment and transition flows thereof will be described with reference to FIG.

  In the present embodiment, as the RT gaming state, there are provided three types of states, namely, an RT0 gaming state to an RT2 gaming state, in which the type of the internal winning combination relating to the replay and the winning probability thereof are different from each other. Note that the RT0 gaming state is a gaming state in which the winning probability of the internal winning combination relating to replay is low, and the RT1 gaming state and the RT2 gaming state are both those in which the winning probability of the internal winning combination relating to replay is high. Game state.

  The RT0 gaming state is an RT gaming state set in the initial state, and the number of medals inserted (multiplied) per unit game is two (first) or three (second). State. Note that, in the RT0 gaming state, information indicating that the player is instructed to multiply the number of medals by two is notified (the suggestion of multiplying two is performed).

  Then, in the RT0 gaming state, when a middle bonus (special internal winning combination) of a name “2MB” to be described later, which is internally won (established) only in a two-sheet game, is won as shown in FIG. Shifts from the RT0 gaming state to the RT1 gaming state. Also, in the RT0 gaming state, when a middle bonus having a name “3 MB”, which is internally won (established), which is internally won (established) only when playing three cards, is won, as shown in FIG. Transition to the gaming state.

  In the RT1 game state, the number of inserted medals (multipliers) for each unit game is two or three, but information indicating that the player is instructed to multiply the medals by three is notified. (A suggestion of playing three cards is performed), so that a game of playing three cards is mainly performed. In this case, since the bonus of “2 MB” won when the RT gaming state shifts to the RT1 gaming state is a bonus that is won only when the number of medals is two, in the RT1 gaming state, the “2 MB” bonus is won. The game is played with the bonus carried over. Therefore, hereinafter, the RT1 game state is also referred to as a "state between 2 MB flags". In the game in the state between the 2 MB flags, even if “losing” is internally won, “2 MB” does not win. The control of the game operation in the state between the 2 MB flags is performed by the main control circuit 91. That is, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 91 also functions as a means (predetermined game control means) for controlling a game operation in a state between 2 MB flags (predetermined game state).

  However, in the RT1 game state, when a game of two cards is played and a bonus of “2 MB” is won, a corresponding bonus game is activated. In the “2 MB” bonus game, a game of two is played, and when the number of paid out medals exceeds two, the “2 MB” bonus game ends. Then, when the bonus game of “2 MB” is consumed, as shown in FIG. 8, the RT gaming state shifts from the RT1 gaming state to the RT0 gaming state.

  In the RT2 gaming state, the number of inserted medals (the number of medals) for each unit game is two or three, but since the suggestion of gambling is performed, a game of gambling is mainly performed.

  In the RT2 game state, when a game of three cards is played and a bonus of “3 MB” is won, a corresponding bonus game is activated. In the bonus game of “3 MB”, a game of two is played, and when the number of paid out medals exceeds 30, the bonus game of “3 MB” ends. Then, when the bonus game of “3 MB” is consumed, as shown in FIG. 8, the RT gaming state shifts from the RT2 gaming state to the RT0 gaming state. In the present embodiment, in the RT2 gaming state, it is possible to play a game in a state in which the bonus of “3 MB” won when the RT gaming state shifts to the RT2 gaming state is carried over. The RT2 gaming state is also referred to as a “3MB flag state”.

  In the present embodiment, in the state between the 2 MB flags (RT1 game state) or the state between the 3 MB flags (RT2 game state), the total number of medals stored in the credits and the current number of inserted medals is three (predetermined). In this case, even if the player presses the MAX bet button 21, a medal bet operation (insertion operation) cannot be performed. That is, in the state between the 2 MB flags or the state between the 3 MB flags, if the total number of medals stored in the credit and the current number of inserted medals is 2 or less, the player presses the MAX bet button 21. Even if pressed, the operation is treated as invalid.

  In the state between the 2 MB flags, when the total number of the credits and the number of inserted medals is two and the MAX bet operation of the player is enabled, a game of two is performed, and "2MB" may win. In this case, since the RT gaming state shifts from the RT1 gaming state to the RT0 gaming state, the gaming state shifts to a gaming state disadvantageous to the player. However, as in the present embodiment, when the total number of the credits and the number of inserted medals is 2 or less in the state between the 2 MB flags, the MAX bet operation of the player is invalidated, so that the player's MAX bet operation is disabled. It is possible to prevent the game state from shifting to the disadvantageous game state against the intention.

  In the present embodiment, when the total number of credits and the number of inserted medals is less than three in the normal game state (RT0 game state) as well as in the state between the 2 MB flags and the state between the 3 MB flags, Alternatively, the MAX bet operation of the player may be invalidated.

<Configuration of data table stored in main ROM>
Next, the configuration of various data tables stored in the main ROM 94 will be described with reference to FIGS.

[Design arrangement table]
First, the symbol arrangement table will be described with reference to FIG. The symbol arrangement table includes data (hereinafter, symbol codes (see FIG. 9) for specifying the position of each symbol in the rotation direction of each of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R, and the type of the symbol arranged at each position. ) Is defined.)

  In the symbol arrangement table, when the reel index is detected, the position of the symbol located in the middle area of each reel in the frame of the reel display window 4 is defined as “0”. Then, in each reel, the order corresponding to the value of the symbol counter in the order of progressing in the rotation direction of the reel (the direction from the symbol position "19" in FIG. 9 toward the symbol position "0") based on the symbol position "0". “0” to “19” are assigned to each symbol as a symbol position.

  That is, by referring to the symbol counter value (“0” to “19”) and the symbol arrangement table, each reel is displayed in the upper, middle, and lower regions in the frame of the reel display window 4. It is possible to specify the type of symbol that is present. For example, when the value of the symbol counter corresponding to the left reel 3L is “7”, the symbol position “8” is set in the upper, middle, and lower regions of the left reel 3L within the frame of the left display window 4L. The symbol “yellow BAR”, the symbol “watermelon 1” at symbol position “7”, and the symbol “orange” at symbol position “6” are displayed.

[Design combination table]
Next, the symbol combination tables (Nos. 1 to 3) will be described with reference to FIGS. The symbol combination table includes a symbol combination (combination and combination name) determined in advance according to the type of privilege (bonus, small role, replay), and the corresponding display combination code contents (storage area, data) and payout. The correspondence with the number of sheets is defined.

  In this embodiment, when the symbol combination displayed by the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R along the effective line (center line) matches the symbol combination specified in the symbol combination table, a prize is awarded. It is determined. When it is determined that the prize is won, the player is given a privilege such as medal payout, replay (replay) operation, and bonus operation. If the combination of symbols displayed along the active line does not match any of the symbol combinations defined in the symbol combination table, it is a so-called “lost”. In other words, in this embodiment, the symbol combination corresponding to “losing” is not defined in the symbol combination table, thereby defining the symbol combination “losing”. The present invention is not limited to this, and the symbol combination “losing” may be provided in the symbol combination table to directly define the symbol combination “losing”.

  Various data described in the display combination code column in the symbol combination table is data for identifying a symbol combination displayed along the active line. “Data” in the display combination code column is represented by 1-byte data, and a unique symbol combination (content of display combination) is assigned to each bit in the data.

  Further, the data of the “storage area” in the display combination code column is data for designating a symbol code storage area (see FIG. 30 described later) in which the data of the corresponding symbol combination is stored. In this embodiment, 15 symbol code storage areas are provided. In the present embodiment, display combinations having the same bit pattern (1-byte data pattern) and different contents are managed as different display combinations depending on the difference in the “storage area”.

  The numerical value described in the payout number column in the symbol combination table represents the number of medals to be paid out to the player. In a symbol combination to which a value of 1 or more is assigned as the “payout number” data, medals of the same number as that number are paid out. For example, in this embodiment, when the display combination according to the combination name “CT Bell” is determined for the insertion number of three medals (the symbol combination according to “CT Bell” is stopped and displayed on the activated line). ), Payout of 10 medals is performed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, for example, when the display combination according to the combination name “CT Lip” is determined (when the symbol combination according to “CT Lip” is stopped and displayed on the activated line), the replay is activated. I do. Further, in the present embodiment, for example, when the display combination related to the combination name “3MB” or “2MB” is determined (when the symbol combination related to “3MB” or “2MB” is stopped and displayed on the activated line) , MB (middle bonus) is activated.

  As shown in FIG. 10, in the present embodiment, “0” is defined in the “3 MB” column of “3 MB”, but no number is defined in the “2 MB” column. . Also, “0” is defined in the “2 MB” column of “2 MB”, but no number is defined in the “3 MB” column. That is, in the present embodiment, the symbol combination (display combination) of “3 MB” is valid (winning) only when three cards are multiplied, and invalid (loss) when two cards are multiplied. In addition, the symbol combination (display combination) of “2 MB” is valid (winning) only when two cards are multiplied, and is invalid (loss) when three cards are multiplied.

[Internal lottery table]
Next, the internal lottery table will be described with reference to FIGS. In the present embodiment, an internal lottery table is provided separately in each of the RT0 gaming state (general gaming state), the RT1 gaming state (state between 2 MB flags), the RT2 gaming state (state between 3 MB flags), and the MB gaming state. Further, in each of the RT0 gaming state (general gaming state), the RT1 gaming state (state between 2MB flags) and the RT2 gaming state (state between 3MB flags), an internal number is set for each number of medals (two or three). A lottery table is provided.

  Each of the internal lottery tables includes a winning number (internal winning combination), a lottery value (winning probability) when each winning number is determined, and a data pointer (small winning combination) obtained when each winning number is determined. (A data pointer for replay and a data pointer for bonus). In addition, in the internal lottery table referred to when the number of medals is three shown in FIGS. 13 to 15, the abbreviation of the internal winning combination is also described for convenience of explanation. Further, in the internal lottery table referred to when the number of medals is two and the internal lottery table referred to during the MB gaming state shown in FIGS. The description of the name and the data pointer is omitted.

  In addition, the lottery value is defined for each setting (settings 1 to 6) for adjusting the expected value of internal winnings such as bonuses and small roles set in advance. This setting is changed using, for example, a reset switch (not shown) and a setting key switch (not shown).

  In the internal lottery process of this embodiment, first, an internal lottery random number value (external random number value) extracted from a predetermined numerical range (for example, 0 to 65535) is defined corresponding to each winning number. The lottery value is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined (internal lottery) whether the result of the subtraction has become negative (whether a so-called “digit” has occurred). If the result of the subtraction is negative ("digit" occurs) in the predetermined winning number, it means that the winning number (internal winning combination) has been won.

  Therefore, in the internal lottery process of the present embodiment, the probability that the assigned data pointer is determined is higher for a winning number having a larger numerical value defined as a lottery value. The winning probability of each winning number can be expressed by “the lottery value specified for each winning number / the number of all random numbers that may be extracted (random denominator: 65536)”.

(1) General (RT0) internal lottery table for game state (3 pieces)
FIG. 13 is a diagram showing the configuration of an internal lottery table (for three) for a general (RT0) gaming state. This internal (RT3) internal lottery table for the general (RT0) gaming state is referred to when the number of medals per unit game is 3 in the general gaming state (RT0 gaming state). The general (RT0) gaming state internal lottery table (three sheets) defines the relationship between the winning numbers “1” to “58” (various internal winning combinations), the corresponding lottery values (winning probabilities), and the data pointers. I do.

  For example, in the general gaming state (RT0 gaming state), when the setting 1 of the internal (RT0) gaming state internal lottery table (three sheets) is referred to, the winning number “2” (internal winning combination “2MB”) is won. The probability of performing is “0”. On the other hand, in the general gaming state (RT0 gaming state), when the setting 1 of the internal (RT0) gaming state internal lottery table (3 pieces) is referred to, the winning number “3” (internal winning combination “3MB”) is won. The probability of performing is “17200/65536 (1 / 3.8)”. In this case, “0” is acquired as the small part / replay data pointer, and “2” is acquired as the bonus data pointer. That is, in the present embodiment, when a game of three cards is played in the normal game state (RT0 game state), only “3 MB” is won as a bonus.

  Further, for example, in the general gaming state (RT0 gaming state), when the setting 1 of the internal (RT0) gaming state internal lottery table (3 pieces) is referred to, the winning number “4” (internal winning combination “normal lip 1”) The probability of winning “)” is “374/65536 (1 / 175.2)”. Then, in this case, “1” is acquired as the small part / replay data pointer, and “0” is acquired as the bonus data pointer.

(2) Between 2 MB flags (RT1) Internal lottery table for game state (3 pieces)
FIG. 14 is a diagram showing a configuration of an internal lottery table for game state between 2 MB flags (RT1) (three sheets). The internal lottery table for the 2 MB flag (RT1) gaming state (three cards) is referred to when the number of medals per unit game is three in the 2 MB flag state (RT1 gaming state). The internal lottery table for the gaming state between the 2 MB flags (RT1) (three sheets) is a relationship between the winning numbers “1” to “58” (various internal winning combinations), the corresponding lottery values (winning probabilities), and the data pointers. Is defined.

  For example, in the state between 2 MB flags (RT1 game state), when the setting 1 of the internal lottery table for the 2MB flag (RT1) game state (three sheets) is referred, the winning number “2” (internal winning combination “2MB”) ) Or the winning number “3” (internal winning combination “3 MB”) is both “0”. That is, in this embodiment, when a game of three cards is played in the state between the 2 MB flags (RT1 game state), both the bonuses of “2 MB” and “3 MB” are not won.

  Also, for example, in the state between the 2 MB flags (RT1 game state), when the setting 1 of the internal lottery table for the 2 MB flag (RT1) game state (three sheets) is referred to, the winning number “4” (internal winning combination “ The probability of winning the “normal lip 1”) is “2048/65536 (1/32)”. Then, in this case, “1” is acquired as the small part / replay data pointer, and “0” is acquired as the bonus data pointer.

  The winning probabilities of the winning numbers “4” to “16” in the internal (RT0) gaming state internal lottery table (three sheets) shown in FIG. 13 and the 2 MB flag (RT1) gaming state internal state shown in FIG. As is clear from comparison with those in the lottery table (three sheets), the winning probability of the replay combination in the state between the 2 MB flags (RT1 gaming state) is higher than that in the normal gaming state (RT0 gaming state).

(3) Between 3 MB flags (RT2) Internal lottery table for game state (3 sheets)
FIG. 15 is a diagram showing a configuration of the internal lottery table for a gaming state between three MB flags (RT2) (three sheets). The internal lottery table for 3MB flag (RT2) gaming state is referred to when the number of medals per unit game is three in the 3MB flag state (RT2 gaming state). The internal lottery table for game state between 3 MB flags (RT2) (three sheets) has a relationship between winning numbers “1” to “58” (various internal winning combinations), corresponding lottery values (winning probabilities), and data pointers. Is defined.

  For example, in the state between 3MB flags (RT2 gaming state), when the setting 1 of the internal lottery table for 3MB flag (RT2) gaming state (three sheets) is referred to, the winning number “2” (internal winning combination “2MB”) ) Or the winning number “3” (internal winning combination “3 MB”) is both “0”. That is, in this embodiment, when a game of three cards is played in the state between the 3 MB flags (RT2 game state), both the bonuses of “2 MB” and “3 MB” are not won.

  Further, for example, in the state between 3 MB flags (RT2 game state), when the setting 1 of the internal lottery table for 3MB flag (RT2) game state (three sheets) is referred to, the winning number “4” (internal winning combination “ The probability of winning the “normal lip 1”) is “500/65536 (1/131)”. Then, in this case, “1” is acquired as the small part / replay data pointer, and “0” is acquired as the bonus data pointer.

  The winning probabilities of the winning numbers “4” to “16” in the general (RT0) gaming state internal lottery table (three sheets) shown in FIG. 13 and the 3MB flag between (RT2) gaming state internals shown in FIG. As is apparent from comparison with those in the lottery table (three sheets), the winning probability of the replay combination in the state between the 3 MB flags (RT2 gaming state) is higher than that in the general gaming state (RT0 gaming state). Further, the winning probabilities of the winning numbers “4” to “16” in the internal lottery table for the gaming state (RT1) between the 2 MB flags (RT1) shown in FIG. 14 and the gaming state between the 3MB flags (RT2) shown in FIG. As is clear from comparison with those in the internal lottery table (for three), the winning probability of the replay combination in the state between 3 MB flags (RT2 game state) is lower than that in the state between 2 MB flags (RT1 game state). Become.

(4) General (RT0) internal lottery table for game state (2 sheets)
FIG. 16 is a diagram showing a configuration of a general (RT0) gaming state internal lottery table (two sheets). The internal lottery table for the general (RT0) gaming state (two-piece) is referred to when the number of medals per unit game is two in the general gaming state (RT0 gaming state). The general (RT0) gaming state internal lottery table (two-sheet) defines the relationship between the winning numbers “1” to “5” (various internal winning combinations) and the corresponding lottery values (winning probabilities). Note that the internal winning combination with the name “2 Bells” in FIG. 16 corresponds to all small combinations.

  For example, in the general gaming state (RT0 gaming state), if the setting 1 of the internal (RT0) gaming state internal lottery table (two-sheet multiplication) is referred to, the winning number “2” (internal winning combination “2MB”) is won. The probability of performing is “26000/65536 (1 / 2.52)”. On the other hand, in the general gaming state (RT0 gaming state), when the setting 1 of the internal (RT0) gaming state internal lottery table (2 sheets) is referred to, the winning number “3” (internal winning combination “3MB”) is won. The probability of performing is “0”. That is, in the present embodiment, when a game of two cards is played in the normal game state (RT0 game state), only “2 MB” is won as a bonus.

  Also, for example, in the general gaming state (RT0 gaming state), when the setting 1 of the internal (RT0) gaming state internal lottery table (2 sheets) is referred to, the winning number “4” (internal winning combination “normal lip 1”) )) Is “8978/65536 (1 / 7.3)”.

(5) Between 2 MB flags (RT1) Internal lottery table for game state (2 sheets)
FIG. 17 is a diagram showing a configuration of an internal lottery table for a game state between 2 MB flags (RT1) (two sheets). The internal lottery table for 2MB flag (RT1) gaming state is referred to when the number of medals for a unit game is two in the 2MB flag state (RT1 gaming state). The internal lottery table for gaming state between 2 MB flags (RT1) (two-sheet multiplication) defines the relationship between winning numbers “1” to “5” (various internal winning combinations) and corresponding lottery values (winning probabilities). . Note that, for example, the name “2MB + 2 bells” in FIG. 17 corresponds to the case where the internal winning combination with the name “2 bells” (all small combinations) is won while “2MB” is being carried over.

  For example, in the state between the 2 MB flags (RT1 game state), when the setting 1 of the internal lottery table for the 2 MB flag (RT1) game state is referred to, the winning number “2” (internal winning combination “2 MB”) ) Or the winning number “3” (internal winning combination “3 MB”) is both “0”. That is, in the present embodiment, when a game of two cards is played in the state between the 2 MB flags (RT1 game state), the bonuses of “2 MB” and “3 MB” are not won.

  Further, for example, in the state between 2 MB flags (RT1 game state), when the setting 1 of the internal lottery table for the 2MB flag (RT1) game state (two sheets) is referred to, the winning number “4” (internal winning combination “ The probability of winning “2MB + normal lip 1”) is “32978/65536 (1 / 1.99)”.

  Note that the winning probability of the winning number "4" in the general (RT0) gaming state internal lottery table (two-sheet multiplication) shown in FIG. 16 and the 2MB flag (RT1) gaming state internal lottery table (2) shown in FIG. As is apparent from comparison with that of the multi-player game, the winning probability of the replay combination in the 2 MB flag state (RT1 game state) is higher than that in the general game state (RT0 game state) even in the game of two cards. Become.

(6) Internal lottery table for game state between 3 MB flags (RT2) (2 sheets)
FIG. 18 is a diagram showing the configuration of the internal lottery table (for two sheets) for a gaming state between 3 MB flags (RT2). The internal lottery table for the 3MB flag (RT2) gaming state (two pieces) is referred to when the number of medals per unit game is two in the three MB flag state (RT2 gaming state). The internal lottery table for the gaming state between the 3 MB flags (RT2) (two sheets) defines the relationship between the winning numbers “1” to “5” (various internal winning combinations) and the corresponding lottery values (winning probabilities). . Note that, for example, the name “3 MB + 2 bells” in FIG. 18 corresponds to the case where the internal winning combination with the name “2 bells” (all small combinations) is won while “3 MB” is being carried over.

  For example, in the state between the 3MB flags (RT2 game state), when the setting 1 of the internal lottery table for the 3MB flag (RT2) game state (two-slot) is referred to, the winning number “2” (internal winning combination “2MB”) ) Or the winning number “3” (internal winning combination “3 MB”) is both “0”. That is, in this embodiment, when a game of two cards is played in the state between the 3 MB flags (RT2 game state), the bonuses of “2 MB” and “3 MB” are not won.

  Also, for example, in the state between 3 MB flags (RT2 game state), when the setting 1 of the internal lottery table for the 3MB flag (RT2) game state (two sheets) is referred to, the winning number “4” (internal winning combination “ The probability of winning “3MB + normal lip 1”) is “8980/65536 (1 / 7.3)”.

  Note that the winning probability of the winning number “4” in the general (RT0) gaming state internal lottery table (two sheets) shown in FIG. 16 and the 3MB flag (RT2) gaming state internal lottery table (2) shown in FIG. As is apparent from comparison with that of the multi-player game, the winning probability of the replay combination in the 3 MB flag state (RT2 game state) is higher than that in the general game state (RT0 game state) even in the game of two cards. Become. Also, the winning probability of the winning number “4” in the internal lottery table for 2MB flag (RT1) gaming state (two-sheet) shown in FIG. 17 and the internal lottery table for 3MB flag (RT2) gaming state shown in FIG. As is clear from comparison with that of (two-sheet game), even in the game of two-sheet game, the winning probability of the replay combination in the 3MB flag state (RT2 game state) is the same as that of the 2MB flag state (RT1 game state). Lower than that.

(7) 2MB Game State Internal Lottery Table FIG. 19 is a diagram showing the structure of the 2MB game state internal lottery table. This 2 MB gaming state internal lottery table is referred to when the middle bonus “2 MB” is operating (when the gaming state is the 2 MB gaming state). The 2MB gaming state internal lottery table defines the relationship between the winning numbers “1” and “2” and the corresponding lottery values (winning probabilities).

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 19, when the gaming state is the 2MB gaming state, the internal winning combination with the name “CB combination” is always won. The internal winning combination with the name “CB combination” corresponds to all small combinations.

(8) Internal Lottery Table for 3MB Game State FIG. 20 is a diagram showing the configuration of the internal lottery table for 3MB game state. This 3MB gaming state internal lottery table is referred to when the middle bonus “3MB” is operating (when the gaming state is the 3MB gaming state). The 3MB gaming state internal lottery table defines the relationship between the winning numbers “1” and “2” and the corresponding lottery values (winning probabilities).

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 20, when the gaming state is the 3MB gaming state, the internal winning combination with the name “CB combination” is always won.

[Symbol combination determination table]
Next, the symbol combination determination table will be described with reference to FIGS. The symbol combination determination table defines a correspondence between an internal winning combination and a symbol combination (combination) that can be displayed on an active line (center line). Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the internal winning combination is determined, the type of the symbol combination that can be displayed on the activated line based on the symbol combination determination table, that is, the type of the display combination that can be won, is uniquely determined. Is done. A black circle mark in each symbol combination determination table indicates a symbol combination (combination) that can be displayed on the activated line (center line) in the internal winning combination that has been won.

  For example, when the internal winning combination is “normal lip 1”, the names “CT lip”, “CU lip”, “bell lip 1” to “bell lip 8”, “BTBAR1” to “BTBAR6”, “CTSVN1”, The symbol combination of “CTSVN2”, “CDSVN2” and “CDSVN3” can be stopped and displayed. Also, for example, when the internal winning combination is “213 bell 1”, the symbol combination of the name “CT bell” and “control combination 1” to “control combination 10” can be stopped and displayed. Further, for example, when the internal winning combination is a combination of the name "CB combination", the symbol combination of all the small combinations can be stopped and displayed.

  Note that the symbol combination determination table does not specify the case where the “internal winning combination” is “losing”, but this does not apply to all the symbols defined by the symbol combination tables shown in FIGS. Indicates that the display of the combination is not permitted.

<Configuration of storage area provided in main RAM>
Next, the configuration of various storage areas provided in the main RAM 95 will be described with reference to FIGS. Although not described here (not shown), storage areas for various control data, various flags, various counters, and the like used for various reel effects (various game locks) are also provided in the main RAM 95.

[Internal winning combination storage area]
First, the configuration of the internal winning combination storage area will be described with reference to FIG. In the present embodiment, the internal winning combination storage area is constituted by internal winning combination storage areas 0 to 7 each represented by 1-byte data.

  When "1" is stored in a predetermined bit in each of the internal winning combination storage areas 0 to 7, it indicates that the internal winning combination corresponding to the predetermined bit has been internally won. In the internal winning combination storage area shown in FIG. 24, the storage areas corresponding to the internal winning combinations of the names “2 Bell” and “CB combination” are not defined, but when these internal winning combinations are won. , “1” is stored in the storage area (bit) of all internal winning combinations related to the small winning combination.

[Display role storage area]
Next, the configuration of the display combination storing area will be described with reference to FIG. In the present embodiment, the display combination storage area includes display combination storage areas 0 to 7 each represented by 1-byte data.

  When "1" is stored in a predetermined bit in each of the display combination storage areas 0 to 7, it indicates that various symbol combinations of the internal winning combination corresponding to the predetermined bit have been displayed on the activated line. .

[Holdover combination storage area]
Next, the configuration of the carryover combination storage area will be described with reference to FIG. In the present embodiment, the carryover combination storage area is composed of a 1-byte data storage area.

  As a result of the internal lottery, when either “2 MB” or “3 MB” is determined as the internal winning combination, the internal winning combination is stored in the carryover combination storage area as a carryover combination. The carryover combination stored in the carryover combination storage area is retained without being cleared until the corresponding symbol combination is displayed on the payline. Further, while the carryover combination is stored in the carryover combination storage area, the carryover combination is stored in the internal winning combination storage area in addition to the internal winning combination determined by the internal lottery.

[Game state flag storage area]
Next, the configuration of the gaming state flag storage area will be described with reference to FIG. The game state flag storage area includes a 1-byte data storage area. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 27, a unique bonus type or RT type is assigned to each bit of the gaming state flag storage area.

  When "1" is stored in a predetermined bit in the gaming state flag storage area, it indicates that a bonus game or RT operation corresponding to the predetermined bit is being performed. For example, when “1” is stored in bit 0 of the gaming state flag storage area, the operation of the middle bonus “2 MB” is being performed, indicating that the gaming state is the 2 MB gaming state.

[Operation stop button storage area]
Next, the configuration of the operation stop button storage area will be described with reference to FIG. The operation stop button storage area includes a 1-byte data storage area, and stores an operation stop button flag composed of 1 byte. In the operation stop button flag, the operation state of the stop button is assigned to each bit.

  For example, when the left stop button 19L is the currently pressed stop button, that is, the operation stop button, “1” is stored in bit 0 of the operation stop button storage area. For example, if the left stop button 19L is a stop button that has not been pressed yet, that is, an effective stop button, “1” is stored in bit 4. Based on the data stored in the operation stop button storage area, the main CPU 93 identifies the stop button that has been pressed this time and the stop button that has not yet been pressed.

[Push order storage area]
Next, the configuration of the pressing order storage area will be described with reference to FIG. The pressing order storage area is composed of a 1-byte data storage area, and stores a pressing order flag composed of 1 byte.

  In the pressing order flag, the type of the pressing order of the stop button is assigned to each bit. For example, when the pressing order of the stop button is “left center right”, “1” is stored in bit 0 of the pressing order storage area.

[Design code storage area]
Next, the configuration of the symbol code storage area will be described with reference to FIG. In the present embodiment, the symbol code storage area includes symbol code storage areas 0 to 14 each represented by 1-byte data.

  In the symbol code storage area, “1” is stored in a bit corresponding to a display combination (symbol combination) that can be stopped on an active line. After all the reels are stopped, the symbol codes corresponding to the display combination are stored in the symbol code storage areas 0 to 14.

<Various sub game states>
Next, in the pachislo 1 of the present embodiment, various sub game states related to effects controlled by the sub control circuit 101 (sub CPU 102) in the state between 2 MB flags (RT1 game state) will be described.

  In the present embodiment, states called “non-AT state”, “AT preparation state”, “AT state”, and “pseudo BB (big bonus) state” are provided as sub game states in the state between 2 MB flags. Can be The game in the “pseudo BB state” is performed as an interrupt process when a pseudo BB lottery performed in the “non-AT state”, the “AT preparation state”, and the “AT state” is won.

  Further, in the present embodiment, although a detailed description is omitted, as a sub game state in the state between the 2 MB flags, a state called “W chance state” which can transition from the “AT state”, or “AT state” or “AT state” There is also provided a state called an “additional challenge state” that can transition from the “pseudo BB state”. Hereinafter, the contents of each sub game state will be specifically described.

  As described below, the pachislot 1 according to the present embodiment has a predetermined privilege (shortening the cycle of the non-AT state or adding the number of AT games) at the time of “losing” in various sub game states during the 2 MB flag state. ) Is provided. This privilege granting function is controlled by the sub-control circuit 101. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 also serves as a unit (privilege granting determining unit) for determining whether or not to give a predetermined privilege when "losing" is won.

[Non-AT state]
The non-AT state includes a “normal state” and a “transition effect state” to the AT state. In the non-AT state, basically, the games in the normal state and the transition effect state are periodically repeated with a predetermined number of unit games (190 games in this embodiment).

  Specifically, in one cycle of the game in the non-AT state, first, a game in a normal state (hereinafter, referred to as “normal game”) in which one set has 180 games (first unit game number) is executed. Be done. Next, after the normal game is consumed, a game in a transition effect state (hereinafter, referred to as a transition effect game) is performed over a period of 10 games.

  At the start of the transition effect game, an AT lottery is performed. If the lottery result is an AT winning, an effect corresponding to the AT winning is performed during the transition effect game, and thereafter, the sub game state is set to the AT preparation state. Move to On the other hand, if the result of the AT lottery is not AT winning, an effect corresponding to AT non-winning is performed during the transition effect game, and then the next set of normal games (games in the non-AT state in the next cycle) is performed. Be started.

  As described above, when the result of the AT lottery in the transition effect game is non-winning, the normal game and the transition effect game are periodically repeated with a predetermined number of games (190 games). Then, in this periodic game digestion process, basically, after the normal game is digested (after the 180 games are digested), a chance to shift to the AT state is always provided. That is, in the non-AT state, a transition chance to the AT state is given periodically. Hereinafter, the contents of the normal game and the transition effect game will be described in more detail.

(1) Normal Game In the normal game, a lottery (hereinafter, referred to as “pseudo BB game”) of winning / non-winning of a game in the pseudo BB state (hereinafter, referred to as “pseudo BB game”) based on each game (per unit game) and the internal winning combination. "Pseudo BB lottery").

  When a pseudo BB lottery is won in the normal game, the pseudo BB game is started as an interrupt process. During the period of the pseudo BB game, the game number of the normal game is not counted (subtracted). When the pseudo BB game is completed, the sub game state returns to the normal state. At this time, the normal game is restarted from the state before the start of the pseudo BB game.

  In the normal game, “losing” or a specific internal winning combination (in the present embodiment, any of “normal lip”, “weak che”, “strong che”, and “rare role”) is internally won once. In the case or when consecutive winnings are made, a subtraction lottery of the number of remaining games in the current game of the current set, that is, a shortened lottery of the game period in the non-AT state of the current cycle (hereinafter referred to as “cycle shortened lottery”) is performed. Therefore, if the cycle shortening lottery is won in the normal game, the period until the transition effect game is started in the non-AT state game period of the current cycle is shortened. That is, the period until the start of the game in the AT state may be shorter.

  In the present embodiment, when the number of remaining games in the current set of the current set is equal to or greater than the predetermined number of games (predetermined unit number of games: 10 games in the present embodiment), the period reduction lottery is won in the base game. Is subtracted from the number of remaining reduced games (subtraction number) from the number of remaining normal games in the current set. At this time, if the subtraction result is less than the predetermined number of games (10 games) (the subtraction result may be a negative value), the absolute value of the number of games resulting from the subtraction is reduced to the surplus reduced game in the current set. Stocked as a number (surplus unit games). On the other hand, in a case where the number of shortened games in the current set is shorter than the predetermined number of games (10 games), the number of shortened games won is equal to the number of surplus reduced games. Stocked as

  For example, if the predetermined number of games is 10 games, the number of remaining normal games in the current set is 30 games, and the number of shortened games won is 50 games, the subtraction result is -20 games. Therefore, the number of games to be stocked as the surplus reduced game number is 20 games. At this time, the reference of the number of reduced games to be stocked as a surplus is a predetermined number of games (10 games), and the difference between the value of the predetermined number of games (10) and the value of the subtraction result (−20) corresponds to the difference. The number of games to be played (30 games) may be set as the number of surplus reduced games. Further, for example, when the predetermined number of games is 10 games, the number of remaining normal games in the current set is 5 games, and the number of winning reduced games is 50 games, the number of surplus reduced games is The number of games to be stocked is 50 games.

  The number of surplus shortened games that have been stocked is applied at the start of a game in the non-AT state in the next cycle, that is, at the start of a normal game in the next set. At that time, the game period in the normal state (non-AT state) Is shortened. In this case, in the non-AT state game period of the next cycle, the period until the transition effect game is started is shortened. That is, when the number of surplus reduced games is generated as a result of the cycle shortening lottery, the period until the start of the game in the AT state may be shorter in the next cycle. Also, for example, depending on the number of shortened games obtained by the cycle shortening lottery (the number of stocked shortened games), the transition effect game may be started from the beginning in the non-AT state game period of the next cycle.

(2) Transition Effect Game In the transition effect game, the effect (notification) game showing the result (win / non-win) of the AT lottery performed at the start of the game period is a specific number of games (third unit game number: book). In the embodiment, the game is performed over 10 games. In the pachislot 1 of the present embodiment, in the transition effect game, an effect in which a plurality of ally characters and an enemy character race (a race effect) is performed as an effect indicating an AT lottery result. Note that this race effect is mainly performed by displaying a race image on the liquid crystal display device 11. Here, the content of the race effect (transition effect to the AT state) performed in the transition effect game will be described more specifically.

  Specifically, first, at the start of a race effect (transition effect game), a lottery (race result lottery) as to whether or not a predetermined ally character previously set as a race victory target (candidate) wins the race is performed. Do. In this race result lottery, if a predetermined team character wins the race, AT is won, and if the predetermined team character is not won, the AT is not won.

  Also, at the start of a race effect (transition effect game), a plurality of ally characters including a predetermined ally character set as a race victory target (candidate) and an enemy character are members of the race, and the liquid crystal display device 11 is displayed. Then, during the game period of the subsequent race effect, when the AT is won, a video effect in which a predetermined ally character wins the race is performed by the liquid crystal display device 11, and when the AT is not won, the image effect in which the enemy character wins the race is performed. This is performed by the liquid crystal display device 11.

  Therefore, as a result of the race effect performed in the transition effect game, if the predetermined ally character wins, the sub game state transitions from the transition effect state to the AT preparation state, and if the enemy character wins, the next set ( A normal game (a game in a non-AT state) of the next cycle is started. In the present embodiment, the number of basic stay games in the AT state to be performed thereafter changes according to the type of the ally character that has won the race. This will be described in detail later.

  In the present embodiment, six types of ally characters, “male A”, “male B”, “female A”, “kappa”, “tengu”, and “male A / male B” are provided. In addition, the information on the type of the ally character to be a race victory target (candidate) in the transitional production game, and the content of the race production relating to the race win rate of the ally character is determined in the non-AT state game in the current cycle. When the information regarding the contents of the effect is not set (when the race runner MAP described later is not set (initial state) or when the race information MAP data described later is “0”), the non-AT state of the current cycle is set. At the start of the game (at the start of the game period of the normal game). Further, at this time, in the present embodiment, not only the information on the contents of the race effects of the current set (first race) but also the information on the contents of the race effects up to the fourth set (fifth game) are determined.

  In the transition effect game, pseudo BB lottery is performed for each game based on the internal winning combination. Then, in the transition effect game, when the pseudo BB lottery is won, the pseudo BB game is started as an interrupt process, and when the pseudo BB game is consumed, the sub game state shifts to the AT preparation state.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when a specific condition is satisfied (when the pseudo BB state is “between BB flags” or “waiting for BB operation”) during the game period of the transition effect state (during the race effect period): 124), an additional lottery is performed for the number of AT games, and when the lottery is won, a predetermined additional AT game number is obtained.

  The operation control of the normal game and the transition effect game described above is executed by the sub control circuit 101. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 also functions as means for controlling the operations of the normal game and the transition effect game (the normal game control means and the transition effect game control means).

[AT preparation state]
In the pachislo 1 of the present embodiment, when the sub game state transitions from the transition effect state to the AT state, the sub game state transitions to the AT state via the AT preparation state. In the AT preparation state, a game for determining the number of basic stay games in the AT state (hereinafter, referred to as “AT start game number”) is mainly performed (hereinafter, referred to as “AT start game number determination game”). Note that also in the AT start game number determining game (notifying game number determining game), pseudo BB lottery is performed for each game based on the internal winning combination.

  In the present embodiment, the number of AT start games (basic unit number of games) is determined by the type of the ally character ("male A", "male B", "female A", "kappa", "Tengu" or "male A / male B"). Specifically, it is as follows.

(1) When "Men A" Wins When "Men A" wins the race effect, the AT start game is determined based on the internal winning combination by lever operation performed in the start game of the game for determining the number of AT start games. The number is determined by lottery, and a predetermined AT start game number (50 games to 300 games) is determined.

  In the present embodiment, the number of AT start games may not be determined in the start game of the game for determining the number of AT start games when "male A" wins. In this case, the game for determining the number of AT start games is continued, At the time of operating the lever of the next game, the lottery of the AT start game number is performed again. At this time, the continuation number of the AT start game number determining game (once or twice in the present embodiment) changes according to the internal winning combination determined in the start game of the AT start game number determining game. Then, in the game for determining the number of AT start games when “Men A” wins, a lottery table (not shown) of the number of AT start games is appropriately set so that the number of AT start games acquired increases as the number of times of continuation increases. ing.

(2) When "Men B" Wins When "Men B" wins the race effect, the number of AT start games is determined by the lever operation performed in the start game of the AT start game number determination game. Then, a predetermined number of AT start games (50 games to 300 games) is determined. In the game for determining the number of AT start games when "male B" wins, the number of AT start games is determined in one game. Note that the lottery value of the number of AT start games used in the lottery for determining the number of AT start games when “male B” wins is the same regardless of the internal winning combination.

(3) When "Women A" Wins When "Women A" wins the race effect, the number of AT start games is determined by the continuous beating operation of the MAX bet button 21. In the game for determining the number of AT start games when “Female A” wins in the present embodiment, two types of determination modes (determination modes) for the number of AT start games are prepared.

  Specifically, a first mode in which the number of AT start games is added by 50 in one MAX bet operation, and a second mode in which the number of AT start games is added by five in one MAX bet operation Is prepared. In both modes, the continuous lottery of the addition process of the AT start game number is performed for each MAX bet operation. In the first mode, the continuation probability is 50%, and in the second mode, the continuation probability is 95%. Become. This AT start game number determination mode (decision mode) is selected by the player at the start of the AT start game number determination game (AT ready state game).

  In the game for determining the number of AT start games when “Female A” wins, first, at the end of the next game (after the reels are completely stopped) after the LCD device 11 notifies the player that “Female A” has won, the AT start game is started. Information indicating that a selection operation of the number determination mode (determination mode) is performed is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11. Next, one of the first mode and the second mode is selected as a mode for determining the number of AT start games by the operation of the selection button 25 by the player. Next, when the lever operation of the game following the game in which the selection operation of the AT start game number determination mode is performed is performed, the AT start game number determination mode (first mode or second mode) selected by the player is performed. Mode) is determined (determined). Then, in the game in which the determination operation of the determination mode of the number of AT start games is performed, after the reels have completely stopped, the processing of adding the number of AT start games is performed by continuous hitting of the MAX bet button 21. That is, the game for determining the number of AT start games when “Female A” wins is performed over two games after the LCD device 11 notifies the player that “Female A” has won.

  In the game for determining the number of AT start games when “Female A” wins, a predetermined lottery is performed for each MAX bet operation until the result of the continuous lottery of the process of adding the number of AT start games performed for each MAX bet operation becomes non-winning. Of AT games (50 games or 5 games) are added to the number of AT start games. The AT start game number is added only at the time of the MAX bet operation when the continuous lottery of the process of adding the number of AT start games is a winning. Therefore, for example, in the game for determining the number of AT start games when “Female A” wins, the first mode is selected, and the result of the continuous lottery of the addition processing of the number of AT start games is performed in the sixth MAX bet operation. Is not won, the number of AT start games is 250 games.

  When the first mode is selected, if the result of the continuous lottery of the process of adding the number of AT start games in the first MAX bet operation is non-winning, the number of AT start games is reduced to 50 games. Set. That is, when the first mode is selected, the number of AT start games of 50 games is guaranteed. When the second mode is selected, since the number of added games for each MAX bet operation is small, the MAX bet operation for a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 games) is guaranteed.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, in the game for determining the number of AT start games when “Female A” wins, the number of AT start games is determined by a continuous hit operation (continuous hit lottery) of the MAX bet button 21. However, due to an erroneous operation of the player, for example, the pressing operation of the MAX bet button 21 is not performed at all, or the player presses the MAX bet button 21 during the continuous lottery (before the continuous lottery becomes non-winning). In some cases, the operation may be stopped. In this case, an undetermined state of the number of AT start games occurs.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the above situation occurs, at the time of operating the start lever of the next game (AT game start game) of the AT start game number determination game, an additional loop lottery is performed by an internal process by the internal processing. Is automatically performed to determine the number of AT start games when “Female A” wins.

  By providing such a recovery function of the additional lottery process of the number of AT start games, the AT game can be performed before the additional consecutive lottery with the number of AT start games using the MAX bet button 21 ends due to, for example, an erroneous operation of the player. Even if started, the benefits of AT games that would be obtained when "Female A" wins are guaranteed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable, and to give a motivation to continue the game.

(4) When "Tengu" wins When "Tengu" wins in the race production, the lever operation performed in the start game of the AT start game number determination game is triggered in the same manner as when "Men B" wins, A lottery of the number of AT start games is performed, and a predetermined number of AT start games is determined. Also in this case, the number of AT start games is determined in one game.

  However, in the game for determining the number of AT start games when “Tengu” wins, the number of AT start games of 100 or more games is determined unlike the case of winning “Men B” (the number of AT start games of 50 or more games is determined).

(5) When “Kappa” wins If “Kappa” wins in the race production, a video production where “Kappa” eats sushi (hereinafter referred to as “Kappa sushi production”) in the AT start game number determination game. Displayed by the liquid crystal display device 11 over a plurality of games. In this Kappa sushi production, every time "Kappa" eats sushi, the number of AT start games is added, and the added game number (additional unit game number) is added to the sushi food (game information) that "Kappa" eats. Will change accordingly.

  In this embodiment, the types of sushi foods eaten by “Kappa” are “Squid”, “Egg”, “Kappa maki”, “Salmon”, “Ikura”, “Tuna”, “Uni” and “Ise shrimp”. Are prepared. Then, it is set so that the higher the sushi material becomes, the more the number of addition games increases.

  Here, the content of the game for determining the number of AT start games when “Kappa” wins (Kappa sushi production) will be described more specifically. First, when the game for determining the number of AT start games is started, the appearance patterns of the sushi ingredients from the first game to the tenth game (first to tenth dishes) are determined by lottery, and the determined first dish is determined. The images of the sushi ingredients up to the tenth dish (hereinafter, referred to as “sushi ingredient symbols”) are sequentially displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11.

  Thereafter, the effect of eating or not eating sushi of the sushi material in which “Kappa” is sequentially displayed is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 for each game, and the effect of “Kappa” eating the sushi material is executed. The number of additional games is obtained. For example, as shown in the kappa game number acquisition lottery table of FIG. 54 described later, when “Kappa” eats a sushi item “squid”, 10 or 300 games are added to the AT start game number according to the lottery result. Is obtained as Further, for example, when “Kappa” eats a sushi item “Ise shrimp”, 100, 150, 200, or 300 games are acquired as the number of added games according to the lottery result. Then, the sum of the added game numbers corresponding to all the sushi ingredients eaten by “Kappa” before the end of the AT start game number determination game is set as the AT start game number.

  In the Kappa sushi production, whether or not to eat the sushi material for which “Kappa” is served is determined based on the type of the internal winning combination. Specifically, when the internal winning combination is a “group 1 combination” described later (for example, “213 bell 1” to “213 bell 8”), “Kappa” eats sushi material and other In the case of the internal winning combination, “Kappa” does not eat sushi. That is, in the period of the game for determining the number of AT start games when "Kappa" wins, the number of AT start games is added for each game in which the internal winning combination is "Group 1 combination" described later.

  Further, in the present embodiment, each time “Kappa” eats sushi material in the Kappa sushi effect, the number of sushi material symbols displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 decreases. However, when the sushi material symbol displayed in the fifth game (sixth dish) is not displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11, that is, when the sushi material in the sixth game (sixth plate) or later is not determined. At this point, the sushi ingredients for the sixth game (sixth dish) and thereafter are determined by lottery.

  The timing of ending the game for determining the number of AT start games when “Kappa” wins is managed by the “Kappa end counter”, and the value (end parameter) of the Kappa end counter becomes less than “0” (predetermined condition). In this case, the game for determining the number of AT start games when “Kappa” wins is ended. In the present embodiment, the initial value of the kappa end counter is set to “5”.

  The value of the kappa end counter is decremented by "1" when "Kappa" eats a specific sushi material (sushi material with wasabi), specifically, one of "squid", "salmon" and "tuna" Is done. That is, in the current game, the data of any of the sushi ingredients of “squid”, “salmon”, and “tuna” is set as the sushi ingredient eaten by “Kappa”, and the internal winning combination is set to “group” described later. In the case of "1 role", the number of added games corresponding to the sushi story is obtained, but the value of the kappa end counter is decremented by "1".

  Further, in the present embodiment, when “Kappa” eats a predetermined sushi story, specifically, “Kappa roll”, the value of the Kappa end counter is incremented by “1”. However, in this case, the number of added games is not obtained. That is, in the current game, if the data of the sushi material of “Kappa Maki” is set as the sushi material of “Kappa” and the internal winning combination is “Group 1 role” described later, Although the number of games cannot be obtained, the value of the kappa end counter is incremented by "1", and the period of the AT start game number determination game is extended.

  In the present embodiment, when the value of the kappa end counter becomes less than “0” in the AT start game number determination game at the time of “Kappa” victory, the player performs the continuous beating operation of the MAX bet button 21 by “ The resurrection lottery of the game for determining the number of AT start games at the time of “Kappa” victory is performed. Specifically, resurrection lottery is performed by successively pressing the MAX bet button 21 20 times. At this time, since the resurrection lottery is performed every time the MAX bet button 21 is pressed, the resurrection lottery is performed 20 times. Then, when the resurrection lottery by successively pressing the MAX bet button 21 is won, the game for determining the number of AT start games when "Kappa" wins is started again, and the number of AT start games can be further increased.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the game for determining the number of AT start games when “Kappa” is won, the internal winning combination is a specific combination other than “Group 1 combination” (to be described later, “Loose”, “Reach eye lip”, “Low”). Choi "," Strong Choi "," Watermelon "," Chance A "," Chance B ", or" Determining Combination "), five games (the second to sixth dishes) from the next game A lottery (data conversion occurrence lottery) as to whether or not to perform data conversion of the sushi material is performed (see FIG. 55 described later). When the sushi material conversion data lottery is won, in the present embodiment, the added game number associated with the converted sushi material (second added game number information) is the sushi material before conversion ( The sushi story data is converted so as to have a value equal to or greater than the number of added games associated with the (first added game number information) (see FIGS. 56 to 60 described later).

  When data conversion of a plurality of (six games) sushi materials after the next game is performed, a plurality of sushi material symbols (the first added game number information of the first additional game number information) displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 are displayed. Image) can be rewritten together. The rewriting display operation of the sushi material symbol is performed by calling sign data (sushi material symbol rewriting instruction) associated (linked) with a predetermined image frame (time frame) in the effect sequence data (moving image data) of the Kappa sushi effect. (Including requests). Specifically, if the call conversion data lottery of the sushi material is won, and the call sign data including the rewrite instruction request of the sushi material symbol is detected during the reproduction of the production sequence data of the Kappa sushi effect, the The renewal display data (image of the second added game number information) of the plurality of sushi material symbols is acquired at the timing, and the renewal display of the plurality of sushi material symbols after the next game is performed.

  When such a sushi material symbol rewriting display method is used, the timing of the sushi material symbol rewriting display operation is directly registered in the effect sequence data. Therefore, in this case, a special process for synchronizing / adjusting the rewrite display operation on the program is not required, so that the rewrite display operation can be executed with simpler processing and design change is easy. In addition, it is possible to construct a program that does not easily cause a problem.

(6) When "Men A / Men B" Wins In the game for determining the number of AT start games when "Men A / Men B" wins in a race effect, first, the number of games to be added to the number of AT start games in the first game is calculated as 10 games are acquired. After that, the number of additional games that can be acquired for each game (every continuation) increases by “10” up to the tenth game. That is, in the first game, the second game, the third game,..., The ninth game, and the tenth game, the number of additional games that can be obtained is 10, 20, 30,. Further, the number of additional games that can be acquired after the eleventh game is 100 games for each game.

  Therefore, for example, if the game is continued up to the tenth game in the AT start game number determination game at the time of the “male A / male B” victory, 550 games are acquired as the AT start game number. Further, when the game is continued after the eleventh game, the number of AT start games is increased by 100 for each game (the number of AT start games becomes 650 games, 750 games,...).

  Note that the continuation probability of each game of the AT start game number determination game at the time of the "male A / male B" victory is 80%, and if this continuous lottery is not won, the "male A / male B" wins The game for determining the number of AT start games at the time ends.

  In the present embodiment, in the game for determining the number of AT start games when the “male A / male B” wins, the continuation determination up to the second game is guaranteed. However, if the continuous lottery is not won in the second game, the number of AT start games is 30. In this case, the number of AT start games is set to 50 games. In other words, in the game for determining the number of AT start games when "male A / male B" wins, acquisition of the number of AT start games of 50 games is at least guaranteed.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the number of AT start games that can be acquired when the “tengu”, “Kappa”, or “male A / male B” wins in the transitional production game race production is “male A” , "Men B" or "Women A" are set to be more than when they win. Therefore, if the run members displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 at the start of the transition production game's race production include “Tengu”, “Kappa” or “male A / male B”, more AT starts. The player can be expected to acquire the number of games.

  The operation control of the various AT start game number determination games described above is executed by the sub-control circuit 101. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 also serves as a means for controlling the operation of the AT start game number determination game (notification number determination game control means).

[AT state]
When the number of AT start games is determined in the game in the AT preparation state (AT start game number determination game) and the game in the AT preparation state ends, the specific game number (second unit game number: AT start game number + additional AT game) The game in the AT state (hereinafter, referred to as “AT game”) in which information giving an advantageous state to the player is notified (navigated) over a number of times is started. In the present embodiment, in the AT game, the pressing order information of a predetermined small role (stopping order of reels) and / or the stop instruction information of a predetermined symbol (eg, a symbol “black BAR”, “yellow BAR”, etc.) (Information for designating a symbol to be aimed at when the vehicle stops) is notified (navigated).

  In the AT game (notification game), a pseudo BB lottery is performed based on an internal winning combination in each game, and when the pseudo BB lottery is won, the pseudo BB game is started as an interrupt process, and the pseudo BB game is consumed. Then, the sub game state returns to the AT state. At this time, during the interruption period of the pseudo BB game, the number of AT games (the number of AT games) is not counted (subtracted).

  In the AT game, an additional lottery of the number of AT games is performed based on each game, the type of the internal winning combination, and the winning history of the internal winning combination. Specifically, in the present embodiment, in the AT game, when "losing", "reach eye lip" or "rare role" is internally won once, or "losing" or "normal lip" is continuously won. In this case, an additional lottery is performed for the number of AT games. When the additional lottery is won in the number of AT games, the number of additional AT games (0 to 300 games) corresponding to the winning result is added to the number of remaining AT games (remaining AT game number).

  In the AT game, a predetermined symbol combination (in this embodiment, "black BAR"-"black BAR"-"black BAR" or "black cherry"-"black BAR"-"black BAR") is on the active line. , The sub game state shifts to the “W chance state”. Then, after the game in the “W chance state” is consumed, the AT game is restarted. Note that the number of AT games is not counted (subtracted) during the game period of the “W chance state”.

  In the “W chance state”, a game in which an increase in medal payout can be expected is performed. In the game in the "W chance state", the termination condition is not when the number of digested games is reached, but when a specific small win ("CT Bell" in this embodiment, in which ten medals can be paid out) is internally won. It is defined by the number of navigations in the order of pressing the stop button (hereinafter, referred to as “number of bell navigations”). That is, in the game in the “W chance state”, the termination condition is managed by the number of bell navigation times, and when the number of bell navigation times reaches the predetermined number, the game in the “W chance state” ends. In the present embodiment, the number of times of bell navigation in the game in the “W chance state” is set to five.

  Further, in the AT game, when a specific symbol combination is stopped and displayed on a predetermined line (in the present embodiment, “yellow BAR” − “yellow BAR” − When “yellow BAR” is completed), the sub game state shifts to the “additional challenge state”. Then, after the game in the "additional challenge state" is consumed, the AT game is restarted.

  In the game in the “additional challenge state”, the pseudo BB game is won with a high probability over a predetermined number of games and is stocked. During the play period of the “additional challenge state”, the number of AT games is not counted (subtracted).

  When the AT game is over, the sub game state always shifts to the transition effect state, and the above-described transition effect game (race effect) is performed. In this case, the information on the type of the ally character to be a race victory target (candidate) in the transition effect game and the content of the race effect on the race win rate of the ally character is provided at the start of the game in the AT state before the transition. Determined by lottery.

  The operation control of the AT game described above is executed by the sub control circuit 101. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub control circuit 101 also serves as a means for controlling the operation of the AT game (notification game control means).

[Pseudo BB state]
In the pseudo BB game (special game), a specific replay combination (any one of “normal lip 1” to “normal lip 8”) is won, and the stop button pressing order is associated with the won replay combination. When the given pressing order is reached (when the pressing order is correct), a game called "JACGAME" (specific game) in which an increase in medal payout is expected to be executed.

  In the game of “JACGAME”, the termination condition is not the number of digested games but a stop button that is performed when a specific small role (“CT Bell” capable of paying out ten medals in this embodiment) is internally won. Is defined by the number of times of pressing the navigation (number of times of bell navigation). That is, in the game of “JACGAME”, the end condition is managed by the number of times of bell navigation, and when the number of times of bell navigation reaches a specific number, the game of “JACGAME” ends. In the present embodiment, the specific number of times of bell navigation in “JACGAME” is set to five times.

  Further, the game period in the pseudo BB state is divided into a period called “JACGAME guaranteed period” and a period called “JACIN challenge period” performed thereafter.

  In the “JACGAME guaranteed section”, the game period (the period is indefinite) in which the game always continues until the predetermined number of times (two times in this embodiment) of “JACGAME” is consumed. Then, in the “JACGAME guaranteed section”, when a specific replay combination (any one of “normal lip 1” to “normal lip 8”) is won, the stop button associated with the won replay combination is The pressing order is notified (navigated), and execution of “JACGAME” is guaranteed.

  The game mode of the “JACGAME guaranteed section” is the same regardless of the transition path to the pseudo BB state in the sub game state. That is, the game form of the “JACGAME guaranteed section” is the same regardless of whether the sub game state transitions from the non-AT state to the pseudo BB state or the sub game state transitions from the AT state to the pseudo BB state. On the other hand, the game form of the “JACIN challenge section” differs depending on the transition path to the pseudo BB state in the sub game state.

  In the game of the “JACIN challenge section” when the sub game state shifts from the non-AT state to the pseudo BB state, in the period of the specific game number (specific unit game number: 10 games in this embodiment), the specific replay combination ( In the game in which "Normal lip 1" to "Normal lip 8" are won, a two-choice challenge effect in which the stop button is pressed is performed. If the two-choice challenge effect is correctly answered, "JACGAME" is executed as an interrupt process (interruption game).

  On the other hand, in the game in the “JACIN challenge section” when the sub game state shifts from the AT state to the pseudo BB state, during the period of a specific number of games (10 games in the present embodiment), a specific replay combination (“normal In a game in which any one of "1" to "normal lip 8" is won, the pressing order of the stop button associated with the won replay combination is always notified (navigation). That is, when the sub game state shifts from the AT state to the pseudo BB state, if a specific replay combination is won in the “JACIN challenge section”, “JACGAME” is always executed as the interrupt processing. Therefore, in this case, more medals can be obtained than in the case where the sub game state has shifted from the non-AT state to the pseudo BB state.

  In the pseudo BB game in which the sub game state shifts from the non-AT state to the pseudo BB state, the period of the non-AT state game period is determined based on each game, the type of the internal winning combination, and the winning history of the internal winning combination. Abbreviated lottery is performed. Specifically, in the pseudo BB game in which the sub game state shifts from the non-AT state to the pseudo BB state, in the case where “losing”, “reach eye lip” or “rare role” is internally won once, or When “losing” or “normal lip” is consecutively won, a cycle shortening lottery is performed. Then, if the cycle shortened lottery is won, a predetermined reduced number of games (0 to 170 games) corresponding to the winning result is subtracted from the remaining number of games of the base game of the current set. That is, even in the pseudo BB state, there is a possibility that a privilege of shortening the game period in the non-AT state in the current cycle may be obtained.

  Further, in the pseudo BB game, when the cycle shortening lottery is won and the result of subtracting the shortened game number from the current remaining game number of the normal game is less than “0”, the absolute number of games of the subtraction result becomes: It is stocked as the number of surplus shortened games in the current set. Then, the number of surplus reduced games that have been stocked is applied at the start of the next set of normal games, at which point the non-AT state (normal state) game period is reduced.

  On the other hand, in the pseudo BB game in the case where the sub game state has shifted from the AT state to the pseudo BB state, an additional lottery of the number of AT games is performed based on each game, the type of the internal winning combination, and the winning history of the internal winning combination. . Specifically, in the pseudo BB game in which the sub game state shifts from the AT state to the pseudo BB state, in the pseudo BB game, when “losing”, “reach eye lip” or “rare role” is internally won once, or When "losing" or "normal lip" is continuously won, an additional lottery is performed on the number of AT games. Then, if the additional lottery is won, a predetermined number of additional AT games (0 to 300 games) corresponding to the winning result is added to the current remaining number of AT games. That is, even in the pseudo BB state, there is a possibility that a privilege of adding the number of AT games can be obtained.

  The above-described pseudo BB game and the operation control of “JACGAME” are executed by the sub-control circuit 101. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub control circuit 101 also functions as a means for controlling the pseudo BB game and the operation of “JACGAME” (special game control means and specific game control means).

<Configuration of data table stored on ROM cartridge substrate>
Next, the configuration of various data tables stored in the ROM cartridge substrate 86 will be described. The correspondence between the abbreviations of the internal winning combinations used in the various processes controlled by the sub CPU 102 and the various tables managed and described below, and the names and abbreviations of the above-described internal winning combinations managed by the main CPU 93 are shown in FIG. As shown in the correspondence table.

[Race runner MAP lottery table]
First, the race runner MAP lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 32 is a diagram showing the configuration of the race runner MAP lottery table. The race runner MAP lottery table is, for example, a race runner MAP during a later-described race information lottery process (see FIG. 94 described later) performed at the start of one cycle of a game in the non-AT state (at the start of a normal game). It is referred to in the lottery process (S391) and the like.

  The race runner MAP lottery table defines the correspondence between the MAP numbers (“1” to “39”) of the race runners MAP and the lottery values. As described later, the race runner MAP (race information MAP) includes a race victory target (from the current cycle of the game in the non-AT state to the fifth cycle (from the first race to the fifth race)). Data (“1” to “10”) for determining a candidate) is defined.

  In the race runner MAP lottery process using the race runner MAP lottery table, first, the effect random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical value range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment) is used. , And sequentially subtracts the lottery value corresponding to each race runner MAP number specified in the race runner MAP lottery table. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of subtraction has become negative (whether or not a so-called “digit” has occurred). If the result of the subtraction is negative ("digit" occurs), the MAP number of the race entrant MAP at that time has been won. For example, the probability of winning the MAP number “1” in the race runner MAP lottery process is 1974/32768.

[Race information MAP data table]
Next, the race information MAP data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 33 shows the structure of the race information MAP data table. The race information MAP data table is referred to, for example, in a data acquisition process (S393) of a “target table” in a race information lottery process described later (see FIG. 94 described later).

  The race information MAP data table includes, for each MAP number of the race runner MAP (race information MAP) determined by the race runner MAP lottery process using the race runner MAP lottery table, from the current cycle to the fifth cycle. Data ("1" to "10": hereinafter referred to as race information MAP data) for determining a race victory target in the first to fifth races is defined. The race information MAP data is data corresponding to the type of the “target table” defined in the victory target player lottery table described later (see FIG. 34 described later). Specifically, the race information MAP data “1” to “10” respectively correspond to “target table A” to “target table J” defined in the winning target lottery table described later.

  In the data acquisition process of the “target table” using the race information MAP data table, for example, if the MAP number of the race runner MAP (race information MAP) is “7”, the first to fifth races As race information MAP data, “2” (target table B), “1” (target table A), “2” (target table B), “1” (target table A), “8” (target table H) ) Is obtained.

[Winner lottery table]
Next, the winning target lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 34 is a diagram showing the structure of the winning target lottery table. The winning target lottery table is referred to, for example, in a winning target lottery process (S395) during a race information lottery process (see FIG. 94 described later) described later.

  The winning target lottery table includes, for each type of the target table, a race victory target (“Men A”, “Men B”, “Women A”, “Kappa”, “Tengu”) in a race effect performed in the transition effect game. And "male A / male B") and their lottery values. In the present embodiment, a race effect of the transition effect game is performed even after the end of the AT game. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 34, the winning target lottery table includes the target table determined by the race information MAP data table. In addition to A to J, a special table “after AT” is also defined.

  In the victory target lottery process using the victory target lottery table, first, the effect random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical value range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in the present embodiment) The subtraction is sequentially performed with a lottery value corresponding to each race victory target specified in the target lottery table. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of subtraction has become negative (whether or not a so-called “digit” has occurred). If the subtraction result is negative ("digit" occurs), the race victory target at that time has been won.

  For example, when the target table A is referred to in the victory candidate lottery process (when the race information MAP data is “1”), the probability that “Kappa” will be the victory candidate is 328/32768. Become. However, for example, when the target table G is referred to in the winning target lottery process (when the race information MAP data is “7”), the probability that “Kappa” will be the race winning target is 0 / 32768, and "Kappa" will not win the race.

[Race Win Rate MAP Lottery Table]
Next, the race winning percentage MAP lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 35 is a diagram showing the configuration of the race winning percentage MAP lottery table. The race win rate MAP lottery table is referred to, for example, in a race win rate MAP lottery process (S397) in a race information lottery process described later (see FIG. 94 described later).

  The race win rate MAP lottery table defines, for each set value (1 to 6), the correspondence between the race win rate MAP and the lottery value. In this embodiment, the race win rate MAP is “race win rate 5%”, “race win rate 10%”, “race win rate 20%”, “race win rate 30%”, “race win rate 50%”, “race win rate”. 66% "," Race Win Rate 80% "," Race Win Rate 100% "," Race Win Rate 2nd Race 50% "-" Race Win Rate 5th Race 50% "," Race Win Rate 2nd Race 66% "-" Race A win rate of 66% in the fifth game and 20 kinds of "race rate in the second game 80%" to "race rate in the fifth game 80%" are provided.

  In the race win rate MAP lottery process using the race win rate MAP lottery table, first, the effect random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical value range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in the present embodiment) The winning percentage MAP is sequentially subtracted by a lottery value corresponding to each race winning percentage MAP specified in the lottery table. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of subtraction has become negative (whether or not a so-called “digit” has occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative ("digit" occurs), the race winning rate MAP at that time is won. For example, when the set value is “1”, the probability of winning the race win rate MAP of “fifth race win rate 50%” is 4410/32768.

[Race Win Rate MAP Data Table]
Next, the race winning percentage MAP data table will be described with reference to FIG. 36 and FIG. FIG. 36 is a diagram showing the configuration of the race win rate MAP data table. FIG. 37 is obtained by rewriting the race win ratio data (“1” to “8”) specified in the race win ratio MAP data table shown in FIG. 36 to specific win ratio values (in percent). The race win rate MAP data table is referred to, for example, in the race win rate data acquisition process (S399) during the later-described race information lottery process (see FIG. 94 described later).

  The race win ratio MAP data table stores predetermined race win ratio data ("1" to "8") for each race win ratio MAP determined by the race win ratio MAP lottery process. The race win rate data “1”, “2”, “3”, “4”, “5”, “6”, “7”, and “8” are a win rate of 5%, a win rate of 10%, and a win rate of 20, respectively. %, 30% win rate, 50% win rate, 66% win rate, 80% win rate, and 100% win rate.

  Specifically, the race win rate MAP is “race win rate 5%”, “race win rate 10%”, “race win rate 20%”, “race win rate 30%”, “race win rate 50%”, “race win rate 66%”. , "Race win rate 80%" or "race win rate 100%", only the race win rate data of the race effect of the current cycle (first race) is specified in the race win rate MAP data table. If the race win ratio MAP is any of “50% of the second race, 50% of the second race”, “66% of the second race, 80% of the second race”, the first race and the second The race win rate data of the race (one cycle ahead race) is defined in the race win rate MAP data table. If the race win rate MAP is any of “50% of the third race, 50% of the third race,” “66% of the third race, 80% of the third race,” The race win rate data up to the race eye (the race two cycles ahead) is defined in the race win rate MAP data table. If the race win rate MAP is one of “50% of race win rate of 50%”, “66% of race win rate of 4th race”, and “80% of race win rate of 4th race”, 4 Race win rate data up to the race (three cycles ahead) is defined in the race win rate MAP data table. Further, when the race win rate MAP is any of “the race win rate of the fifth race 50%”, “the race win rate of the fifth race 66%”, and “the race win rate of the fifth race 80%”, 5 Race win rate data up to the race eye (four cycles ahead) is defined in the race win rate MAP data table.

  Then, in the process of acquiring race win rate data using the race win rate MAP data table, for example, when the race win rate MAP is “fifth race 50th percentile”, the first to fifth race win rate data is obtained. As a result, “2” (10% of winning rate), “2” (10% of winning rate), “2” (10% of winning rate), “2” (10% of winning rate), and “5” (50% of winning rate) are acquired, respectively. You.

[Race result lottery table]
Next, the race result lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 38 shows the structure of the race result lottery table. The race result lottery table is referred to, for example, in a race result lottery process (S745) during a later-in-race_game start process (see FIG. 124 described later).

  The race result lottery table defines, for each race win rate, the correspondence between the race result (win / non-win) and the lottery value.

  In the race result lottery process using the race result lottery table, first, the effect random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical value range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in the present embodiment) is used for the race result lottery. Subsequent subtraction is performed with a lottery value corresponding to each race result (winning / non-winning) specified in the table. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of subtraction has become negative (whether or not a so-called “digit” has occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative ("digit" occurs), the race result at that time is won.

[After-AT race victory expectation data selection lottery table]
Next, the post-AT race victory expectation data selection lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 39 is a diagram showing the configuration of the post-AT race victory expectation data selection lottery table. The post-AT race victory expectation data selection lottery table is referred to, for example, in the post-AT race victory expectation data selection lottery process (S830) in the later-described AT_game start time process (see FIG. 128 described later). You.

  The post-AT race victory expectation data selection lottery table defines the correspondence between the race win rate and the lottery value. The post-AT race victory expectation data selection lottery table is commonly referred to regardless of the set values (1 to 6).

  In the post-AT race victory expectation data selection lottery process using the post-AT race victory expectation data selection lottery table, first, from a predetermined numerical value range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in the present embodiment). The extracted random number for effect is sequentially subtracted by a lottery value corresponding to each winning rate specified in the post-AT race victory expectation data selection lottery table. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of subtraction has become negative (whether or not a so-called “digit” has occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative ("digit" occurs), the winning rate at that time is won. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 39, the race winning percentages selected after the AT are “winning percentage 5%”, “winning percentage 10%”, “winning percentage 30%”, “winning percentage 50%”, and “winning percentage 100%”. % ".

[Race Win Rate Data Rewriting Lottery (During Penalty) Table]
Next, with reference to FIG. 40, a description will be given of the race win rate data rewriting lottery (during penalty) table. FIG. 40 is a diagram showing the configuration of the race win rate data rewriting lottery (during penalty) table. The race win rate data rewriting lottery (during penalty) table is referred to in, for example, a race win rate data rewriting lottery process (S945) in a later-described general medium penalty process (see FIG. 137 described later).

  The race win rate data rewriting lottery (during penalty) table defines, for each value (“0” to “5”) of the penalty counter, the correspondence between the rewritten race win rate (including no rewriting) and the lottery value. I do. Note that the value of the penalty counter is the number of illegal operations (for example, ignoring the push order navigation) performed during a predetermined game period. In the present embodiment, in the race win rate data rewrite lottery process, the race win rate data rewrite lottery (during penalty) table of FIG. 40 is commonly used regardless of the currently set race win rate.

  In the race winning rate data rewriting lottery process using the race winning rate data rewriting lottery (during penalty) table, first, an effect extracted from a predetermined numerical value range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in the present embodiment). The random number for use is sequentially subtracted by a lottery value corresponding to each race win rate after rewriting specified in the race win rate data rewriting lottery (during penalty) table. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of subtraction has become negative (whether or not a so-called “digit” has occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative ("digit" occurs), it means that the race winning rate at that time has been won.

  In the present embodiment, the race win rate data rewriting lottery (during penalty) table of FIG. 40 is used regardless of the currently set race win rate, so the rewritten race win rates are “no rewrite” and “win rate 0”. % "Is won. That is, in the present embodiment, the race win rate during the penalty is the currently set race win rate or 0% (AT non-winning).

  The configuration of the race win rate data rewriting lottery (during penalty) table is not limited to the example shown in FIG. For example, as the winning type of the race win rate after rewriting, a predetermined race win rate within a range of more than 0% and less than 5% may be included in addition to “no rewrite” and “0% of win rate”. , The predetermined race win rate may be won instead of “win rate 0%”.

  For example, a race winning percentage data rewriting lottery (during penalty) table may be provided for each currently set race winning percentage. In this case, a lottery value may be appropriately set in a field of the race win rate other than “win rate 0%” so that the rewritten race win rate is equal to or less than the currently set race win rate.

  Further, in the race win rate data rewriting lottery (during penalty) table shown in FIG. 40, the probability of decreasing the race win rate (the lottery value of “0% win rate”) with the increase in the value of the penalty counter (the number of times of unauthorized operation) is also shown. Although the configuration example that increases continuously has been described, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, even if the probability of reducing the race winning rate when the value of the penalty counter is “1” (the lottery value of “winning rate 0%”) is the same as that when the value of the penalty counter is “2” Good. In other words, the configuration of the race win rate data rewriting lottery (during penalty) table is changed step by step with the probability of reducing the race win rate (the lottery value of “0% win rate”) as the value of the penalty counter (the number of executions of unauthorized operations) increases. May be adopted.

[Pseudo BB lottery (general medium) table]
Next, a pseudo BB random determination (general medium) table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 41 is a diagram showing a configuration of a pseudo BB random determination (general medium) table. Note that the pseudo BB lottery (general medium) table is referred to, for example, in the pseudo BB lottery processing (see FIG. 119 described later) when the sub game state is the normal state.

  The pseudo BB random determination (general medium) table defines, for each type of internal winning combination, the correspondence between the winning / non-winning (lottery result) of the pseudo BB game and the random determination value.

  In the pseudo BB lottery process using the pseudo BB lottery (general medium) table, first, an effect random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical value range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment) is used. , Sequentially subtracting the lottery value of each lottery result specified in the pseudo BB lottery (general medium) table. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of subtraction has become negative (whether or not a so-called “digit” has occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative ("digit" occurs), it means that the lottery result (winning / non-winning of the pseudo BB game) at that time has been won.

  For example, in the pseudo BB random determination process using the pseudo BB random determination (general medium) table, when the internal winning combination is “normal lip”, the non-winning of the pseudo BB game is always determined and the internal winning combination is “confirmed”. In the case of "role", the winning of the pseudo BB game is always determined.

[Pseudo BB lottery (AT / AT preparation / Race) table]
Next, the pseudo BB lottery (during AT / AT preparation / during race) table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 42 is a diagram showing the structure of a pseudo BB lottery (during AT / AT preparation / during race) table. The pseudo BB lottery (during AT / AT preparation / during race) table is, for example, a case where the sub game state is other than the normal state (sub game state) in a pseudo BB lottery process (see FIG. 119 described later) described later. Is in the AT state, the AT preparation state, or the transition effect state).

  The pseudo BB lottery (during AT / AT preparation / racing) table also has the same configuration as the pseudo BB lottery (general medium) table, and the pseudo BB lottery process is performed by the same method. Therefore, here, the configuration of the pseudo BB lottery (during AT / AT preparation / during race) table and the method of pseudo BB lottery processing using the pseudo BB lottery (during AT / AT preparation / during race) table will be described. Is omitted.

[Pseudo BB precursor sign lottery table]
Next, a pseudo BB precursor lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 43 is a diagram showing a configuration of the pseudo BB precursor lottery table. The pseudo BB precursor lottery table is referred to, for example, in a pseudo BB precursor lottery process (S677) in a pseudo BB lottery process described later (see FIG. 119 described later).

  The pseudo BB precursor sign lottery table defines, for each type of internal winning combination, the correspondence between the number of precursor games (including no precursor) at the time of the pseudo BB game winning and the lottery value.

  In the pseudo BB precursor lottery process using the pseudo BB precursor lottery table, first, an effect random number extracted from a predetermined numerical value range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment) is pseudo The number is sequentially subtracted by the lottery value of each sign game number specified in the BB sign lottery table. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of subtraction has become negative (whether or not a so-called “digit” has occurred). If the subtraction result is negative (“digit” occurs), the number of precursor games at that time is won.

  For example, in the pseudo BB precursor lottery process using the pseudo BB precursor lottery table, when the internal winning combination is “weak che”, the number of precursor games of one game is won with a probability of 128/32768, and 512/32768. Is awarded to the number of precursor games of two games with a probability of, and to the number of precursor games of three games with a probability of 32128/32768.

[Cycle shortening lottery table]
Next, the cycle shortening lottery table will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 44 is a diagram showing the configuration of the cycle shortening lottery table (No. 1), and FIG. 45 is a diagram showing the configuration of the cycle shortening lottery table (No. 2). The cycle shortening lottery tables (Nos. 1 and 2) are referred to, for example, in the cycle shortening related processing (S661) in the later-described general medium_game start processing (see FIGS. 117 and 118 described later).

  The cycle shortening lottery table defines, for each winning history data of the internal winning combination, the correspondence between the number of shortened games (the number of subtracted games in the normal game) in the non-AT state game period (one cycle) and the lottery value. . In the cycle shortening lottery table, “0”, “5”, “10”, “20”, “30”, “40”, “50”, “60”, “70”, “70” 100 "," 150 "and" 170 "are provided.

  Note that the winning history data of the internal winning combination in the cycle shortening lottery table (No. 1) “Two consecutive losses” indicates that the internal winning combination “losing” has been won for two consecutive games. The winning history data “trip triple” indicates a case where the internal winning combination “normal lip” has been won for three consecutive games. The winning history data “3 bells” indicates a case where the internal winning combination “3 bells” (3 left bells and 3 middle right bells) has been won for three consecutive games.

  In addition, the winning history data of the internal winning combination “first weak” and “first strong” in the cycle shortening lottery table (No. 2) indicate that the internal winning combination of the current game is “weak cho” and “strong”, respectively. "Cho". The winning history data "weak and weak" indicates that the internal winning combination "weak che" has been won for two games in a row, and the winning history data "strong and strong duo" indicates the internal winning combination "strong che". Indicates that two consecutive games have been won. The winning history data “weak and strong” indicates that the internal winning combination “weak” and “strong” are continuously won in this order, and the winning history data “strong and weak” is an internal winning. This shows a case where the combination of “strong Cho” and “weak Cho” is consecutively won in this order. The winning history data “rare role triple” includes an internal winning role “rare role” (“weak choe”, “strong choe”, “watermelon”, “chance eye A”, “chance eye B”, and “fixed hand” ": Indicates that the prescribed internal winning combination has been won for three consecutive games.

  In the cycle shortening related processing using the cycle shortening lottery table, first, the effect random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical value range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in the present embodiment) is converted to the cycle shortening lottery. The number is sequentially subtracted with the lottery value of each reduced game number specified in the table. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of subtraction has become negative (whether or not a so-called “digit” has occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative ("digit" occurs), it means that the reduced game number at that time has been won.

  For example, in the cycle shortening-related processing using the cycle shortening lottery table, if the winning history data is “losing triples”, the number of shortened games of 10 games is won with a probability of 30720/32768, and 1600/32768 is won. The player wins the shortened game number of 30 games with a probability of 448/32768 and wins the shortened game number of 50 games with a probability of 448/32768. That is, in the present embodiment, even if the internal winning combination "losing" is continuously won in the normal game, there is a possibility that a privilege of obtaining the number of shortened games (reducing the game period in the non-AT state) may be obtained.

[Pseudo BB cycle shortening lottery table]
Next, the pseudo BB cycle shortened lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 46 is a diagram showing the structure of the pseudo BB cycle shortening lottery table. The pseudo BB cycle shortening lottery table is referred to, for example, in a pseudo BB cycle shortening lottery process (S689) in a later-described general middle BB_game start process (see FIG. 120 described later).

  The pseudo BB cycle shortened lottery table shows, for each internal winning combination or its winning history data, the correspondence between the number of shortened games (the number of subtracted games in the normal game) in the non-AT state game period (one cycle) and the lottery value. Is defined. In the pseudo BB cycle shortening lottery table, “0”, “5”, “10”, “20”, “30”, “50”, “100”, and “170” are provided as the number of shortened games. However, in the pseudo BB cycle shortening lottery process, if "170" is won as the number of shortened games, a privilege with a race win rate of 100% is also obtained.

  In the pseudo BB cycle shortening lottery process using the pseudo BB cycle shortening lottery table, first, an effect random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical value range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in the present embodiment) is used. , Is sequentially subtracted by the lottery value of each reduced game number specified in the pseudo BB cycle reduced lottery table. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of subtraction has become negative (whether or not a so-called “digit” has occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative ("digit" occurs), it means that the reduced game number at that time has been won.

  For example, in the pseudo BB cycle shortened lottery process using the pseudo BB cycle shortened lottery table, if the winning history data is “3 losses”, the number of shortened games of 30 games is won with a probability of 32112/32768, The number of shortened games of 100 games with a probability of 656/32768 is won. That is, in the present embodiment, when the pseudo BB game is started during the normal game, the number of shortened games is acquired (in the non-AT state) even if the internal winning combination "losing" is continuously won in the pseudo BB game state. There is a possibility that the benefit of shortening the game period) can be obtained. Further, for example, in the pseudo BB cycle shortening lottery process using the pseudo BB cycle shortening lottery table, when the internal winning combination is “reach eye lip”, not only the reduced game number of 170 games is always won, but also The race winning percentage set in the current set is updated to the race winning percentage of 100% (AT winning determined).

[Directly placed lottery table]
Next, with reference to FIG. 47A to FIG. 47C, a description will be given of the directly-added lottery table.

  FIG. 47A is a diagram illustrating a configuration of a directly-added lottery table referred to when the penalty flag is in an off state. FIG. 47B is a diagram illustrating a configuration of a direct-addition lottery table that is referred to when the penalty flag is on and the sub game state is the transition effect state (“during race” described later). FIG. 47C shows a state in which the penalty flag is on and the sub game state is the AT state ("AT in progress" described later) or the pseudo BB game has been started in the AT state ("BB in AT" described later). FIG. 21 is a diagram showing a configuration of a directly-added lottery table referred to in the case of ()). In other words, if the current game is a penalty game, the directly-added lottery table of FIG. 47B or 47C is used. If the current game is not a penalty game, the directly-added lottery table of FIG. 47A is used. Is used.

  Note that these directly-added lottery tables include, for example, during a later-described race_game start processing (see FIG. 124 described later), during AT_game start processing (see later-described FIG. 128), and during BB_game during AT. It is referred to when determining the number of additional AT games in the direct addition lottery process in the start process (see FIG. 129 described later).

  Each directly added lottery table defines the correspondence between the number of additional AT games and the lottery value for each internal winning combination or its winning history data. In the present embodiment, the number of additional AT games is “0” (no additional), “10”, “20”, “30”, “50”, “100”, “150”, “200”, and “200”. 300 "is provided.

  In the direct addition lottery process using the direct addition lottery table, first, the effect random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical value range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in the present embodiment) is directly added to the lottery processing. The number is sequentially subtracted by the lottery value of the number of additional AT games specified in the table. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of subtraction has become negative (whether or not a so-called “digit” has occurred). If the result of the subtraction becomes negative ("digit" occurs), it means that the number of additional AT games at that time has been won.

  For example, in the direct-addition lottery process using the direct-addition lottery (penalty flag OFF) table shown in FIG. 47A, if the winning history data is “3 losses”, the addition of 20 games with a probability of 32736/32768 is performed. The number of games is won, and the number of additional AT games of 100 with a probability of 32/32768 is won. That is, in the present embodiment, when the pseudo BB game is started during the AT game, in the pseudo BB game state, even if the internal winning combination "losing" is continuously won, the benefit of adding the number of AT games is obtained. there is a possibility.

  Also, for example, in the directly-added lottery process (the directly-added lottery process during the penalty) using the directly-added lottery (penalty flag ON: during race) table shown in FIG. 47B, the internal winning combination is “reach eye lip” and “fixed”. If it is other than "role", the additional benefit of the number of AT games cannot be obtained. Furthermore, for example, in the direct-addition lottery process (penalty flag ON: during AT, BB during AT) table shown in FIG. 47C, in the direct-addition lottery process (direct-addition lottery process during penalty), regardless of the type of the internal winning combination , The additional benefit of the number of AT games cannot be obtained.

[AT start game number lottery (female A win) table]
Next, with reference to FIG. 48A and FIG. 48B, the AT start game number random determination (when female A wins) table will be described.

  FIG. 48A is referred to when the first mode (continuation probability is 50% and the number of added games for each MAX bet operation is 50) is selected as a mode of determining the number of AT start games when “Female A” wins. It is a diagram showing a configuration of an AT start game number random determination (when female A wins) table. FIG. 48B shows a case where the second mode (the continuation probability is 95% and the number of added games for each MAX bet operation is 5) is selected as the mode of determining the number of AT start games when “Female A” wins. It is a figure showing the composition of the AT start game number lottery (when female A wins) table referred.

  The AT start game number random determination (when female A wins) table is referred to, for example, in the female A_AT start game number random determination process (S1062) in the female A_AT start game number determination process (see FIG. 148 described later). Is done. The process of selecting one of the AT start game number lottery (when the female A wins) table shown in FIGS. 48A and 48B is performed, for example, by selecting the AT during the AT preparation button pressing process (see FIG. 147 described later). This is performed in the start game number lottery table switching process (S1054).

  Each AT start game number lottery (when female A wins) table includes the type of the lottery result of the AT start game number addition lottery performed each time the MAX bet button 21 is pressed (winning (continuation) / non-winning (end)). And the correspondence between each lottery result and the lottery value.

  In the female A_AT start game number random determination process using the AT start game number random determination (when female A wins) table, first, extraction is performed from a predetermined numerical value range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in the present embodiment). The effected random number for the effect is sequentially subtracted by the lottery value of the type of each lottery result specified in the AT start game number random determination (when female A wins) table. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of subtraction has become negative (whether or not a so-called “digit” has occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative ("digit" occurs), it means that the lottery result (continuation / non-winning) at that time has been won.

  In addition, when the lottery for adding the number of AT start games when “Female A” wins is won, the number of AT games (5 games or 50 games) corresponding to the selected mode is determined at the time of the AT start determined at that time. The execution (continuation) of the AT start game number addition lottery is determined again while being added to the game number. On the other hand, if the result of the AT start game number addition lottery at the time of “Female A” victory is non-winning, there is no additional AT game number, and the AT start game number addition lottery (at the time of “Female A” victory) The AT start game number determination game) is also ended. However, as for the number of AT games, 50 games are guaranteed as the minimum guaranteed value regardless of the lottery result of the AT start game number addition lottery. Therefore, for example, if the lottery result of the AT start game number addition lottery is non-winning (end) at the time of pressing the MAX bet button 21 for the fifth time while the second mode is selected, Is 4, so if the number of AT start games is determined based on the number of wins, the number of games will be 20 (5 games × 4), but in this embodiment, the number of AT start games is rewritten to 50 games. .

[AT Start Game Number Lottery (Kappa Victory) Table]
Next, with reference to FIG. 49 to FIG. 52, the AT start game number random determination (at the time of Kappa victory) table will be described. FIGS. 49 to 52 are diagrams showing the configurations of the AT start game number lottery (when Kappa wins) table (part 1) to the AT start game number lottery (when Kappa wins) table (part 4). The AT start game number random determination (Kappa victory) table is referred to, for example, in the Kappa sushi MAP random determination process (S793) in Kappa victory_game start process (see FIG. 127 described later) and the like. You.

  The AT start game number lottery (when Kappa wins) table defines, for each sushi MAP number currently set, the correspondence between the sushi MAP number and the lottery value. The sushi MAP is a kappa sushi MAP corresponding to the first to tenth sushi items displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 in the above-described Kappa sushi production (game for determining the number of AT start games when “Kappa” wins). This is a MAP that defines data (see FIG. 53 described later).

  In the AT start game number random determination (Kappa victory) table, "1" to "45" are defined as sushi MAP numbers. In the initial state, the sushi MAP is not set, and in this case, the lottery value in the “first time” column in the AT start game number lottery (when Kappa wins) table is referred to (see FIG. 52).

  In the Kappa sushi MAP lottery process using the AT start game number lottery (Kappa victory) table, first, effects extracted from a predetermined numerical value range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment). The random number for use is sequentially subtracted by the lottery value of each sushi MAP number specified in the AT start game number lottery (when Kappa wins) table. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of subtraction has become negative (whether or not a so-called “digit” has occurred). If the subtraction result is negative ("digit" occurs), the sushi MAP number at that time has been won.

[Kappa Sushi MAP Data Table]
Next, the Kappa sushi MAP data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 53 is a diagram showing the configuration of the Kappa sushi MAP data table. The Kappa sushi MAP data table is referred to, for example, in Kappa sushi MAP data acquisition processing (S794) in Kappa victory_game start processing (see FIG. 127 described later) and the like.

  The Kappa sushi MAP data table contains Kappa sushi MAP data ("1" to "1") corresponding to the first to tenth sushi ingredients specified for each sushi MAP number determined by the Kappa sushi MAP lottery process. 8 ") is stored. That is, the Kappa sushi MAP data table is displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 11 in the AT start game number determination game (Kappa sushi production) performed when “Kappa” wins in the transition production game race production. The types of sushi ingredients from the first game to the tenth game are defined.

  In the Kappa sushi MAP data table, the sushi material corresponding to the Kappa sushi MAP data "1" is "Ika", the sushi material corresponding to the Kappa sushi MAP data "2" is "Egg", and the Kappa sushi MAP The sushi material corresponding to data “3” is “Kappa maki”, and the sushi material corresponding to Kappa sushi MAP data “4” is “salmon”. The sushi material corresponding to the Kappa sushi MAP data "5" is "Ikura", the sushi material corresponding to the Kappa sushi MAP data "6" is "tuna", and the sushi material corresponding to the Kappa sushi MAP data "7". The sushi material is “uni”, and the sushi material corresponding to the Kappa sushi MAP data “8” is “Ise shrimp”.

  Then, in the kappa sushi MAP data acquisition process using the kappa sushi MAP data table, for example, when the sushi MAP number is “1”, the kappa sushi MAP data for the first to tenth dishes is respectively “ 1 "(squid)," 1 "(squid)," 2 "(egg)," 1 "(squid)," 4 "(salmon)," 1 "(squid)," 2 "(egg)," 1 " (Squid), “1” (squid) and “5” (crad).

[Kappa game number acquisition lottery table]
Next, the kappa game number acquisition lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 54 is a diagram showing a configuration of the kappa game number acquisition lottery table. The kappa game number acquisition lottery table is referred to, for example, in a kappa game number acquisition lottery process (S806) in a kappa victory_game start time process (see FIG. 127 described later).

  The kappa game number acquisition lottery table defines, for each kappa sushi MAP data ("1" to "8"), the correspondence between the number of AT start games when "Kappa" is won and the lottery value. In the present embodiment, “10”, “20”, “30”, “100”, “150”, “200”, and “300” are provided as the number of AT start games when “Kappa” wins. The kappa game number acquisition lottery table also defines a "LIFE UP" lottery value for each kappa sushi MAP data ("1" to "8"). When "LIFE UP" is won, the value of the kappa end counter for managing the end of the kappa sushi effect (AT start game number determination game) is incremented by "1".

  In the kappa game number acquisition lottery process using the kappa game number acquisition lottery table, first, an effect random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical value range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment) is used. The number is sequentially reduced by the number of AT start games specified in the kappa game number acquisition lottery table or the "LIFE UP" lottery value. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of subtraction has become negative (whether or not a so-called “digit” has occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative ("digit" occurs), the number of AT start games or "LIFE up" at that time is won.

  For example, if the set Kappa sushi MAP data is “1” (squid) and the video effect of “Kappa” eating the sushi material “Squid” is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11, the kappa game number acquisition lottery is performed. In the kappa game number acquisition lottery process using the table, the number of AT start games of 10 games is won with a probability of 32672/32768, and the number of AT start games of 300 games with a probability of 96/32768 is won. Further, for example, when the set Kappa sushi MAP data is “3” (Kappa roll) and a video production in which “Kappa” eats the sushi material “Kappa roll” is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11, In the kappa game number acquisition lottery process using the game number acquisition lottery table, the number of AT start games is not won, but “LIFE UP” is always won.

  Further, for example, if the set Kappa sushi MAP data is “8” (Ise prawn) and the video production in which “Kappa” eats the sushi material “Ise prawn” is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11, In the kappa game number acquisition lottery process using the game number acquisition lottery table, the number of AT start games of 100 games is won with a probability of 27854/32768, and the number of AT start games of 150, 200 or 300 games with a probability of 1638/32768. Wins. That is, in the present embodiment, in the Kappa sushi production performed when the `` Kappa '' wins in the transition production game race production, in the case where the `` Kappa '' performs a production that eats sushi ingredients of high quality ingredients, Win a large number of AT start games.

[Kappa sushi data conversion occurrence lottery table]
Next, the kappa sushi data conversion occurrence lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 55 is a diagram showing the configuration of the kappa sushi data conversion occurrence lottery table. The kappa sushi data conversion occurrence lottery table is referred to, for example, in a kappa sushi data conversion occurrence lottery process (S802) in a kappa victory_game start process (see FIG. 127 described later).

  The kappa sushi data conversion occurrence lottery table defines, for each type of internal winning combination, the correspondence between the winning / non-winning (lottery result) of the kappa sushi data conversion occurrence and the lottery value.

  In the kappa sushi data conversion occurrence lottery process using the kappa sushi data conversion occurrence lottery table, first, the production randomness extracted from a predetermined numerical value range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in the present embodiment). The numerical value is sequentially subtracted by the lottery value of each lottery result specified in the kappa sushi data conversion occurrence lottery table. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of subtraction has become negative (whether or not a so-called “digit” has occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative ("digit" occurs), it means that the lottery result at that time has been won.

  For example, in the kappa sushi data conversion occurrence lottery process using the kappa sushi data conversion occurrence lottery table, if the internal winning combination is “losing”, the kappa sushi data conversion occurrence is not won with a probability of 31130/32768, With a probability of 1638/32768, Kappa sushi data conversion is won.

[Kappa sushi data conversion lottery table]
Next, the kappa sushi data conversion lottery table will be described with reference to FIGS. 56 to 60 are diagrams showing the configurations of the Kappa sushi data conversion lottery (one plate ahead) table to the Kappa sushi data conversion lottery (five plates ahead) table, respectively.

  The kappa sushi data conversion lottery (1 plate) table in FIG. 56 is a sushi item (Kappa) displayed in a game (2 plate) ahead of the current game of the game for determining the number of AT start games when “Kappa” wins. It is a conversion lottery table of sushi MAP data). The kappa sushi data conversion lottery (two plates ahead) table in FIG. 57 is a conversion of the sushi material displayed in the second game (third plate) from the current game of the game for determining the number of AT start games when “Kappa” wins. It is a lottery table. The kappa sushi data conversion lottery (3 plates ahead) table in FIG. 58 is a conversion of the sushi material displayed in the game 3rd ahead (4th plate) from the current game of the game to determine the number of AT start games when “Kappa” wins. It is a lottery table. The kappa sushi data conversion lottery (four plates) table of FIG. 59 is a conversion of sushi material displayed in the game four games (fifth plate) from the current game of the game for determining the number of AT start games when “Kappa” wins. It is a lottery table. The kappa sushi data conversion lottery (five dishes) table of FIG. 60 is a sushi material displayed in a game five games ahead (sixth dish) from the current game of the game for determining the number of AT start games when “Kappa” wins. Is a conversion lottery table. Each kappa sushi data conversion lottery table is referred to, for example, in a kappa sushi data conversion lottery process (S804) in a kappa victory_game start process (to be described later, see FIG. 127).

  Each kappa sushi data conversion lottery table shows, for each currently set kappa sushi MAP data (sushi material), the correspondence between the converted kappa sushi MAP data ("1" to "8") and the lottery value. Is defined.

  In the kappa sushi data conversion lottery process using each kappa sushi data conversion lottery table, first, an effect random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical value range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in the present embodiment). Is sequentially subtracted by the lottery value of each converted Kappa sushi MAP data (sushi story) specified in each Kappa sushi data conversion lottery table. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of subtraction has become negative (whether or not a so-called “digit” has occurred). If the result of the subtraction becomes negative ("digit" occurs), it means that the converted Kappa sushi MAP data (sushi material) at that time has been won.

  For example, in the kappa sushi data conversion lottery process using the kappa sushi data conversion lottery (one plate ahead) table, if the currently set kappa sushi MAP data (sushi material) is "5" (tuna), The kappa sushi MAP data (sushi material) is converted from “5” (tuna) to “7” (sea urchin) with a probability of 29492/32768, and the kappa sushi MAP data (sushi material) with a probability of 3276/32768 is “5” (Tuna) is converted to "8" (Ise shrimp).

  As shown in FIGS. 56 to 60, in the present embodiment, in the kappa sushi data conversion lottery process, the value of the converted kappa sushi MAP data does not become smaller than the value of the kappa sushi MAP data before the conversion. That is, the kappa sushi data conversion lottery process does not make the number of acquired AT games after conversion smaller than the number of acquired AT games before conversion. However, for example, when the currently set Kappa sushi MAP data (sushi material) is “8” (Ise prawn), the Kappa sushi MAP data (sushi material) is not converted in the kappa sushi data conversion lottery process. .

[MAX bet button on / off determination table]
Next, with reference to FIG. 61 and FIG. 62, the MAX bet button turning-on / off determination table will be described.

  FIG. 61 is a diagram illustrating a configuration of a MAX bet button on / off determination table referred to during a non-MB game (when the upper limit of the number of medals that can be inserted (the valid specified number) is three). FIG. 62 is a diagram showing a configuration of a MAX bet button on / off determination table referred to during the MB game (when the upper limit of the number of medals that can be inserted is two). Note that these MAX bet button on / off determination tables are referred to, for example, in the on / off determination process of the LED of the MAX bet button 21 during the later-described medal insertion command receiving process (see FIG. 95 described later).

  Each MAX bet button on / off determination table indicates the combination of the number of inserted medals (0 to 3) and the number of credits of medals (0 to 2 or 3 or more) inserted from the medal insertion slot 20 this time. , The corresponding relationship with the determination result of turning on / off the LED of the MAX bet button 21.

  For example, when the number of inserted medals is two and the number of credits of medals is two during the non-MB game, the determination result of turning on / off the LED of the MAX bet button 21 is “lit” (see FIG. 61), a lighting request is made to the LED of the MAX bet button 21. Also, for example, when the number of inserted medals is one and the number of credits of the medals is one during the non-MB game, the determination result of turning on / off the LED of the MAX bet button 21 is “off”. (See FIG. 61), a request to turn off the LED of the MAX bet button 21 is made. As shown in FIG. 61, when the number of inserted medals is three during the non-MB game, regardless of the number of credits of medals, the determination result of turning on / off the LED of the MAX bet button 21 is “ Off ".

<Description of main control circuit operation>
Next, the contents of various processes executed by the main CPU 93 of the main control circuit 91 using a program will be described with reference to FIGS.

[Main operation processing of pachislot by control of main CPU]
First, the procedure of the main operation processing (processing after turning on the power) of the pachislot 1 performed under the control of the main CPU 93 will be described with reference to a flowchart (hereinafter, referred to as a main flow) shown in FIG.

  First, when the power is turned on to the pachislot 1, the main CPU 93 performs a power-on process (S1). In this processing, it is determined whether the backup has been performed normally, the setting has been changed appropriately, and the like, and initialization corresponding to the determination result is performed. The details of the power-on processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 64 described later.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs an initialization process at the end of one game (S2). In this initialization process, the data in the designated storage area in the main RAM 95 is cleared. The designated storage area here is a storage area that needs to be erased for each unit game (game) such as an internal winning combination storage area or a display combination storage area.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs medal acceptance / start check processing (S3). In this process, the input of the medal sensor (not shown) and the start switch 79 is checked. The details of the medal acceptance / start check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 65 described later.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a random value acquisition process (S4). In this process, the main CPU 93 extracts a random number value for internal winning combination lottery (0 to 65535) and stores the extracted internal random number value for random determination in a random number value storage area (not shown) provided in the main RAM 95. I do. Further, in the present embodiment, in addition to the internal lottery random number value, various effect random number values (0 to 65535 and / or 0 to 255) can be obtained, and if necessary, various effect random number values. May be obtained in S4.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs an internal lottery process (S5). In this processing, an internal winning combination is determined by lottery based on the internal lottery random number value extracted in S4. The details of the internal lottery process will be described later with reference to FIG. 67 described later.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a reel stop initial setting process (S6). The details of the reel stop initial setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a start command generation and storage process (S7). In this process, the main CPU 93 generates data of a start command to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 101, and stores the command data in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 95. The start command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub-control circuit 101 by a command data transmission process in an interrupt process described later with reference to FIG. It should be noted that the start command data includes various types of information necessary for producing an effect such as an internal winning combination.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a wait process (S8). In this process, when the predetermined time (for example, 4.1 seconds) has not elapsed since the start of the previous game, the main CPU 93 digests the waiting time until the predetermined time elapses.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a reel rotation start process (S9). In this process, the main CPU 93 requests the start of rotation of all reels. When the start of rotation of all reels is requested, the drive of the three stepping motors (not shown) is performed by an interrupt process (see FIG. 76 described later) executed at a constant cycle (1.1172 msec). The rotation of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R is started. At this time, each reel is subjected to acceleration control until the rotation speed reaches a constant speed, and then controlled so as to maintain the constant speed. If it is determined that a reel effect (lock effect) is to be performed during the reel acceleration period at the start of the game, the main CPU 93 sets a reel effect pattern and sets a reel effect in the reel rotation start process in S9. Is also controlled.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a reel rotation start command generation and storage process (S10). In this process, the main CPU 93 generates data of a reel rotation start command to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 101, and stores the command data in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 95. The reel rotation start command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101 by a command data transmission process in an interrupt process described later with reference to FIG. With this processing, the sub control circuit 101 can recognize the start of reel rotation, and can determine the timing for executing various effects and the like.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a pull-in priority storing process (S11). In this process, the main CPU 93 acquires the pull-in priority data and stores it in the pull-in priority data storage area. Details of the pull-in priority storage process will be described later with reference to FIG. 69 described later.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a reel stop control process (S12). In this process, the rotation of the corresponding reel is stopped based on the timing when the left stop button 19L, the middle stop button 19C, and the right stop button 19R are pressed and the internal winning combination. The details of the reel stop control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 72 described later.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a winning search process (S13). In this process, the main CPU 93 sets the symbol combination displayed on the activated line (winning determination line) after the left reel 3L, the center reel 3C, and the right reel 3R have all stopped, and a symbol combination table (see FIGS. 10 to 12). ). Then, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the display combination is displayed on the activated line, and stores the determination result in the display combination storage area.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a winning operation command generation and storage process (S14). In this process, the main CPU 93 generates winning operation command data to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 101 and stores the command data in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 95. The winning operation command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub-control circuit 101 by a command data transmission process in an interrupt process described later with reference to FIG. By this processing, the sub control circuit 101 can recognize the symbol combination displayed along the winning determination line, and can determine the timing for executing various effects.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a medal payout process (S15). In this process, the driving of the hopper device 51 and the updating of the number of credits are performed based on the number of payouts of the display combination determined in S13, and the medals are paid out. At this time, in the present embodiment, the payout number of medals differs depending on the display combination. However, as shown in the symbol combination table (see FIGS. 10 to 12), when the number of inserted medals is three, The maximum payout number (payout upper limit) is 10.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a payout end command generation / storage process (S16). In this process, the main CPU 93 generates data of a payout end command to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 101, and stores the command data in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 95. Also, the payout end command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub-control circuit 101 by a command data transmission process in an interrupt process described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a bonus end check process (S17). In this process, the main CPU 93 refers to various counters (not shown) provided in the main RAM 95 for managing the timing of ending the bonus game, and checks whether or not to end the operation of the bonus game. The details of the bonus end check processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 74 described later.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a bonus operation check process (S18). In this process, the main CPU 93 checks whether or not to start the operation of the bonus game and whether or not to replay. The details of the bonus operation check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 75 described later. When the bonus operation check processing is completed, the main CPU 93 returns the processing to S2 and repeats the processing from S2.

[Power-on processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 64, the power-on process performed in S1 in the main flow (see FIG. 63) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the backup is normal (S21). In this determination process, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the backup is normal by performing error detection using the checksum value.

  For example, when the power is turned off, the set value of the pachislot 1 (a value at which the payout rate is set to one of six predetermined levels) and a checksum value calculated from the set value are stored in a predetermined area of the main RAM 95 as backup data. Is stored. In the process of S21, the main CPU 93 reads the set value and the checksum value stored in the main RAM 95. Next, the main CPU 93 compares the checksum value calculated from the read setting value with the backed up checksum value. If the two sum values match, the main CPU 93 determines that the backup is normal.

  In S21, when the main CPU 93 determines that the backup is not normal (when S21 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs the process of S23 described later. On the other hand, in S21, when the main CPU 93 determines that the backup is normal (if S21 is YES), the main CPU 93 sets the backup set value in a predetermined area in the main RAM 95 (S22). As a result, when the backup is normal, the set value before the power is turned off is set in the main RAM 95.

  After the process of S22 or when the determination of S21 is NO, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not a setting change switch (not shown) is on (S23). In S23, when the main CPU 93 determines that the setting change switch is not in the ON state (if S23 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs the processing of S29 described later.

  On the other hand, in S23, when the main CPU 93 determines that the setting change switch is in the ON state (if S23 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs a predetermined initialization process at the time of setting change (S24). In this process, for example, the main CPU 93 clears the data stored in the internal winning combination storage area and the display combination storage area of the main RAM 95 and clears the set value.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs an initialization command generation and storage process (S25). In this process, the main CPU 93 generates data of an initialization command to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 101, and stores the command data in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 95. The initialization command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub-control circuit 101 by a command data transmission process in an interrupt process described later with reference to FIG. Note that the initialization command data includes the presence / absence of a change in the set value, set value information, and the like.

  After the processing of S25, the main CPU 93 executes a setting value change processing (S26). In this process, the main CPU 93 selects a set value from predetermined 1 to 6 according to the operation result of the reset switch, and sets the set value based on the operation result of the start lever 23 operated thereafter. Confirm.

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the setting change switch is on (S27).

  In S27, when the main CPU 93 determines that the setting change switch is in the ON state (if S27 is YES), the main CPU 93 repeats the process of S27. If the setting change switch is on, it means that the operation of the setting change switch has not been completed. In this case, the main CPU 93 executes the processing in S27 until the setting change switch is not turned on. repeat.

  On the other hand, in S27, when the main CPU 93 determines that the setting change switch is not in the ON state (if S27 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs initialization command generation and storage processing (S28). In this process, the main CPU 93 generates data of an initialization command to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 101, and stores the command data in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 95. Then, after the processing of S28, the main CPU 93 ends the power-on processing, and moves the processing to S2 of the main flow (see FIG. 63).

  Here, returning to the process of S23 again, if S23 is NO, the main CPU 93 determines whether the backup is normal or not (S29).

  When the main CPU 93 determines in S29 that the backup is normal (YES in S29), the main CPU 93 restores the set value to the state before the power failure based on the backup data (S30). Then, after the processing of S30, the main CPU 93 ends the power-on processing, and shifts the processing to S2 of the main flow (see FIG. 63).

  On the other hand, in S29, when the main CPU 93 determines that the backup is not normal (NO in S29), the main CPU 93 performs power-on error processing (S31). In this process, the main CPU 93 displays that the backup is not normal by displaying an error or the like.

  In this embodiment, an error (backup error) that occurs when the backup is not normal cannot be canceled by operating the stop release switch or the reset switch, and the setting is newly changed. It is released.

[Medal reception / start check processing]
Next, the medal acceptance / start check processing performed in S3 in the main flow (see FIG. 63) will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not there is an automatic insertion request (S41). The determination of whether or not there is an automatic input request is performed by determining whether or not the automatic input counter is “0”. That is, when the automatic insertion counter is “0”, the main CPU 93 determines that there is no automatic insertion request, and when the automatic insertion counter is “1” or more, it determines that there is an automatic insertion request.

  The automatic insertion counter is data for identifying whether or not a display combination related to replay (replay) has been established in the previous unit game. When the display combination related to the re-game is established, the medals for the number of coins inserted in the previous unit game are automatically inserted into the automatic insertion counter.

  In S41, when the main CPU 93 determines that there is no automatic input request (when S41 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs the process of S44 described later. On the other hand, in S41, when the main CPU 93 determines that there is an automatic insertion request (if S41 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs an automatic insertion process (S42). In this process, the value of the automatic insertion counter is copied to the insertion number counter, and then the value of the automatic insertion counter is cleared.

  After the processing of S42, the main CPU 93 performs a medal insertion command generation storage processing (S43). In this process, the main CPU 93 generates data of a medal insertion command to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 101, and stores the command data in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 95. The medal insertion command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub-control circuit 101 by a command data transmission process in an interrupt process described later with reference to FIG. The medal insertion command data includes information such as the number of inserted medals and the number of credits.

  After the processing of S43 or when the determination of S41 is NO, the main CPU 93 permits medal acceptance (S44). In this process, the solenoid of the selector 66 (see FIG. 5) is driven, and medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 20 are accepted. The received medals are counted and guided to the hopper device 51.

  Next, the main CPU 93 sets the maximum value of the inserted number according to the gaming state (S45). Specifically, when the gaming state is the non-MB gaming state (including the state between the flags), the main CPU 93 sets the maximum value of the inserted number to “3”. When the gaming state is the MB gaming state, the main CPU 93 sets the maximum value of the inserted number to “2”.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a MAXBET insertion process (S46). In this process, the main CPU 93 determines whether the MAX bet operation is valid or invalid based on the gaming state, the number of inserted medals, and the number of credits (stored number). The details of the MAXBET insertion processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 66 described later.

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not medal acceptance is permitted (S47). In S47, when the main CPU 93 determines that the medal acceptance is not permitted (when S47 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs the processing of S52 described later.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S47 that the medal acceptance is permitted (YES in S47), the main CPU 93 performs a medal insertion check process (S48). In this process, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not a medal has been inserted, and if a medal has been inserted, adds "1" to the value of the inserted number counter.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a medal insertion command generation and storage process (S49). In this process, the main CPU 93 generates data of a medal insertion command to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 101, and stores the command data in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 95. The medal insertion command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub-control circuit 101 by a command data transmission process in an interrupt process described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not a medal insertion or a credit is possible (S50). In S50, when the main CPU 93 determines that a medal insertion or credit is possible (if S50 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs the processing of S52 described later. On the other hand, in S50, when the main CPU 93 determines that it is not in a state in which medals can be inserted or credited (if S50 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs a process of prohibiting medals (S51). In this process, the solenoid of the selector 66 (see FIG. 5) is not driven, and the inserted medals are discharged from the medal payout opening 32.

  After the processing of S51, if S47 is NO or if S50 is YES, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the inserted number is a game startable number (S52). Specifically, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the inserted number is set to “2”.

  In S52, when the main CPU 93 determines that the inserted number is not the game startable number (if S52 is NO), the main CPU 93 returns the process to S46 and repeats the processes from S46. On the other hand, in S52, when the main CPU 93 determines that the inserted number is the game startable number (if S52 is YES), the main CPU 93 determines whether the start switch 79 is on (S53). ).

  In S53, when the main CPU 93 determines that the start switch 79 is not turned on (if S53 is NO), the main CPU 93 returns the process to S46, and repeats the processes from S46. On the other hand, in S53, when the main CPU 93 determines that the start switch 79 is turned on (YES in S53), the main CPU 93 performs a medal acceptance prohibition process (S54).

  Then, after the processing of S54, the main CPU 93 ends the medal acceptance / start check processing, and moves the processing to S4 of the main flow (see FIG. 63).

[MAXBET input processing]
Next, the MAXBET insertion processing performed in S46 during the medal acceptance / start check processing (see FIG. 65) will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not a MAX bet operation has been performed (S61). Specifically, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the MAX bet button 21 has been pressed by the player.

  In S61, when the main CPU 93 determines that the MAX bet operation has not been performed (NO in S61), the main CPU 93 ends the MAXBET insertion processing, and executes the medal acceptance / start check processing (FIG. 65). Move to S47).

  On the other hand, in S61, when the main CPU 93 determines that the MAX bet operation has been performed (YES in S61), the main CPU 93 determines whether “2MB” or “3MB” has been established (winning). It is determined (S62). That is, the main CPU 93 refers to the carryover combination storage area (see FIG. 26) to determine whether the current gaming state is the state between the 2 MB flags or the state between the 3 MB flags.

  In S62, when the main CPU 93 determines that “2MB” or “3MB” has not been established (winning) (if S62 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs the processing of S65 described later. On the other hand, in S62, when the main CPU 93 determines that “2 MB” or “3 MB” has been established (winning) (if S 62 is YES), the main CPU 93 determines the current number of inserted medals and the number of credits. Then, it is determined whether or not the sum of the number and the stored number is “3” or more (S63).

  In S63, when the main CPU 93 determines that the total of the current number of inserted medals and the number of credits (reserved number) is not equal to or more than "3" (NO in S63), the main CPU 93 executes the MAXBET insertion processing. The process is ended, and the process proceeds to S47 of the medal acceptance / start check process (see FIG. 65).

  On the other hand, in S63, when the main CPU 93 determines that the total of the current number of inserted medals and the number of credits (reserved number) is “3” or more (if S63 is YES), the main CPU 93 executes "3" is set for the number of sheets (S64). Then, after the processing of S64, the main CPU 93 ends the MAXBET insertion processing, and moves the processing to S47 of the medal acceptance / start check processing (see FIG. 65).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, in the state between the 2 MB flags or the state between the 3 MB flags, even if the MAX bet operation is performed by the player, the total number of inserted medals and the number of credits is multiplied by the state between the MB flags. When the number is less than the maximum value “3”, the number of medals to be won is not set. That is, in this case, the MAX bet operation executed by the player becomes invalid.

  Here, returning to the process of S62 again, if the determination of S62 is NO, the main CPU 93 sets a predetermined number of credited medals (S65). At this time, two or three pieces are set. After the processing of S65, the main CPU 93 ends the MAXBET insertion processing, and moves the processing to S47 of the medal acceptance / start check processing (see FIG. 65).

  As described above, in the MAXBET insertion process of the present embodiment, the validity of the MAX bet operation by the player is determined based on the total number of the current number of inserted medals and the number of credits (stored number) in the state between the MB flags. Invalidity determination is performed, and this processing is executed by the main control circuit 91. That is, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 91 performs the validity / invalidity determination of the MAX bet operation based on the current total number of inserted medals and the number of credits (stored number) in the state between the MB flags. (Bet operation determination means).

[Internal lottery processing]
Next, the internal lottery process performed in S5 in the main flow (see FIG. 63) will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, the main CPU 93 refers to the gaming state flag storage area (see FIG. 27) and determines whether or not the gaming state is the MB gaming state (S71).

  In S71, when the main CPU 93 determines that the gaming state is the MB gaming state (if S71 is determined to be YES), the main CPU 93 performs an MB operating process (S72). As shown in the internal lottery tables for the 2 MB gaming state and the 3 MB gaming state in FIGS. 19 and 20, in the MB gaming state, the “CB combination”, that is, all small combinations are always won. Therefore, in the process during MB operation, the main CPU 93 turns on the bits of all the small wins in the internal winning combination storing area (see FIG. 24). Then, after the processing of S72, the main CPU 93 ends the internal lottery processing, and moves the processing to S6 of the main flow (see FIG. 63).

  On the other hand, in S71, when the main CPU 93 determines that the gaming state is not the MB gaming state (NO in S71), the main CPU 93 sets an internal lottery table corresponding to the gaming state (S73). In this process, the main CPU 93 grasps the current gaming state with reference to the gaming state flag storage area (see FIG. 27) and determines the type of the internal lottery table.

  Next, the main CPU 93 acquires the random number value for internal lottery stored in the random number value storage area (S74). Then, the main CPU 93 sets “1” as the initial value of the winning number.

  Next, the main CPU 93 refers to the internal lottery table, acquires a lottery value corresponding to the winning number, and subtracts the lottery value from the random number for internal lottery (S75).

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the calculation result in S75 is less than “0” (negative value) (S76). In S76, when the main CPU 93 determines that the calculation result is less than “0” (if S76 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs the process of S79 described later.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S76 that the calculation result is not less than “0” (NO in S76), the main CPU 93 updates the internal random number for random determination and the winning number (S77). Specifically, the value of the calculation result is used as an internal lottery random number value, and the winning number is incremented by “1”.

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not all winning numbers have been checked (S78). In S78, when the main CPU 93 determines that all the winning numbers have not been checked (NO in S78), the main CPU 93 returns the process to S75, and repeats the processes from S75.

  On the other hand, in S78, when it is determined that the main CPU 93 has checked all the winning numbers (in the case of YES determination in S78), the main CPU 93 performs the process of S80 described later.

  Here, returning to the process of S76 again, if the determination of S76 is YES (if a digit is generated in the subtraction process), the main CPU 93 sets the small combination / replay data pointer corresponding to the winning number with the digit generated. And a data pointer for bonus is acquired (S79).

  After the process of S79 or in the case of YES determination in S78, the main CPU 93 refers to the internal lottery table (see FIGS. 13 to 15 and the like) and acquires the internal winning combination based on the small combination / replay data pointer (S80). ). Next, the main CPU 93 stores the acquired internal winning combination in the carryover combination storing area (S81).

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the data stored in the carryover combination storage area is “00000000” (S82). In S82, when the main CPU 93 determines that the data stored in the carryover combination storage area is not “00000000” (NO in S82), the main CPU 93 performs the process of S87 described later.

  On the other hand, in S82, when the main CPU 93 determines that the data stored in the carryover combination storage area is “00000000” (if S82 is YES), the main CPU 93 executes the internal lottery table (FIG. 13 to FIG. 13). 15 etc.), and obtains an internal winning combination based on the bonus data pointer (S83).

  Next, the main CPU 93 stores the acquired internal winning combination in the carryover combination storing area (S84).

  Next, the main CPU 93 refers to the carryover combination storage area and determines whether the MB (“2 MB” or “3 MB”) is carrying over (S85). In S85, when the main CPU 93 determines that the MB is not being carried over (NO in S85), the main CPU 93 performs the process of S87 described later.

  On the other hand, in S85, when the main CPU 93 determines that the MB is being carried over (if S85 is YES), the main CPU 93 sets the RT gaming state corresponding to the type of the MB being carried (S86). . Specifically, when “2 MB” is being carried over (between 2 MB flags), the main CPU 93 sets the RT1 gaming state as the RT state (bit 3 of the gaming state flag storage area (see FIG. 27)). (1) is stored (set). On the other hand, when “3 MB” is being carried over (between the 3 MB flags), the main CPU 93 sets the RT2 gaming state as the RT state (“1” in bit 4 of the gaming state flag storage area (see FIG. 27)). Is stored (set)).

  After the processing of S86, or when S82 or S85 is NO, the main CPU 93 updates the internal winning combination storage area based on the internal winning combination stored in the carryover combination storing area (S87). Thereafter, the main CPU 93 ends the internal lottery process, and moves the process to S6 of the main flow (see FIG. 63).

  Note that, as described above, the internal lottery process of the present embodiment is executed by the main control circuit 91. That is, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 91 also functions as an internal winning combination determining unit (internal winning combination determining unit). In S86 during the above-described internal lottery process, the RT gaming state corresponding to the type of the MB being carried over is set. That is, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 91 also functions as a means for performing transition control of the RT game state (replay time state control means).

[Reel stop initial setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 68, the reel stop initialization processing performed in S6 in the main flow (see FIG. 63) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the gaming state is the MB gaming state (S91).

  In S91, when the main CPU 93 determines that the gaming state is the MB gaming state (if S91 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs the processing of S93 described later. On the other hand, in S91, when the main CPU 93 determines that the gaming state is not the MB gaming state (if S91 is NO), the main CPU 93 sets the value of the small combination / replay data pointer as the spine stop number. (S92).

  After the processing of S92 or when the determination of S91 is YES, the main CPU 93 refers to a reel stop initial setting table (not shown) and, based on the acquired number of times for stopping the spinning cylinder, various information corresponding to the spinning cylinder stop number. Is acquired (S93). In this process, the numbers of the reel stop tables used during the first to third stops and information necessary for the control change process (when the reels are stopped in a specific order and stopped at a specific position, Again, information for selecting the stop table again) and the like are obtained.

  The reel stop initial setting table defines the correspondence between the number for turning the drum and various types of information such as a pull-in priority table selection data and a pull-in priority table number, which will be described later. The stop table is a table that directly or indirectly defines information on the number of sliding pieces with respect to the pressed position of the stop button. In this stop table, using the specified information, the number of sliding pieces so that the reel stops at the stop position intended by the designer so as not to give a disadvantage to the player and not to cause a false prize. Is stipulated.

  Next, the main CPU 93 stores the rotating identifier “0FFH (11111111B)” in the symbol code storage area (see FIG. 30) (S94).

  Next, the main CPU 93 stores “3” in the stop button non-operation counter provided in the main RAM 95 (S95). Thereafter, the main CPU 93 ends the reel stop initialization processing, and moves the processing to S7 of the main flow (see FIG. 63). The stop button non-operating counter is a counter for managing the number of stop buttons whose stop operation has not been detected.

[Retrieve priority storage processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 69, a description will be given of the pull-in priority storage processing performed in S11 in the main flow (see FIG. 63).

  First, the main CPU 93 stores the value of the stop button non-operation counter as the number of searches in the main RAM 95 (S101). Next, the main CPU 93 performs a search target reel determination process (S102). In this process, for example, the main CPU 93 selects a predetermined reel from among the spinning reels, and determines the selected reel as a search target reel.

  For example, in the process of S102, when all (three) reels are rotating, the left reel 3L is first determined as the search target reel. Thereafter, various processes up to S111 described later are performed on the left reel 3L, and when the process returns to S102 again, next, the middle reel 3C is determined as the search target reel. Then, various processes up to S111, which will be described later, are performed on the middle reel 3C, and when the process returns to S102, the right reel 3R is next determined as the search target reel.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs an attraction priority table selection process (S103). In this process, the pull-in priority table is selected based on the internal winning combination (data pointer) and the operation stop button. The details of the attraction priority table selection processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 70 described later.

  Next, the main CPU 93 sets “0” as the position data of the search symbol and sets “20” as the symbol check count (S104). Then, the main CPU 93 performs a symbol code storing process (S105). In this process, the symbol code corresponding to the current search symbol position data, which is located on the active line of the search target reel, is stored in the symbol code storage area. At this time, symbol codes for the number of valid lines are stored. The details of the symbol code storage process will be described later with reference to FIG. 71 described later.

  Next, the main CPU 93 updates the display combination storage area (see FIG. 25) based on the symbol code acquired in S105 and the data in the symbol code storage area (see FIG. 30) (S106). At this time, regardless of whether the internal winning combination is won or not, a combination of symbols that can be displayed (a displayable combination) is stored in the display combination storing area based on the stopped symbol.

  In this embodiment, the symbol code storage area information (symbol code and displayable role corresponding thereto) is updated for each reel to be stopped. At this time, the displayable combination may be obtained from data that defines the correspondence between the stopped reel symbol and the corresponding displayable combination prepared in advance, or the stopped reel symbol. And a symbol combination table (see FIGS. 10 to 12). When the former method is used, the correspondence relationship between the symbol and the displayable combination changes for each reel.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a pull-in priority data acquisition process (S107). In this process, the main CPU 93 sets the priority of the combination in which the bit is “1” in the display combination storing area (see FIG. 25) and the bit is “1” in the internal winning combination storing area. With reference to a ranking table (not shown), attraction-in priority data is acquired.

  The pull-in priority table is a table that defines the correspondence between the pull-in priority data for each storage area type and the predetermined priority in each of the pull-in priority table numbers. The pull-in priority order table is used for searching whether there is a more appropriate number of sliding pieces in addition to the number of sliding pieces obtained based on the stop table. The priority order is data that defines the order of priority stop display (drawn) among the types of symbol combinations related to winning. Normally, the priority is set in the order of replay, small combination, and bonus from the highest.

  In addition, if the symbol position is a symbol position that will result in an erroneous winning when stopped, "use prohibited (000H)" is acquired as the pull-in priority data in S107. Further, in the case where the symbol position has not been won internally but does not result in an erroneous winning even when stopped, in S107, "stoppable (001H)" is acquired as the pull-in priority data.

  Next, the main CPU 93 stores the acquired pull-in priority data in a pull-in priority data storage area (not shown) corresponding to the search target reel (S108). At this time, the pull-in priority data is stored in the pull-in priority data storage area so that each priority value corresponds to a bit in the storage area.

  In the pull-in priority data storage area, a storage area for priority data is provided for each reel type. Each drawing priority data storage area stores drawing priority data determined in accordance with each symbol position “0” to “19” of the corresponding reel. In the present embodiment, by referring to this pull-in priority data storage area, it is searched whether there is a more appropriate number of sliding symbols in addition to the number of sliding symbols determined based on the stop table.

  Further, the contents of the priority order attraction data stored in the attraction priority data storage area vary depending on the type of the attraction priority table number in the attraction priority table referred to when determining the attraction priority data. The pull-in priority data indicates that the higher the value, the higher the priority.

  By referring to the drawing priority data, it is possible to relatively evaluate the priority among the symbols arranged on the peripheral surface of the reel. That is, the symbol for which the largest value is determined as the pull-in priority data becomes the symbol with the highest priority. Therefore, it can be said that the pull-in priority data indicates the rank between the symbols arranged on the peripheral surface of the reel. When there are a plurality of symbols having the same value of the pull-in priority data, one symbol is determined according to the priority order defined by the priority order table.

  Next, the main CPU 93 adds “1” to the position data of the search symbol and subtracts “1” from the symbol check count (S109). Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the number of symbol checks is “0” (S110).

  In S110, when the main CPU 93 determines that the number of symbol checks is not “0” (NO in S110), the main CPU 93 returns the process to S105, and repeats the processes from S105. On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S110 that the number of symbol checks is “0” (YES in S110), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the search has been performed for the number of searches (S111).

  In S111, when the main CPU 93 determines that the search has not been performed by the number of times of search (NO in S111), the main CPU 93 returns the process to S102 and repeats the processes from S102. On the other hand, in S111, when the main CPU 93 determines that the search has been performed for the number of times of search (YES in S111), the main CPU 93 ends the attraction priority storage processing, and proceeds to S12 of the main flow (see FIG. 63). Transfer to

[Pull-in priority table selection processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 70, a description will be given of the pull-in priority table selection process performed in S103 in the flowchart of the pull-in priority storing process (see FIG. 69).

  First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the pull-in priority table selection data is set (S121).

  In S121, when the main CPU 93 determines that the withdrawal priority table selection data is set (if S121 is YES), the main CPU 93 sets the pressing order storage area (see FIG. 29) and the operation stop button storage area. With reference to FIG. 28, a pull-in priority table number corresponding to the pull-in priority table selection data is set from a pull-in priority table selection table (not shown) (S122). Then, after the process of S122, the main CPU 93 ends the attraction priority table selection process, and moves the process to S104 of the attraction priority storage process (see FIG. 69).

  The attraction priority table selection table defines the correspondence between the attraction priority selection number and the pressing order of the stop button, and the attraction priority table number for each combination. The pull-in priority table number is data for acquiring information on the priority of the display combination defined in the above-described pull-in priority table (not shown).

  On the other hand, in S121, when the main CPU 93 determines that the attraction priority table selection data has not been set (NO in S121), the main CPU 93 stores the attraction priority table corresponding to the attraction priority table number. It is set (S123). Then, after the process of S123, the main CPU 93 ends the attraction priority table selection process, and moves the process to S104 of the attraction priority storage process (see FIG. 69).

[Design code storage processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 71, a description will be given of the symbol code storing process performed in S105 in the flowchart of the attraction priority order storing process (see FIG. 69).

  First, the main CPU 93 sets valid line data (S131). In the present embodiment, the effective line is provided with one line (center line) as described above. Next, the main CPU 93 sets the check symbol position data of the search target reel based on the search symbol position and the valid line data (S132). For example, when the search target reel is the left reel 3L, since it is desired to acquire information on the middle stage of the search target reel, the check symbol position data indicating the middle stage is set.

  Next, the main CPU 93 acquires the symbol code of the symbol position data for checking (S133). Then, after storing the acquired symbol code in the symbol code storage area, the main CPU 93 ends the symbol code storage process, and shifts the process to S106 of the attraction priority storage process (see FIG. 69).

[Reel stop control process]
Next, a reel stop control process performed in S12 in the main flow (see FIG. 63) will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not a valid stop button has been pressed (S141). In S141, when the main CPU 93 determines that the valid stop button has not been pressed (NO in S141), the main CPU 93 repeats the process of S141, and executes the pressing operation of the valid stop button. Wait until.

  On the other hand, in S141, when the main CPU 93 determines that the valid stop button has been pressed (YES in S141), the main CPU 93 stores the pressing order storage area (see FIG. 29) and the operation stop button storage area (see FIG. 29). 28 (S142). Next, the main CPU 93 decrements the value of the stop button non-operation counter by "1" (S143).

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines a reel to be searched from the operation stop button (S144). Then, the main CPU 93 stores the stop start position in the main RAM 95 based on the symbol counter (S145).

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a sliding piece number determination process (S146). In this process, the main CPU 93 obtains the sliding piece number determination data based on the type of the stop button at the time of the first stop, various stop tables, and the like.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a priority pull-in control process (S147). In this process, comparison of the pull-in priority data corresponding to each symbol position in the range of the maximum number of sliding pieces "4" or "1" from the stop start position is performed, and the most appropriate number of sliding pieces is determined. The details of the priority lock-in control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 73 described later.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a reel stop command generation and storage process (S148). In this process, the main CPU 93 generates data of a reel stop command to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 101, and stores the command data in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 95. The reel stop command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101 by a command data transmission process in an interrupt process described later with reference to FIG. The reel stop command transmitted in this process includes information such as the type of reel to be stopped, the number of sliding pieces, and the ON / OFF edge of the stop switch.

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines an expected stop position based on the stop start position and the number of sliding pieces determination data acquired in S146, and stores the determined expected stop position in the main RAM 95 (S149). In this process, the main CPU 93 adds the number of sliding frames to the stop start position, and sets the result as the planned stop position.

  Next, the main CPU 93 sets the expected stop position determined in S149 as a search symbol position (S150). Next, the main CPU 93 performs the symbol code acquisition process described with reference to FIG. 71 (S151). Thereafter, the main CPU 93 updates the symbol code storage area (see FIG. 30) using the acquired symbol code (S152).

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a control change process (S153). Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the stop button non-operation counter is “0” (S154). In S154, when the main CPU 93 determines that the non-operation counter is not “0” (when S154 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs the pull-in priority storing process described with reference to FIG. 69 (S155). ). Thereafter, the main CPU 93 returns the process to S141, and repeats the process from S141.

  On the other hand, in S154, when the main CPU 93 determines that the non-operation counter is “0” (if S154 is YES), the main CPU 93 ends the reel stop control processing and proceeds to the main flow (FIG. 63). S13).

  Note that, as described above, the reel stop control processing of this embodiment is executed by the main control circuit 91. That is, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 91 also serves as a means (stop control means) for executing stop control of reel rotation (variable display of symbols).

[Priority pull-in control processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 73, the priority pull-in control processing performed in S147 in the flowchart of the reel stop control processing (see FIG. 72) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 93 sets a pull-in priority data storage area corresponding to the operation stop button (S161). Next, the main CPU 93 acquires the data of the stop start position (S162).

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the MB (“2 MB” or “3 MB”) is operating (S163). In S163, when the main CPU 93 determines that the MB is not in operation (NO in S163), the main CPU 93 performs the process of S165 described later. On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S163 that the MB is operating (if S163 is YES), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the search target reel is the left reel 3L (S164). .

  In S164, when the main CPU 93 determines that the reel to be searched is not the left reel 3L (NO in S164), the main CPU 93 performs the process of S165 described later. On the other hand, in S164, when the main CPU 93 determines that the reel to be searched is the left reel 3L (if S164 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs the processing of S167 described later.

  When a negative determination is made in S163 or S164 (when the maximum number of sliding pieces is four and the reel stop control is performed), the main CPU 93 sets a priority order table corresponding to the sliding piece number determination data (S165).

  Note that the priority order table includes the number-of-sliding-pieces determination data obtained based on the stop table and a range of numerical values predetermined as the number of sliding pieces (“0” to “4” when the maximum number of sliding pieces is four). )) (Hereinafter referred to as “priority order”). That is, in the priority order table, the order of the number of sliding pieces to be preferentially applied is determined for each piece of sliding piece number determination data. In the present embodiment, each numerical value is searched (checked) sequentially from the lower priority order “5” of the priority order table, and the numerical value corresponding to the priority order “1” is preferentially applied as the number of sliding pieces. So that In the process of S165, for example, when the sliding piece number determination data is “4”, the data of the priority specified by the address in the priority order table corresponding to the sliding piece number determination data “4” Set.

  After the processing of S165, the main CPU 93 sets “5” to the initial value of the priority order and the number of checks (S166). By this processing, the priority order is checked (searched) five times in the range of 0 to 4 frames. Then, after the processing of S166, the main CPU 93 performs the processing of S169 described later.

  When the determination in S164 is YES (when the maximum number of sliding pieces is one and the reel stop control is performed), the main CPU 93 sets the MB gaming state priority order table corresponding to the sliding piece number determination data. (S167). Next, the main CPU 93 sets “3” as the initial value of the priority order and “2” as the number of checks (S168). By this processing, the priority order is checked (searched) twice in the range of 0 frame to 1 frame. Then, after the processing of S168, the main CPU 93 performs the processing of S169 described later.

  After the processing of S166 or S168, the main CPU 93 sets the sliding piece number determination data as the number of sliding pieces (S169).

  Next, the main CPU 93 extracts a stop search position based on the stop start position and the priority order (S170). Next, the main CPU 93 acquires pull-in priority data of the stop search position (S171).

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the value of the attraction priority data acquired in S171 is equal to or greater than the value of the attraction priority data acquired earlier (S172). In S172, when the main CPU 93 determines that the attraction priority data acquired in S171 is not equal to or higher than the attraction priority data acquired earlier (NO in S172), the main CPU 93 performs the processing of S174 described later. .

  On the other hand, in S172, when the main CPU 93 determines that the pull-in priority data acquired in S171 is equal to or higher than the previously-acquired pull-in priority data (if S172 is YES), the main CPU 93 determines the number of sliding pieces. Update (S173).

  After the process of S173 or when the determination of S172 is NO, the main CPU 93 subtracts “1” from the value of the priority order and the number of checks (S174).

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the number of checks is “0” (S175). In S175, when the main CPU 93 determines that the number of checks is not “0” (if S175 is NO), the main CPU 93 returns the process to S170, and repeats the processes from S170.

  On the other hand, in S175, when the main CPU 93 determines that the number of checks is “0” (if S175 is YES), the main CPU 93 sets the finally updated number of sliding frames (S176). Then, after the process of S176, the main CPU 93 ends the priority pull-in control process, and moves the process to S148 of the reel stop control process (see FIG. 72).

[Bonus end check process]
Next, the bonus end check processing performed in S17 in the main flow (see FIG. 63) will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, the main CPU 93 refers to the game state flag storage area (see FIG. 27) and determines whether the MB ("2 MB" or "3 MB") is operating (S181). In S181, when the main CPU 93 determines that the MB is not in operation (NO in S181), the main CPU 93 ends the bonus end check processing, and shifts the processing to S18 in the main flow (see FIG. 63). Move.

  On the other hand, in S181, when the main CPU 93 determines that the MB is operating (if S181 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs a CB end process (S182). In this processing, processing such as turning off a game state flag (not shown) corresponding to “CB”, and clearing the winning number counter and the game number counter is performed. Next, the main CPU 93 updates the value of the bonus end number counter (S183).

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the value of the bonus end number counter is less than “0” (S184). In S184, when the main CPU 93 determines that the value of the bonus end number counter is not less than “0” (if S184 is NO), the main CPU 93 ends the bonus end check processing and proceeds to the main flow (FIG. 63).

  On the other hand, in S184, when the main CPU 93 determines that the value of the bonus end number counter is smaller than “0” (if S184 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs MB end processing (S185). In this process, the main CPU 93 clears the bonus end number counter and turns off the game state flag (2 MB game state flag or 3 MB game state flag) corresponding to the operating MB (“2 MB” or “3 MB”). I do. Note that the case where the value of the bonus end number counter is less than “0” means that the payout of medals exceeds 2 during the 2 MB gaming state, or the payout of medals exceeds 30 during the 3 MB gaming state. Means that

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a bonus end command generation and storage process (S186). In this process, the main CPU 93 generates data of a bonus end command to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 101, and stores the command data in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 95. The bonus end command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101 by a command data transmission process in an interrupt process described later with reference to FIG. The bonus end command includes information indicating that the bonus game has ended.

  Then, after the processing in S186, the main CPU 93 ends the bonus end check processing, and moves the processing to S18 in the main flow (see FIG. 63).

[Bonus activation check process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 75, the bonus operation check process performed in S18 in the main flow (see FIG. 63) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the MB (“2 MB” or “3 MB”) is operating (S191). In S191, when the main CPU 93 determines that the MB is not in operation (NO in S191), the main CPU 93 performs the process of S193 described later.

  On the other hand, in S191, when the main CPU 93 determines that the MB is operating (if S191 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs CB operation processing (S192). Then, after the processing of S192, the main CPU 93 ends the bonus operation check processing, and moves the processing to S2 of the main flow (see FIG. 63).

  If the determination in S191 is NO, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the MB ("2MB" or "3MB") is a winning (S193). In S193, when the main CPU 93 determines that the MB is not a winning (if S193 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs the processing of S197 described later.

  On the other hand, in S193, when the main CPU 93 determines that the MB is a winning (if S193 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs an MB operation process corresponding to the type of the winning MB (S194). In this process, the main CPU 93 sets “1” to the corresponding bit in the gaming state flag storage area (see FIG. 27) and sets the value of the bonus end number counter to a predetermined value (“30” or “2”). Set to. Further, in this process, the main CPU 93 also performs the CB operation process of S192.

  Next, the main CPU 93 clears the value of the carryover combination storage area (S195). Next, the main CPU 93 performs a bonus start command generation and storage process (S196). In this process, the main CPU 93 generates data of a bonus start command to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 101, and stores the command data in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 95. The bonus start command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101 by a command data transmission process in an interrupt process described later with reference to FIG. The bonus start command includes information indicating that the bonus game has started.

  Then, after the processing of S196, the main CPU 93 ends the bonus operation check processing, and moves the processing to S2 of the main flow (see FIG. 63).

  If the determination in S193 is NO, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not a winning combination relating to a replay (replay) has been won (S197). In S197, when the main CPU 93 determines that the winning combination relating to the replay has not been won (if S197 is NO), the main CPU 93 ends the bonus operation check processing and proceeds to the main flow (see FIG. 63). Move to S2.

  On the other hand, in S197, when the main CPU 93 determines that the winning combination relating to the replay has been won (if S197 is YES), the main CPU 93 requests automatic medal insertion (S198). That is, the main CPU 93 copies the insertion number counter to the automatic insertion number counter. Then, after the processing of S198, the main CPU 93 ends the bonus operation check processing, and moves the processing to S2 of the main flow (see FIG. 63).

[Interrupt processing under the control of the main CPU (1.1172 msec)]
Next, an interrupt process under the control of the main CPU 93 will be described with reference to FIG. In the interruption process described below, the main control circuit 91 performs a reel control process and also performs a transmission process of various command data. That is, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 91 performs the control processing of the symbol variable display operation and also functions as a means (data transmitting means) for transmitting various command data.

  First, the main CPU 93 saves the register (S201). Next, the main CPU 93 performs an input port check process (S202). In this process, signals input from various switches such as a stop switch are checked.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a timer update process (S203). In this process, the main CPU 93 performs a process of subtracting the value of the lock timer for each interrupt process, for example. Then, when the value of the lock timer becomes 0, the main CPU 93 clears the game lock flag.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a reel control process (S204). In this processing, when the start of rotation of all reels is requested, the main CPU 93 starts rotation of the left reel 3L, middle reel 3C, and right reel 3R, and thereafter, rotates each reel at a constant speed. Drive control of the three stepping motors. When the number of sliding pieces is determined, the main CPU 93 updates the symbol counter of the corresponding reel by the number of sliding pieces. Then, the main CPU 93 waits until the updated symbol counter matches the value corresponding to the expected stop position (the symbol at the expected stop position reaches an area on the activated line of the reel display window 4), and the main symbol is applied. The corresponding stepping motor is drive-controlled so that the rotation of the reel is decelerated and stopped. Further, in the present embodiment, in the process of S204, in addition to the normal acceleration process, the constant speed process, and the stop process described above, when a reel effect pattern is set at the time of the acceleration process, the process corresponds to the reel effect pattern. A reel effect (reel action) and lock control processing are also performed.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a command data transmission process (S205). In this process, the main CPU 93 transmits various command data stored in the communication data storage area to the sub control circuit 101. The command data transmission process is executed not at a period of 1.1172 msec but at a period of about 16 msec (every 15 interruption processes).

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a lamp / 7-seg driving process (S206). In this process, the main CPU 93 drives and controls the 7-segment display 24 to display the number of payouts and the number of credits. Next, the main CPU 93 performs a register return process (S207). After that, the main CPU 93 ends the interrupt process.

<Overview of characteristic processes executed by sub CPU>
Here, before describing the detailed operation of the sub-control circuit 101, an outline of various characteristic processes (including penalty processes) executed by the sub-control circuit 101 of the pachislo 1 of the present embodiment will be described. Note that more specific procedures and the like of various processes described below will be described later in detail with reference to various flowcharts.

[Initialization processing of game information after power interruption for predetermined time]
As described above, in the pachislo 1 of the present embodiment, the advantage / disadvantage of the game (acquisition of the AT winning chance) depends on the digestion state of the normal game (the number of digested games). Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the pachislot 1 returns from a power interruption for a predetermined time or more, for example, in order to prevent the stationary state of the game information (the number of digested games, etc.) from occurring at the time of opening a game store or the like. (For example, at the time of power-on at the time of opening a game store), the same initialization process as that performed when a setting change command is received is automatically performed.

  Specifically, in the present embodiment, when the elapsed time of the power interruption calculated based on the time at the time of the most recent power interruption and the time at the time of the power interruption recovery is 4 hours or more, the setting change command reception Initialization processing similar to the initialization processing performed at times is performed, and game information (the number of digested games, etc.) is returned to the initial state.

  Normally (except for the exceptional period such as the year-end and New Year holidays), there is no game store where the gaming machine is operated for 24 hours, so there is a closed state of 8 hours to 10 hours. Then, the power supply of the gaming machine is turned off for most of the closed period. Therefore, if the threshold value of the elapsed time of the power cut is set to 4 hours as in the present embodiment, the sub-control is automatically initialized at the start of business on the next day, and the digestion state of the number of games is reliably set to “0”. To start the game. However, the threshold value of the power interruption elapsed time is not limited to 4 hours, and may be set arbitrarily as long as the game information can be automatically initialized at the time of opening a store, for example.

  By performing the above-described automatic initialization process of the game information, the game information (e.g., the number of digested games) is automatically reset when returning from a power interruption for a predetermined time, and the occurrence of the stationary state of the game information is ensured. Can be prevented. As a result, occurrence of unfairness in the game can be prevented. In addition, this process eliminates the need for the clerk to manually perform the initialization process when the store is opened, so that the burden on the clerk can be reduced.

[Subtraction display processing of remaining cycle games]
In the pachislo 1 of the present embodiment, during the normal game, the remaining game number of the normal game until the start of the transition effect game in the current cycle (hereinafter, referred to as “the remaining cycle game number”) is displayed on the liquid crystal screen of the liquid crystal display device 11. You. Then, along with the end of the normal game, the number of remaining cycle games displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 is also reduced (countdown display). However, if the cycle shortening lottery is won in the normal game and the remaining cycle games are subtracted and displayed collectively by the number of the shortened games that have been won, if the subtraction display interval of the remaining cycle games is set to one game, the shortened lottery won. The subtraction display time greatly differs depending on the number, and there is a possibility that the game will feel delayed.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the normal game, when the cycle shortened lottery is won and the remaining cycle games are collectively subtracted and displayed by the number of the won shortened games, the remaining cycle games Of the subtraction display interval (subtraction game number interval). Specifically, in the present embodiment, a value obtained by adding “1” to a quotient obtained by dividing the number of winning shortened games by “30” is set as a subtraction display interval of the number of remaining cycle games.

  In this case, when the number of shortened games won is less than 30 games, the subtraction display interval of the number of remaining cycle games is “1”, and the number of remaining cycle games is subtracted and displayed at one game interval. For example, when the number of shortened games of 20 games is won at the timing of the remaining cycle games of 100 games, the number of remaining cycle games is "100", "99", "98", ..., "81", "80". "Is subtracted and displayed.

  On the other hand, when the number of shortened games won is 30 or more, the subtraction display interval of the number of remaining cycle games is "2" or more, and the number of remaining cycle games is subtracted and displayed at intervals of 2 or more games. For example, when the number of shortened games is “70”, the subtraction display interval of the number of remaining cycle games is “3” (“2” (quotient of 70/30) + “1”). Therefore, for example, when the number of shortened games of 70 games is won at the timing of the number of remaining games of 100, the number of remaining games of cycle is “100”, “97”, “94”,. , "30". In addition, when the subtraction display interval “3” is subtracted from the remaining cycle game number “31”, the remaining cycle game number becomes a value (“28”) less than the actually remaining remaining cycle game number “30”. In such a case, the number of remaining cycle games “30” actually remaining is displayed next to the number of remaining cycle games “31”.

  By performing the above-described subtraction display processing of the remaining cycle games, the subtraction display time of the remaining cycle games can be made substantially the same time regardless of the number of shortened games won. As a result, even if the normal game is advanced while the remaining cycle game number is subtracted and displayed, there is no sense of extension during the normal game, and the game can be advanced without making the player wait more than necessary. The method of calculating the display interval for subtracting the number of remaining cycle games is not limited to the above example, and the subtraction display time for reducing the number of remaining cycle games can be set to be substantially the same time regardless of the number of shortened games won. Any method can be used as long as it is a calculation method of the display interval. For example, a value other than “30” may be used as a value for dividing the number of winning shortened games.

[Control process for turning on / off the MAX bet button]
In the present embodiment, as described above, in the state between the 2 MB flags (RT1 game state) or the state between the 3 MB flags (RT2 game state), the total number of medals stored in the credit and the current number of inserted medals, as described above. Is less than three, even if the player presses the MAX bet button 21, the operation is treated as invalid.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the LED provided on the MAX bet button 21 is turned on / off in synchronization with the validity / invalidity determination processing of the player's pressing operation on the MAX bet button 21.

  Specifically, in the state between MB flags (non-MB state), the total number of medals stored in the credit (one or more) and the current number of inserted medals (two or less) is less than three. When the player presses the MAX bet button 21 in the situation (when the press operation of the MAX bet button 21 becomes invalid), the LED provided on the MAX bet button 21 is turned off. On the other hand, in the state between MB flags (non-MB state), a game is performed in a situation where the total number of medals (one or more) stored in the credit and the current number of inserted medals (two or less) is three or more. When the user presses the MAX bet button 21 (when the press operation of the MAX bet button 21 becomes valid), the LED provided on the MAX bet button 21 is turned on.

  Further, in the present embodiment, similarly in the MB gaming state, the LED provided on the MAX bet button 21 is turned on / off in synchronization with the validity / invalidity determination processing of the player's pressing operation on the MAX bet button 21. . Specifically, in a situation where the total number of medals stored in the credit (one or more) and the current number of inserted medals (one or less) is less than two, the player presses the MAX bet button 21. When the operation is performed (when the pressing operation of the MAX bet button 21 becomes invalid), the LED provided on the MAX bet button 21 is turned off. On the other hand, when the total number of the number of medals (one or more) stored in the credit and the current number of inserted medals (one or less) is two or more, the player performs the pressing operation of the MAX bet button 21. When the operation is performed (when the pressing operation of the MAX bet button 21 becomes valid), the LED provided on the MAX bet button 21 is turned on.

  In the above-described control process of turning on / off the LED provided on the MAX bet button 21, the ON / OFF determination process of the LED is performed using the MAX bet button on / off determination table described with reference to FIGS. 61 and 62. .

  When the above-described control process of turning on / off the LED provided on the MAX bet button 21 is employed, when the pressing operation of the MAX bet button 21 becomes invalid, the LED provided on the MAX bet button 21 is also turned off. The fact that the pressing operation of the bet button 21 is invalidated can be easily notified to a player who has no knowledge of the game. In this case, even a player who has no knowledge of the game can play the game with peace of mind.

[Process for generating random number for effect]
In the pachislo 1 of the present embodiment, the effect random number values (0 to 32767) used in the various lottery processes performed by the sub control circuit 101 are generated on software. Here, a method of generating the effect random number value (lottery random number value) will be described.

(1) Various random numbers and various prime numbers used in the process of generating the production random number value First, in the present embodiment, three lotteries of 16 bits (2 bytes: -32767 to 32767) required to generate the production random number value. A random number (a first random number, a second random number, and a third random number) and a 16-bit selection random number are prepared. The first random number, the second random number, and the third random number are stored in a first random number storage area, a second random number storage area, and a third random number storage area provided in the sub RAM 103, respectively. The selected random number is stored in a selected random number storage area provided in the sub RAM 103.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, a 32-bit (4 bytes: 0 to 4294967295) first prime random number random number and a second random number random number are used to update the first random number, the second random number, and the third random number, respectively. A prime number and a prime number for a third random number are prepared. Also, a 32-bit selection random number prime number for updating the selection random number is prepared. The first lottery random number, the second lottery random number, the third lottery random number, and the selected random number prime are stored in the ROM cartridge substrate 86.

  Note that the first lottery random number prime number, the second lottery random number prime number, the third lottery random number prime number, and the selected random number prime number are respectively fixed values. For example, the first lottery random number prime number is “443” and the second lottery random number prime is “443”. The prime number for lottery random number can be set to “71171”, the prime number for third random number random number can be set to “5024141”, and the prime number for selected random number can be set to “375511”.

(2) Various random number updating process In this embodiment, the selected random number, the first random number, the second random number, and the third random number are respectively changed in a period of about 4 msec after the power is turned on. Each random number is updated by performing a predetermined calculation process using the first lottery random number, the second lottery random number, and the third lottery random number.

  Specifically, each 16-bit random number is multiplied by a corresponding 32-bit prime, and the result of the multiplication is converted to 16-bit data (only the 16-bit data on the trailing side of the multiplication result is left). (Each random value in the range of -32767 to 32767)), and calculate the absolute value of the type-converted data. Thereby, each random number is updated in the range of 0 to 32767. Then, the calculation result of the absolute value (the updated random number) is stored in the corresponding random number storage area, and the update processing of each random number ends. For example, in the update processing of the first lottery random number, first, the 16-bit first random number is multiplied by a 32-bit prime number for the first random number, and the result of the multiplication is converted into 16-bit data. Then, the absolute value of the type-converted data is calculated, and the calculated result is stored in the first random number storage area as the updated first random number. Note that the initial value of each random number is a value at the time of power-on, and is a value at the time of reset (“−1”). When each of the updated random numbers of the selected random number, the first random number, the second random number, and the third random number is “0”, “1” is added to each random number (unchecked). Illustrated). This is because, in the present embodiment, the update calculation of the random number is performed by the multiplication method as described above, and when the update calculation result is “0”, all the update calculation results of the subsequent random numbers are also “0”. This is in order to avoid such a problem. However, in the update processing of each random number performed in the generation and acquisition processing of the production random number value, which will be described later, “0” as the generated production random number value is a valid value. No addition process is performed.

(3) Generation and Acquisition Process of Rendering Effect Random Value In the present embodiment, each time the sub-control circuit 101 executes the lottery process, the generation and acquisition process of the rendering random number value is performed.

  In the generation and acquisition processing of the effect random number value, first, the above-described update processing (predetermined arithmetic processing) is performed on the selected random number to update the selected random number. Next, the updated selected random number is divided by “4”, and the remainder is calculated.

  Next, a predetermined random number is selected from the first random number, the second random number, and the third random number based on the remaining value. In the present embodiment, as shown in a flowchart of a random number acquisition process in FIG. 84 described later, for example, when the remainder is “0” or “1”, the first random number is selected and the remainder is “2”. In the case of, the second random number is selected, and when the remainder is “3”, the third random number is selected.

  Next, the update processing described above is performed on the selected predetermined random number to update the predetermined random number. Then, the updated predetermined random number (0 to 32767) is obtained as a random number value for effect.

  In the present embodiment, the effect random number value is generated and obtained as described above. When the effect random number value is generated by the above method, one kind of random number update processing (predetermined calculation processing) can support various lottery processing. Further, in the present embodiment, since the effect random number value is updated and generated using a prime number, by adjusting the prime number, it is possible to easily cope with a payout change specification for each content.

  Note that the method of generating the random number for effect is not limited to the above-described example, and can be appropriately changed according to, for example, the effect specification and the payout specification. For example, in the above-described method of selecting a random number based on the remaining value, the correspondence between the remaining value and the type of the selected random number can be arbitrarily changed according to the payout specification. Also, the numerical value for dividing the selected random number is not limited to “4” and can be changed as appropriate. Further, in the above example, an example in which three types of random number random numbers are used has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and two or four or more types of random number random numbers may be used. In this case, the method of selecting a random number based on the selected random number can be appropriately changed according to the number of random numbers to be used.

[Various penalty processing]
The pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment has a function of giving a penalty when, for example, navigating the pressing order of the stop button, a predetermined pressing order rule, or the like is ignored, or when a fraud is detected. Here, various penalty processes performed in the sub control circuit 101 will be described.

  In the present embodiment, the on / off state of the penalty flag, the value of the penalty counter (the number of penalties), and the number of penalty games are provided as parameters for determining whether or not to perform the penalty processing. Note that these determination parameters are stored in the sub RAM 103.

  Basically, these determination parameters are appropriately used depending on the object to which the penalty is imposed. Specifically, the penalty flag is used when a penalty is imposed in the direct-addition lottery performed in the pseudo BB game start waiting state (confirmation screen state). The penalty counter is used when imposing a penalty on the race win rate data. The number of penalty games is used when a penalty is imposed on the process of shifting to the pseudo BB game and the cycle shortening lottery process during the normal game.

  In the case of using a plurality of determination parameters as described above in the penalty countermeasures, a penalty can be imposed as appropriate according to the gaming property of the gaming machine, the gaming state and the state of the game, so that the illegal profit acquisition of the player can be achieved. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable while avoiding it (not giving an excessive penalty).

(1) Penalty processing based on penalty flag In the present embodiment, if the penalty flag is on in the pseudo BB game start waiting state (“BB operation waiting” state described later), the number of AT games is added directly. At the time of the lottery process, a directly mounted lottery table (see FIGS. 47B and 47C) dedicated to when the penalty flag is ON is referred to.

  At this time, for example, when the current sub-game state is the transition effect state (“being raced” described later), it is determined that the internal winning combination is other than the internal winning combination related to “reach eye lip” and “fixed combination”. , The number of AT games “No additional” is won. Also, for example, when the current sub game state is an AT game ("AT in progress" described later) or a state in which a pseudo BB game has been started in an AT game ("BB in AT" described later), an internal winning combination Regardless of the type, "No additional" in the number of AT games is won. That is, when the penalty flag is on, the benefit of adding the number of AT games is almost eliminated.

  Note that the penalty flag is used, for example, when an abnormality occurs in a command sequence (order of receiving command data) in a predetermined sub-game state (“being raced”, “being general BB” or “during AT”), The stop button is turned on when the push button navigation of the stop button at the time of the pseudo BB game entry ("BB entry navigation" described later) or the push order rule is ignored. On the other hand, the penalty flag is reset (turned off) when, for example, the AT game ends, or when the pseudo BB game started during the AT game ends.

  The above-described penalty flag on / off control is executed by the sub control circuit 101. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 also serves as a means for controlling on / off of the penalty flag (penalty flag setting means). In addition, the sub control circuit 101 executes a lottery process for directly adding the number of AT games in a state of waiting for the start of the pseudo BB game, which is a target of the penalty process based on the penalty flag. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 also serves as a means for performing a lottery process of directly adding the number of AT games (notifying game number addition determining means).

(2) Penalty processing based on the number of penalty games The number of penalty games is the number of games indicating the execution period of the penalty processing. In the present embodiment, when the number of penalty games is set to a value equal to or greater than “1”, for example, a push order navigation (bell navigation) performed when a predetermined internal winning combination (“push order bell”) is won. Penalty processes such as prohibition, prohibition of the cycle shortening lottery process during the normal game, and prohibition of the process of shifting to the pseudo BB game (BB entry determination process described later) are performed.

  In the present embodiment, the sub game state is a normal state ("general" described later), a transition effect state ("running" described later), or a waiting state for starting a pseudo BB game ("waiting for BB operation" described later). When the small win related to the “push order bell” (CT bell) is internally won and the first stop operation is performed on a stop button other than the left stop button 19L (irregularly pressed), the current The number of penalty games is added to the set number of penalty games by “5”. In the present embodiment, the upper limit of the number of penalty games is set to “10”, and if the number of penalty games exceeds “10” due to the addition processing of the number of penalty games, the number of penalty games is set to the upper limit value “10”. Is done.

  On the other hand, the sub game state is a normal state ("medium" described later) or a state of waiting for starting a pseudo BB game ("waiting for BB operation" described later). When the internal winning is performed and the first stop operation is performed on the left stop button 19L, the number of penalty games is reduced by “1”. In the present embodiment, the number of penalty games is also decremented by "1" even when the first stop operation is performed in the AT state ("AT in progress" described later). Note that the number of penalty games is reset when the AT game ends (final game) or when the pseudo BB game started during the AT state ends (when the later-described “AT during BB” game ends) (“ 0 "is set).

  In the above-described penalty processing based on the number of penalty games, by performing a general penalty processing of prohibiting the pushing order navigation (bell navigation), it is possible to indicate to the player that the gaming state is being penalized and to respond to the gaming state. Penalties can be imposed. Therefore, in the present embodiment, by this penalty process, it is possible to instruct the player to play a game in accordance with the game rules while suppressing the illegal gain of the player.

  The penalty processing based on the number of penalty games described above is executed by the sub control circuit 101. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 also includes means for adding the number of penalty games (penalty game number time adding means) and means for performing a predetermined penalty process based on the number of penalty games (penalty executing means). Also serve.

(3) Penalty processing based on penalty counter The penalty counter is a counter that counts the number of illegal operations (eg, ignoring the pushing order rule) performed during a predetermined game period, and every time it is determined that an illegal operation has been performed. Is added to the value of the penalty counter. Then, in the present embodiment, when the value of the penalty counter (the number of penalties) is “1” or more, the race win rate data rewriting lottery (during penalty) table (see FIG. 40) is referred to, and the value of the penalty counter is changed. Accordingly, rewriting lottery of the AT winning probability (race win rate) is performed.

  At this time, the greater the value of the penalty counter, the greater the probability that the race win rate will be rewritten to a value lower than the current race win rate. In the present embodiment, as shown in the race win rate data rewriting lottery (during penalty) table in FIG. 40, the greater the value of the penalty counter, the greater the probability that the race win rate will be rewritten to 0%.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the race win rate data rewriting lottery is won and the race win rate is rewritten to 0% (when the right of the AT lottery is extinguished), a “race consecutive loss counter” (to be described later) ( The addition process of the value of the ceiling counter (the number of consecutive AT non-winning cycles) is also prohibited. That is, if the value of the penalty counter is equal to or greater than “1” and the race win rate is rewritten to 0%, the number of ceiling cycles of the normal game at which the AT winning is determined (the continuous cycle of the AT non-winning) is determined as a penalty. AT wins when the number of times reaches 10) is substantially extended.

  In the present embodiment, the sub game state is a normal state ("General" described later) or a transition effect state ("During a race" described later), and a small part related to the "push order bell" (CT bell) is played. When an internal winning is performed and the first stop operation is performed on a stop button other than the left stop button 19L (excessively pressed), “1” is added to the value of the currently set penalty counter. You. In the present embodiment, the upper limit of the penalty counter is set to “10”, and if the value of the penalty counter exceeds “10” by this addition processing, the value of the penalty counter is set to the upper limit value “10”. .

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the value of the penalty counter is reset (when “0” is set) when the sub game state shifts to the shift effect state (“running” described later) (when a race effect occurs). Is done). Further, the value of the penalty counter is also reset when the AT game ends (final game) or when the pseudo BB game started during the AT state ends (when the “BB during AT” described later ends). .

  By performing the penalty processing based on the value of the penalty counter described above, the race result (AT lottery result) can be rewritten with a predetermined probability corresponding to the number of unauthorized operations. Therefore, when the value of the penalty counter is small (when the number of unauthorized operations is small), there is a high possibility of an erroneous operation, so that the AT occurrence rate is set to a value close to the probability of a state where no penalty has occurred. it can. On the other hand, when the value of the penalty counter is large (when the number of unauthorized operations is large), there is a high possibility that an unauthorized operation has been performed intentionally, so that the probability of the AT occurrence rate falling (including 0%) is increased. be able to. That is, in the present embodiment, an appropriate penalty can be imposed on the player according to the degree of unauthorized operation.

  The above-described penalty processing based on the value of the penalty counter is executed by the sub control circuit 101. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 includes a unit that counts the number of times an unauthorized operation is performed (penalty count unit), and a unit that performs a predetermined penalty process based on the value of the penalty counter (penalty execution unit). Doubles as well.

<Description of operation of sub-control circuit>
Next, the contents of various processes (tasks) executed by the sub CPU 102 of the sub control circuit 101 using a program will be described with reference to FIGS. Various tables necessary for various processes of the sub CPU 102 described below are stored in the ROM cartridge substrate 86, and various control flags, various control counters, various storage areas, and the like are provided in the sub RAM 103.

  In the various processes of the sub CPU 102 described below, various types of the sub game state in the previous unit game (game), the sub game state in the current unit game, and the sub game state in the next unit game are managed. You. Hereinafter, the sub game state in the previous unit game is referred to as “game state (previous)”, the sub game state in the current unit game is referred to as “game state (current)”, and the sub game state in the next unit game is referred to. This is referred to as "game state (next time)".

  Further, hereinafter, the case where the sub game state is the normal state is referred to as “general medium”, and the pseudo BB state when the pseudo BB game is started in the normal state is referred to as “general medium BB”. The case where the sub game state is the transition effect state is referred to as “during race”, and the case where the sub game state is the AT preparation state is referred to as “AT preparation”. Further, the case where the sub game state is the AT state is referred to as “AT in progress”, and the pseudo BB state in the case where the pseudo BB game is started in the AT state is referred to as “the AT BB”. Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the sub game state is the W chance state is referred to as “W chance”, and the case where the sub game state is the additional challenge state is referred to as “additional challenge”.

[Sub CPU power-on processing]
First, the power-on process of the sub CPU 102 will be described with reference to FIG. The activation request process in the power-on process shown in FIG. 77 is a process for requesting the OS to activate various tasks necessary for the function of the pachislo 1.

  First, the sub CPU 102 performs an initialization process (S211). In this process, the sub CPU 102 executes processes such as initialization of the CPU and internal devices and initialization of peripheral ICs.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 acquires information on the power failure occurrence time stored in the power failure occurrence time storage area provided in the sub RAM 103 (S212). Next, the sub CPU 102 acquires the current time information from the RTC 108 (S213). Next, the sub CPU 102 calculates the elapsed time by subtracting the power failure occurrence time (the latest power failure occurrence time) acquired in S212 from the current time acquired in S213 (S214).

  Next, based on the elapsed time calculated in S214, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not four hours or more have elapsed since the latest power interruption (S215). In S215, when the sub CPU 102 determines that four hours or more have not elapsed since the last power interruption (S215 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S217 described later.

  On the other hand, in S215, when the sub CPU 102 determines that four hours or more have elapsed since the last power interruption occurrence (if S215 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs an initialization command receiving process (S216). In this process, for example, various game information (for example, the number of digested games, etc.) is reset. That is, in the present embodiment, for example, the initialization process of various data controlled by the sub CPU 102 is automatically performed by the power-on process at the time of starting the business of the game store. The details of the initialization command processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 93 described later.

  After the processing of S216 or when the determination of S215 is NO, the sub CPU 102 issues an activation request of the lamp control task (see FIG. 79 described later) as an activation request of the subtask (S217). Next, the sub CPU 102 issues an activation request for a sound control task (see FIG. 80 described later) (S218). Then, the sub CPU 102 issues an activation request for the mother task (see FIG. 81 described later) (S219).

  As described above, in the power-on process of the present embodiment, if the elapsed time from the occurrence of the power interruption is 4 hours (predetermined time) or more, the initialization command reception process is performed. This is executed by the sub control circuit 101. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 also serves as a unit (initializing unit at power-on) for initializing various types of game information when the elapsed time from the occurrence of the power interruption is equal to or longer than the predetermined time.

[Power interruption detection processing]
Next, the power interruption detection processing of the sub CPU 102 will be described with reference to FIG. This process is, for example, an interrupt process executed when a power cutoff state that occurs when the power of the pachislot 1 is turned off is detected.

  Upon detecting the occurrence of the power interruption, the sub CPU 102 acquires the current time information from the RTC 108 and stores the current time information as information on the power interruption occurrence time in the power interruption occurrence time storage area provided in the sub RAM 103. (S221).

[Lamp control task]
Next, a lamp control task performed by the sub CPU 102 will be described with reference to FIG. In the above-described power-on process of the sub CPU 102 (see FIG. 77), when the OS issues a lamp control task start command in response to the lamp control task start request from the sub CPU 102, the lamp control is performed according to the procedure described below. The task is performed.

  First, the sub CPU 102 performs a timer interrupt initialization process (S231). Next, the sub CPU 102 performs a process of initializing the lamp control-related data (S232).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 performs a timer interrupt waiting process (S233). Next, the sub CPU 102 performs a process of executing a sound control task (see FIG. 80 described later) (S234).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 performs a lamp data analysis process (S235). In this process, for example, the sub CPU 102 analyzes (determines) whether or not there is an LED control request for various LEDs (the LED group 85, the LED for turning on the MAX bet button, etc.) provided on the front door 2b. .

  Next, the sub CPU 102 performs a lamp effect execution process (S236). If it is determined by the analysis processing of S235 that there is an LED control request, the sub CPU 102 creates predetermined LED control data in response to the LED control request in the processing of S236, and corresponds to the created LED control data. To the LED board. On the other hand, if it is determined in the analysis process of S235 that there is no LED control request, the sub CPU 102 creates the LED update data as the LED control data in the process of S236, and stores the LED control data in the corresponding LED board. And so on.

  Then, after the processing in S236, the sub CPU 102 returns the processing to S233, and repeats the processing from S233.

Sound control task
Next, a sound control task performed by the sub CPU 102 will be described with reference to FIG. In the above-described power-on processing of the sub CPU 102 (see FIG. 77), when a sound control task start command is issued from the OS in response to the sound control task start request by the sub CPU 102, sound control is performed according to the procedure described below. The task is performed.

  First, the sub CPU 102 performs initialization processing of data related to sound control (S241). Next, the sub CPU 102 performs an execution process of the lamp control task (see FIG. 79) (S242).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 performs a sound data analysis process (S243). Next, the sub CPU 102 performs a sound effect execution process (S244). Then, after the processing of S244, the sub CPU 102 returns the processing to S242, and repeats the processing of S242 and thereafter.

[Mother task]
Next, a mother task performed by the sub CPU 102 will be described with reference to FIG. In the above-described power-on processing of the sub CPU 102 (see FIG. 77), when the mother task activation command is issued from the OS in response to the mother task activation request by the sub CPU 102, the mother task is executed according to the procedure described below. Is done.

  First, the sub CPU 102 issues an activation request for the main task (see FIG. 82 described later) (S251). Next, the sub CPU 102 issues a start request for the main board communication task (see FIG. 85 described later) (S252). Then, the sub CPU 102 issues an activation request for the animation task (see FIG. 86 described later) (S253).

[Main Task]
Next, a main task performed by the sub CPU 102 will be described with reference to FIG. In the above-described mother task of the sub CPU 102 (see FIG. 81), when the OS issues a main task start command in response to the main task start request by the sub CPU 102, the main task is executed according to the procedure described below. You. In this embodiment, the main task is executed at a cycle of about 4 msec.

  First, the sub CPU 102 performs VSYNC (Vertical Synchronizing Signal) interrupt initialization processing (S261). Next, the sub CPU 102 performs a VSYNC interrupt waiting process (S262). Next, the sub CPU 102 performs a drawing process (S263).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 performs a random number update process (S264). In this process, the sub CPU 102 updates the selected random number and various random numbers (first random number to third random number) for generating the effect random number value. The details of the random number update process will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, after the processing of S264, the sub CPU 102 returns the processing to S262, and repeats the processing from S262.

[Random number update processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 83, the random number updating process performed in S264 in the flowchart of the main task (see FIG. 82) will be described. In the present embodiment, the random number update process is executed at a cycle of about 4 msec.

  In the random number update process, the sub CPU 102 updates various random numbers stored in various random number storage areas provided in the sub RAM 103 (S271). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines the corresponding 32-bit selection random number prime number, first lottery random number prime number corresponding to the 16-bit selection random number, the first random number random number, the second random number random number, and the third random number random number, respectively. The above-described predetermined arithmetic processing is performed using the second prime random number random number and the third random number random prime, and each random number is updated.

  Specifically, the sub CPU 102 multiplies each 16-bit random number by a corresponding 32-bit prime number, converts the result of the multiplication to 16-bit data (data of 16 bits on the trailing side of the multiplication result). (Only random numbers in the range of -32767 to 32767)), and the absolute value of the type-converted data is calculated. Thereby, each random number is updated in the range of 0 to 32767. When each of the updated random numbers of the selected random number, the first random number, the second random number, and the third random number is “0”, “1” is added to each random number (unchecked). Illustrated). However, in the update processing of each random number performed in the generation and acquisition processing of the production random number value, which will be described later, “0” as the generated production random number value is a valid value. No addition process is performed.

  Then, after the process of S271, the sub CPU 102 ends the random number update process, and moves the process to S262 of the main task (see FIG. 82).

  Note that, as described above, the random number update processing of the present embodiment is executed by the sub control circuit 101. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 also serves as a means for updating various random numbers at a predetermined cycle (random number updating means).

[Random number acquisition processing]
Next, a random number acquisition process will be described with reference to FIG. In the present embodiment, each time various lottery processes (for example, a race information lottery process, a pseudo BB lottery process, a direct on-board lottery process, a cycle shortening lottery process, a push order navigation lottery process, and the like) performed by the sub CPU 102 are performed. Then, a random number acquisition processing program described below is called and executed.

  First, the sub CPU 102 updates the 16-bit selection random number stored in the selection random number storage area by using the 32-bit selection random number prime, and uses the updated selection random number to generate an effect random number value. It is acquired as a selected random number (S281). The update processing of the selected random number in S281 is performed in the same manner as the update processing of each random number described in the random number update processing of FIG. 83, but the correction processing when the value of the selected random number becomes “0” (“ 1) is not performed.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 divides the selected random number obtained in S281 by “4” and calculates the remainder (S282). Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether the remaining value is “0” or “1” (S283).

  In S283, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the remaining value is “0” or “1” (if S283 is YES), the sub CPU 102 stores the 16-bit random number stored in the first random number storage area. The first lottery random number is updated using the 32-bit first lottery random number prime number, and the updated first lottery random number is obtained as a rendering random number value (0 to 32767) used in the lottery process of the callee ( S284). The update process of the first random number in S284 is performed in the same manner as the update process of each random number described in the random number update process of FIG. 83. The correction process (the process of adding “1”) is not performed. Then, after the process of S284, the sub CPU 102 ends the random number acquisition process, and returns the effect random number value acquired in S284 to the lottery process of the call destination.

  On the other hand, in S283, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the remaining value is not “0” or “1” (if S283 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether the remaining value is “2”. Is determined (S285).

  In S285, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the remainder value is “2” (if S285 is YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the 16-bit second random number stored in the second random number storage area. Is updated using the 32-bit second random number random prime, and the updated second random number random number is acquired as an effect random number value (0 to 32767) used in the lottery process of the called party (S286). The update processing of the second random number random number in S286 is performed in the same manner as the update processing of each random number described in the random number update processing of FIG. 83, except that the value of the second random number random number becomes “0”. The correction process (the process of adding “1”) is not performed. Then, after the process of S286, the sub CPU 102 ends the random number acquisition process and returns the effect random number value acquired in S286 to the lottery process of the call destination.

  On the other hand, in S285, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the surplus value is not “2” (the surplus value is “3”) (if S285 is NO), the sub CPU 102 stores the third random number random number. The 16-bit third lottery random number stored in the area is updated by using the 32-bit third lottery random number prime, and the updated third lottery random number is used as the effect random number value ( 0 to 32767) (S287). The update processing of the third random number random number in S287 is performed in the same manner as the update processing of each random number described in the random number update processing of FIG. 83, except that the value of the third random number random number becomes “0”. The correction process (the process of adding “1”) is not performed. Then, after the process of S287, the sub CPU 102 ends the random number acquiring process, and returns the effect random number value acquired in S287 to the lottery process of the called party.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the selection random number and various lottery random numbers for generating the effect random number value are updated not only in the random number update process performed in a cycle of about 4 msec but also in the random number acquisition process. Is done.

  As described above, the random number acquisition processing according to the present embodiment is executed by the sub control circuit 101. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 also functions as a means for generating an effect random number value (lottery random number generation means). In the above-described random number acquisition processing, the selected random number is updated using the selected random number prime, and this processing is executed by the sub-control circuit 101. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 also serves as a means for updating the selected random number when generating the effect random number value (selected random number updating means). In the random number acquisition process described above, a predetermined random number is selected based on the updated selected random number, and this process is executed by the sub control circuit 101. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 also serves as a means for selecting a predetermined random number based on the updated selected random number (a random number selecting means). Further, in the random number acquisition process described above, the random number value for effect is acquired by updating the selected lottery random number, and this process is executed by the sub control circuit 101. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 also functions as a means for updating the selected random number random number and obtaining the effect random number value (lottery random number value obtaining means).

[Main board communication task]
Next, a main board communication task performed by the sub CPU 102 will be described with reference to FIG. In the above-described mother task of the sub CPU 102 (see FIG. 81), when a start command of the main board communication task is generated from the OS in response to the start request of the main board communication task by the sub CPU 102, the main task is performed according to the procedure described below. A board communication task is performed.

  First, the sub CPU 102 performs a communication message queue initialization process (S291). Next, the sub CPU 102 performs a check process of the received command (S292). In this process, the sub CPU 102 extracts the type of the received command and the like.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether a valid command has been received (S293). In the present embodiment, the command type is associated with one of the 16 types of codes “01H” to “10H”, and when the game is operating normally, the command type is “01H” to “10H”. One of "10H". Therefore, in the process of S293, if the code of the type of the received command is any of “01H” to “10H”, the sub CPU 102 determines that the command type is valid (specified type). On the other hand, when the code of the command type is other than “01H” to “10H”, the sub CPU 102 determines that some abnormality (including improper behavior) has occurred during the game, and determines that the command type is invalid. judge.

  In S293, when the sub CPU 102 determines that a valid command has not been received (NO in S293), the sub CPU 102 returns the process to S292, and repeats the processes from S292. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S293 that a valid command has been received (YES in S293), the sub CPU 102 generates various game information based on the received command, and generates the various game information. Is stored in the sub RAM 103 (S294).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 performs a command analysis process (S295). The details of the command analysis processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 89 described later.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 performs a command sequence check process (S296). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines whether there is an abnormality in the reception order (sequence) of the received command, and if there is an abnormality in the sequence, performs a predetermined penalty process. The details of the command sequence check process will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, after the processing in S296, the sub CPU 102 returns the processing to S292, and repeats the processing from S292.

[Anime task]
Next, an animation task performed by the sub CPU 102 will be described with reference to FIG. In the above-described mother task of the sub CPU 102 (see FIG. 81), when an animation task activation command is issued from the OS in response to the animation task activation request by the sub CPU 102, the animation task is executed according to the procedure described below. You. In the present embodiment, the animation task is executed at a cycle of about 33 msec.

  First, the sub CPU 102 checks a change in the current game information generated by the main board communication task from the previous game information (S301). Next, the sub CPU 102 performs an object control process (S302).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 performs an animation task management process (S303). The details of the animation task management process will be described later with reference to FIG. 87 described later. Then, after the processing of S303, the sub CPU 102 returns the processing to S301, and repeats the processing from S301.

  As described above, each process of the animation task of the present embodiment is executed by the sub-control circuit 101. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 also serves as a means for controlling the image display operation (image display control means) based on the determined effect.

[Animation task management processing]
Next, the animation task management process performed in S303 in the flowchart of the animation task (see FIG. 86) will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 102 performs an effect sequence update process (S311). In this processing, the sub CPU 102 mainly updates the effect timeline (index of the reproduced image frame).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 performs a time frame update process (S312). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not a predetermined event (for example, a start event, a rotation start event, a reel stop event, a display event, and the like) has occurred, and when an event occurs, sets the start position of the effect sequence as an occurrence event. Change to the corresponding position and clear the production timeline. In this process, if there is call sign data associated with (linked to) the image frame (time frame) of the effect sequence data on the current effect time line, the call sign data is provided in the sub RAM 83. Is stored in the call sign storage area.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 acquires the call sign data associated with the time frame (S313). If the call sign data associated with the time frame is not stored in the call sign storage area, the call sign data is not obtained in this process.

  Next, sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the call sign data acquired in S313 includes a sushi material symbol rewrite instruction request (S314).

  In S314, when sub CPU 102 determines that the call sign data does not include a sushi symbol rewriting instruction request (NO in S314), sub CPU 102 performs the process of S316 described later. On the other hand, in S314, when sub CPU 102 determines that the call sign data includes a sushi material symbol rewriting instruction request (YES in S314), sub CPU 102 determines the sushi symbol based on the acquired call sign data. The rewrite display data of the neta symbol is acquired, and rewrite drawing processing is registered (S315).

  Note that, at the time of the processing of S315, the sushi material conversion data generation random determination (S802 during Kappa victory_game start processing shown in FIG. 127 described later) is won and the rewriting display of the sushi material symbol is determined. In the process of S315, a plurality (five games) of sushi material symbols displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 after the next game are simultaneously rewritten based on the sushi material symbol rewrite display data. On the other hand, if the sushi story data conversion occurrence lottery has not been won at the time of the processing of S315, the sushi story symbol is not rewritten in the processing of S315 because rewrite display data of the sushi story symbol is not obtained.

  After the processing of S315 or when the determination of S314 is NO, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the cycle information of the normal game (the number of remaining cycle games) is being displayed (S316).

  In S316, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the period information of the normal game is not being displayed (NO in S316), the sub CPU 102 ends the animation task management process and proceeds to the animation task (see FIG. 86). Move to S301.

  On the other hand, in S316, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the period information of the normal game is being displayed (in the case of YES determination in S316), the sub CPU 102 displays 5 seconds from the display of the previous period information (the number of remaining period games). It is determined whether or not the image reproduction time of a frame or more has elapsed (S317). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the elapsed time from the previous display of the cycle information has reached the update display interval of the cycle information.

  If the update display interval of the cycle information is set to one frame interval, it becomes difficult for the player to visually recognize the change of the cycle information (the number of remaining cycle games). Therefore, in this embodiment, the update display interval of the cycle information is set to 5 frames or more. And However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the update display interval of the cycle information can be set arbitrarily as long as the change in the cycle information is within a range that can be visually recognized by the player.

  In S317, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the image reproduction time of 5 frames or more has not elapsed since the previous display of the cycle information (NO in S317), the sub CPU 102 ends the animation task management process. Then, the process proceeds to S301 of the animation task (see FIG. 86). On the other hand, in S317, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the image reproduction time of five frames or more has elapsed since the previous display of the cycle information (when S317 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the cycle information display processing (S317). S318). In this process, the sub CPU 102 updates the cycle information of the normal game (the number of remaining games in the current cycle), and also determines the display mode (the display mode of subtracting the number of remaining games). The details of the cycle information display process will be described later with reference to FIG. 88 described later.

  Then, after the processing of S318, the sub CPU 102 ends the animation task management processing, and shifts the processing to S301 of the animation task (see FIG. 86).

  As described above, in S313 of the animation task management process of the present embodiment, a sushi material symbol rewrite instruction request associated with a predetermined image frame in the effect moving image displayed by the liquid crystal display device 11 is included. This call sign data is acquired, and this processing is executed by the sub control circuit 101. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 also serves as a unit (change command information acquisition unit) for acquiring call sign data including a sushi material symbol rewrite instruction request in the animation task management process. In S315 of the above-described animation task management processing, when the rewriting display of the sushi material symbol is determined and the call sign data including the sushi material symbol rewriting instruction request is acquired, the sushi material symbol is rewritten. This process is executed by the sub-control circuit 101. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 also serves as a means (additional game information change display means) for performing rewriting display (change display) of the sushi material symbol based on the call sign data.

[Cycle information display processing]
Next, the cycle information display processing performed in S318 in the flowchart of the animation task management processing (see FIG. 87) will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the previous cycle counter is different from the value of the cycle counter (S321). Note that the value of the cycle counter indicates the number of games of the normal game actually remaining in the current cycle (true value of the number of remaining cycle games), and the value of the previous cycle counter is the cycle counter in the previous cycle information display processing. Is the value of Then, for example, when the game has shifted to the next game between the previous cycle information display processing and the current cycle information display processing, or when the value of the cycle counter has been subtracted by winning the cycle shortened lottery Is different from the value of the cycle counter in the previous cycle, the result of S321 is YES.

  In S321, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the previous cycle counter is not different from the value of the cycle counter (in the case of NO determination in S321), the sub CPU 102 terminates the cycle information display processing and executes the animation task management processing. (See FIG. 87) is also ended. On the other hand, in S321, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the previous cycle counter is different from the value of the cycle counter (if S321 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the previous cycle counter is equal to the value of the display cycle counter. It is determined whether they are the same (S322). The value of the display cycle counter is a value of the number of remaining cycle games displayed on the liquid crystal screen of the liquid crystal display device 11.

  For example, when the current cycle information display processing is performed immediately after the game has shifted to the next game, or when the cycle counter has been won and the value of the cycle counter is subtracted, Since the value of the cycle counter becomes equal to the value of the display cycle counter, S322 is determined as YES. Also, for example, after winning the cycle shortening lottery, during the operation of subtracting and displaying (counting down) the remaining cycle game number displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 at a predetermined subtraction game number interval (subtraction display interval), the cycle information is displayed. When the display process is performed, the value of the previous cycle counter is different from the value of the display cycle counter, and thus the determination in S322 is NO.

  In S322, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the previous cycle counter is different from the value of the display cycle counter (when S322 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S324 described later. On the other hand, in S322, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the previous cycle counter is the same as the value of the display cycle counter (in the case of YES in S322), the sub CPU 102 displays the remaining number displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11. A subtraction display interval (predetermined unit game number interval) when the number of periodic games is subtracted and displayed is determined (S323).

  In the process of determining the subtraction display interval in S323, for example, a value obtained by subtracting the value of the cycle counter from the value of the previous cycle counter (corresponding to the number of shortened games when the cycle shortening lottery is won) is divided by "30". Then, a value obtained by adding “1” to the quotient obtained by the division is set as a subtraction display interval. For example, when the number of shortened games of 100 games is won in the cycle shortening lottery, the subtraction display interval is “4” (the quotient of 100/30 + 1). Further, for example, when the number of shortened games won in the cycle shortened lottery is 20, the subtraction display interval is “1” (quotient of 20/30 + 1).

  After the process of S323 or when the determination of S322 is NO, the sub CPU 102 sets a value obtained by subtracting the subtraction display interval from the value of the display cycle counter to the value of the display cycle counter (S324). By this processing, the value of the display cycle counter is updated, and the number of remaining cycle games of the normal game displayed on the liquid crystal screen of the liquid crystal display device 11 is also subtracted. In the update processing of the display cycle counter of S324 performed when S322 is NO, the subtraction display interval at the time of the previous cycle information display processing is used.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the cycle counter is equal to or greater than the value of the display cycle counter (S325). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines whether the number of remaining cycle games to be displayed on the liquid crystal screen of the liquid crystal display device 11 is smaller than the true value of the number of remaining cycle games of the normal game actually remaining at present. Is determined.

  In S325, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the cycle counter is not greater than or equal to the value of the display cycle counter (if S325 is NO), that is, the number of remaining cycle games of the normal game to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 is If the value is not less than the true value of the number of remaining cycle games actually remaining, the sub CPU 102 ends the cycle information display processing and ends the animation task management processing (see FIG. 87). I do.

  On the other hand, in S325, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the cycle counter is equal to or greater than the value of the display cycle counter (in the case of YES determination in S325), that is, the remaining cycle of the normal game scheduled to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11. When the number of games has become less than the true value of the number of remaining cycle games actually remaining at present, the sub CPU 102 sets the value of the cycle counter to the previous cycle counter (S326).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the value of the cycle counter in the display cycle counter (S327). With this processing, the true value of the number of remaining period games of the normal game that is actually left is displayed on the liquid crystal screen of the liquid crystal display device 11. That is, when the number of remaining cycle games of the normal game scheduled to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 becomes a value less than the true value of the number of remaining cycle games, the true value of the remaining cycle game of the normal game is changed to the liquid crystal display device 11. Is displayed on the LCD screen. Then, after the process of S327, the sub CPU 102 ends the period information display process and also ends the animation task management process (see FIG. 87).

  As described above, in the cycle information display process of the present embodiment, when the cycle shortening lottery during the normal game is won, the number of remaining cycle games is subtracted and displayed at a predetermined subtraction game number interval (subtraction display interval). This process is executed by the sub control circuit 101. That is, in the present embodiment, when the cycle shortening lottery during the normal game is won, the sub-control circuit 101 causes the remaining cycle game number of the normal game (remaining unit game number) to be subtracted and displayed at a predetermined unit game number interval. It also serves as a means (subtraction display control means). In the above-described cycle information display processing, a subtraction game number interval for subtracting and displaying the remaining cycle games is determined based on the number of shortened games won, and this processing is executed by the sub control circuit 101. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 also functions as a means for determining a subtraction game number interval (subtraction display interval determination means) based on the number of winning reduced games.

[Command analysis processing]
Next, the command analysis processing performed in S295 in the flowchart of the main board communication task (see FIG. 85) will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 102 performs an effect content determination process (S331). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines the effect content according to the received data. The details of the effect content determination processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 91 and 92 described later.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not there is an effect determined in the effect content determination processing of S331 (S332).

  In S332, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the determined effect is not present (NO in S332), the sub CPU 102 ends the command analysis process and proceeds to S296 of the main board communication task (see FIG. 85). Transfer to On the other hand, in S332, when the sub CPU 102 determines that there is a determined effect (when S332 is YES), the sub CPU 102 acquires effect sequence data (effect video data) based on the determined effect. (S333)

  Next, the sub CPU 102 performs a lamp data determination process (S334). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines predetermined lamp data according to the effect content determined in S331. Next, the sub CPU 102 performs a sound data determination process (S335). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines predetermined sound data according to the effect content determined in S331.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 registers the determined various data (S336). Then, after the processing of S336, the sub CPU 102 ends the command analysis processing, and moves the processing to S296 of the main board communication task (see FIG. 85).

[Command sequence check processing]
Next, the command sequence check process performed in S296 in the flowchart of the main board communication task (see FIG. 85) will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the received command is a command to be determined in the command sequence (command receiving order) (S341).

  When the player is playing a game with normal operation, usually, the order of “BET”, “start”, “reel rotation start”, “stop”, “display of symbol combination”, “medal payout” (hereinafter, “medal payout”) An operation is performed in a basic order, and commands of a type corresponding to each operation are transmitted to the sub CPU 102 in this basic order. Therefore, the determination target commands in the process of S341 are a medal insertion command (BET command), a start command, a reel rotation start command, a reel stop command, a winning operation command (display command), and a payout end command. The present invention is not limited to this, and the command to be determined in the command sequence may include a bonus start command, a bonus end command, and the like.

  In S341, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the received command is not the command to be determined in the command sequence (when S341 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the command sequence check process, and shifts the process to the main board communication task ( It moves to S292 of FIG. 85).

  On the other hand, in S341, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the received command is the command to be determined in the command sequence (if S341 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs a command sequence determination process (S342). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the receiving order of the command to be determined is a predetermined order (order during normal operation).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not there is an abnormality in the command sequence based on the result of the determination processing in S342 (S343). In S343, when the sub CPU 102 determines that there is no abnormality in the command sequence (in the case of NO determination in S343), that is, when the game is being performed by the normal operation, the sub CPU 102 performs the command sequence check processing. After terminating, the process moves to S292 of the main board communication task (see FIG. 85).

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S343 that there is an abnormality in the command sequence (when S343 is YES), that is, when it determines that some abnormality (including improper conduct) has occurred during the game, The sub CPU 102 determines whether the gaming state (current) is “general”, “race”, “general BB”, or “AT BB” (S344).

  In S344, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the determination condition of S344 is not satisfied (if S344 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the command sequence check process and returns the process to the main board communication task (see FIG. 85). Move to S292. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S344 that the determination condition of S344 is satisfied (YES in S344), the sub CPU 102 adds “5” to the current number of penalty games (S345). When the number of penalty games after addition exceeds “10” (the upper limit of the number of penalty games) by the addition processing, the sub CPU 102 sets “10” as the number of penalty games.

  After the processing of S345, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the gaming state (current) is “during a race”, “during a general BB”, or “during an AT BB” (S346).

  In S346, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the determination condition of S346 is not satisfied (when S346 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the command sequence check processing and returns the processing to the main board communication task (see FIG. 85). Move to S292. On the other hand, in S346, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the determination condition of S346 is satisfied (YES in S346), the sub CPU 102 determines whether the “BB rush check flag” is on (S347). ). The BB entry check flag is a flag provided to check the occurrence of an event called "command spill" due to a goto (illegal act). When a command is missed, the BB entry check flag is turned off, thereby generating a state in which the pseudo BB game is not started.

  In step S347, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the BB entry check flag is not in the ON state (if S347 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the command sequence check processing, and executes the main board communication task (see FIG. 85). Move to S292). On the other hand, in S347, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the BB entry check flag is in the ON state (when S347 is YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the penalty flag to the ON state (S348). Then, after the processing of S348, the sub CPU 102 ends the command sequence check processing, and moves the processing to S292 of the main board communication task (see FIG. 85).

[Production content decision processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 91 and FIG. 92, the effect content determination processing performed in S331 in the flowchart of the command analysis processing (see FIG. 89) will be described. The effect data determined (registered) in the following processing is data for specifying animation data, sound data, and lamp data. Therefore, when the effect data is registered in the following processes, the corresponding animation data, sound data, lamp data, and the like are determined, and effects such as video display, sound reproduction, and lamp turning on / off are executed.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not an initialization command has been received (S351).

  In S351, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the initialization command has been received (YES in S351), the sub CPU 102 performs an initialization command reception process (S352). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines (registers) the effect data at the time of the initialization process based on information included in the initialization command, for example, whether there is a change in the set value, the set value, and the like. In the process at the time of receiving the initialization command, various game information (the number of digested games, etc.) is also reset. The details of the processing at the time of receiving the initialization command will be described later with reference to FIG. 93 described later. Then, after the processing of S352, the sub CPU 102 ends the effect content determination processing, and moves the processing to S332 of the command analysis processing (see FIG. 89).

  On the other hand, in S351, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the initialization command has not been received (NO in S351), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the medal insertion command has been received (S353).

  In S353, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the medal insertion command has been received (when S353 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs a medal insertion command receiving process (S354). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines the effect data at the time of medal insertion (at the time of betting) based on information included in the medal insertion command, for example, whether or not the medal is inserted, the value of the number of insertion counter, the value of the credit counter, and the like. (register. The details of the medal insertion command receiving process will be described later with reference to FIG. 95 described later. Then, after the processing of S354, the sub CPU 102 ends the effect content determination processing, and moves the processing to S332 of the command analysis processing (see FIG. 89).

  On the other hand, in S353, when the sub CPU 102 determines that it is not the time when the medal insertion command is received (S353: NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether the time is the time when the start command is received (S355).

  In S355, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the start command has been received (when S355 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs a start command receiving process (S356). In this processing, the sub CPU 102 includes information such as the type of the game state flag, the value of the bonus end number counter, the type of the internal winning combination, the type of the flag related to the lock effect, the value of the effect timer, and the like included in the start command. Based on this, the effect data at the start of the game (at the start) is determined (registered). The details of the start command reception process will be described later with reference to FIG. 96 described later. Then, after the processing of S356, the sub CPU 102 ends the effect content determination processing, and moves the processing to S332 of the command analysis processing (see FIG. 89).

  On the other hand, in S355, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the start command has not been received (NO in S355), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the reel rotation start command has been received (S357).

  In S357, when the sub CPU 102 determines that a reel rotation start command has been received (if S357 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs a reel rotation start command reception process (S358). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines (registers) the effect data at the start of reel rotation based on the reel rotation start command. Then, after the processing of S358, the sub CPU 102 ends the effect content determination processing, and moves the processing to S332 of the command analysis processing (see FIG. 89).

  On the other hand, in S357, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the reel rotation start command has not been received (NO in S357), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the reel stop command has been received (S359).

  In S359, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the reel stop command has been received (when the determination in S359 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs a reel stop command receiving process (S360). In this process, the sub CPU 102 generates the effect data at the time of reel stop based on the information included in the reel stop command, for example, the type of the stop reel (operation stop button), the stop start position, the number of sliding symbols, the effect number, and the like. Decide (register). The details of the reel stop command receiving process will be described later with reference to FIG. 136 described later. Then, after the processing of S360, the sub CPU 102 ends the effect content determination processing, and moves the processing to S332 of the command analysis processing (see FIG. 89).

  On the other hand, in S359, when the sub CPU 102 determines that a reel stop command has not been received (NO in S359), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not a winning operation command has been received (S361).

  In S361, when the sub CPU 102 determines that a winning operation command has been received (if S361 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs a winning operation command receiving process (S362). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines (registers) the effect data at the time of the winning operation based on the information included in the winning operation command, for example, the type of the display combination, the flag related to the lock effect, the number of payout medals, and the like. . The details of the winning operation command receiving process will be described later with reference to FIG. 139 described later. Then, after the processing of S362, the sub CPU 102 ends the effect content determination processing, and moves the processing to S332 of the command analysis processing (see FIG. 89).

  On the other hand, in S361, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the winning operation command has not been received (NO in S361), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the payout end command has been received (S363).

  When the sub CPU 102 determines in S363 that the payout end command has been received (YES in S363), the sub CPU 102 performs a payout end command reception process (S364). In this process, the sub CPU 102 issues a lighting request of the LED provided on the MAX bet button 21 in accordance with the current credit number of medals. The details of the processing at the time of receiving the payout end command will be described later with reference to FIG. 145 described later. Then, after the processing of S364, the sub CPU 102 ends the effect content determination processing, and moves the processing to S332 of the command analysis processing (see FIG. 89).

  On the other hand, in S363, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the payout end command has not been received (NO in S363), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the bonus start command has been received (S365).

  In S365, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the bonus start command has been received (if S365 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs a bonus start command receiving process (S366). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines (registers) the effect data at the start of the bonus based on the bonus start command. Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the current number of medals is two or more (S367).

  In S367, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the current credit number of medals is not two or more (if S367 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the effect content determination processing, and executes the command analysis processing (FIG. 89). On the other hand, in S367, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the current number of medals is two or more (if S367 is YES), the sub CPU 102 issues a lighting request to the LED provided on the MAX bet button 21. Is performed (S368). Then, after the processing of S368, the sub CPU 102 ends the effect content determination processing, and moves the processing to S332 of the command analysis processing (see FIG. 89).

  Here, returning to the process of S365 again, in S365, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the bonus start command has not been received (NO in S365), the sub CPU 102 determines whether the bonus end command has been received. It is determined whether or not it is (S369).

  If the sub CPU 102 determines in S369 that the bonus end command has been received (if S369 is determined to be YES), the sub CPU 102 performs a bonus end command receiving process (S370). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines (registers) the effect data at the time of the bonus end based on the bonus end command. Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the current number of medals is three or more (S371).

  In S371, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the current number of medals is not three or more (if S371 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the effect content determination processing, and executes the command analysis processing (FIG. 89). On the other hand, in S371, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the current number of medals is three or more (if S371 is YES), the sub CPU 102 issues a lighting request to the LED provided on the MAX bet button 21. Is performed (S372). Then, after the processing of S372, the sub CPU 102 ends the effect content determination processing, and moves the processing to S332 of the command analysis processing (see FIG. 89).

  Here, returning to the processing of S369 again, in S369, when the sub CPU 102 determines that it is not the time when the bonus end command is received (NO in S369), the sub CPU 102 determines whether it is the time when the no operation command is received. It is determined whether or not it is (S373).

  When the sub CPU 102 determines in S373 that it is not the time when no operation command is received (NO in S373), the sub CPU 102 ends the effect content determination processing and proceeds to S332 of the command analysis processing (see FIG. 89). Transfer to

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S373 that the non-operation command has been received (when the determination in S373 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs a non-operation command reception process (S374).

  The no-operation command is transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub-control circuit 101 at a cycle of about 16 msec when there is no other command transmitted from the main control circuit 91. Then, in the no-operation command reception process, the sub CPU 102 outputs information on the input port status of each operation unit (for example, on / off information of the BET switch 77, the start switch 79, etc.) included in the no-operation command to the sub CPU 102. The data is stored in a predetermined storage area provided in the RAM 103. In this process, various processes related to the determination of the number of AT start games are also performed based on the information on the input port state of each operation unit. Details of the no-operation command reception process will be described later with reference to FIG. 146 described later. Then, after the processing of S374, the sub CPU 102 ends the effect content determination processing, and moves the processing to S332 of the command analysis processing (see FIG. 89).

[Process when receiving initialization command]
Next, with reference to FIG. 93, the process at the time of receiving the initialization command performed in S352 in the flowchart of the effect content determination process (see FIGS. 91 and 92) will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 102 initializes a payout-related variable (S381). In this process, the sub CPU 102 sets “general” to the gaming state (previous), the gaming state (current), and the gaming state (next time). In this process, the sub CPU 102 also resets various game information (the number of digested games and the like) and sets, for example, “180” to the value of the cycle counter (resets the number of remaining cycle games of the normal game).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 performs a race information lottery process (S382). The details of the race information lottery process will be described later with reference to FIG. 94 described later. Then, after the processing of S382, the sub CPU 102 ends the processing at the time of receiving the initialization command, and also ends the effect content determination processing (see FIGS. 91 and 92).

  As described above, in the processing at the time of receiving the initialization command of the present embodiment, various game information (the number of digested games, etc.) is reset, and this processing is executed by the sub-control circuit 101. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 also serves as a means (game information initialization means) for initializing various game information when receiving an initialization command.

[Race information lottery process]
Next, the race information random determination process performed in S382 in the flowchart of the initialization command reception process (see FIG. 93) will be described with reference to FIG. In the race information lottery process, various pieces of information related to the race effect of the character performed in the transition effect game are determined by lottery.

  First, the sub CPU 102 performs a race runner MAP lottery process with reference to the race runner MAP lottery table (see FIG. 32) (S391). Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the value (MAP number) of the lottery result of the race runner MAP lottery process to “race runner MAP” (S392).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 refers to the race information MAP data table (see FIG. 33) and, based on the value (race information MAP number) of “race runner MAP”, a winning target lottery table corresponding to the race information MAP data. The type (see tables A to J) of (see FIG. 34) is determined (S393). In this process, based on the value of the set race runner MAP (race information MAP), the “target table” (target table) corresponding to the race information MAP data of up to four races (first to fifth races) A to J) are determined.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the “target table” for the determined first to fifth races (S394). Then, the sub CPU 102 performs a lottery process of the race victory target (candidate) of the first to fifth races based on the “target table” of the first to fifth races set in S394 ( S395).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the lottery result of the victory target player lottery process to “race winner” (S396). By this processing, the race winners of the first to fifth races (any one of “male A”, “male B”, “female A”, “tengu”, “kappa”, and “male A / male B”) Is set to "Race Winner".

  Next, the sub CPU 102 performs a race win rate MAP lottery process with reference to the race win rate MAP lottery table (see FIG. 35) (S397). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines the race win rate data of the “race winner” (the race winner) set in S396 based on the current set value (any one of 1 to 6). To determine. Next, the sub CPU 102 sets a lottery result (race win rate MAP) of the race win rate MAP lottery process in the “race win rate map” (S398).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 refers to the race win rate MAP data table (see FIG. 36) and acquires race win rate data corresponding to the set “race win rate map” (S399). In this process, as shown in FIG. 36, only the race winning rate data of the current set race (first race) may be determined, or the race winning rate data of the second and subsequent races may be determined. is there. Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the race win rate data acquired in S399 (S400).

  Then, after the processing of S400, the sub CPU 102 ends the race information lottery processing and also ends the initialization command reception processing (see FIG. 93). As described above, in the pachislo 1 of the present embodiment, when the initialization command is received (when the information regarding the content of the race effect is not set in the initial state), the race victory target of the race effect executed in the transition effect game The (candidate) and the winning rate are determined.

  As described above, in the race information lottery process of the present embodiment, at the start of the game period of the normal game, information on the contents of the race effect is determined from the first to fifth races (four sets from the current set). This processing is executed by the sub-control circuit 101. That is, in the present embodiment, at the start of the normal game period, the sub-control circuit 101 determines information on the effect contents of each transition effect game to be performed after the end of the normal game from the current set to four sets ahead ( (Transition effect determination means).

[Medal insertion command reception processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 95, a description will be given of the medal insertion command receiving process performed in S354 in the flowchart of the effect content determination process (see FIGS. 91 and 92).

  First, the sub CPU 102 acquires information on the number of inserted medals and the number of credits based on the reception parameters included in the received medal insertion command (S401). Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the gaming state (the gaming state managed by the main CPU 93) is the non-MB state (S402).

  In S402, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state is the non-MB state (in the case of YES determination in S402), the sub CPU 102 refers to the non-MB medium MAX bet button on / off determination table (see FIG. 61). Based on the information on the number of inserted medals and the number of credits, it is determined whether the LED provided on the MAX bet button 21 is turned on or off (S403). On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S402 that the gaming state is not the non-MB state (if S402 is NO), the sub CPU 102 refers to the MAX bet button turning on / off determination table during MB (see FIG. 62). Based on the information on the number of inserted medals and the number of credits, it is determined whether the LED provided on the MAX bet button 21 is turned on or off (S404).

  After the processing of S403 or the processing of S404, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the determination result of S403 or S404 is the lighting of the LED provided on the MAX bet button 21 (S405).

  In S405, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the determination result is the lighting of the LED (when S405 is YES), the sub CPU 102 issues a lighting request to the LED provided on the MAX bet button 21 (S406). Then, after the processing of S406, the sub CPU 102 ends the medal insertion command reception processing and ends the effect content determination processing (see FIGS. 91 and 92).

  On the other hand, in S405, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the LED is not turned on (NO in S405), the sub CPU 102 issues a light-out request to the LED provided in the MAX bet button 21 (S407). . Then, after the process of S407, the sub CPU 102 terminates the process of receiving the medal insertion command and also ends the effect content determination process (see FIGS. 91 and 92).

  By turning on / off the LED of the MAX bet button 21 in the above-described processing at the time of receiving the medal insertion command, the LED of the MAX bet button 21 is turned on in synchronization with the validity / invalidity of the player's pressing operation on the MAX bet button 21. / Can be turned off.

  As described above, in the process of receiving a medal insertion command of the present embodiment, on / off control of an LED provided on the MAX bet button 21 is performed based on information on the number of inserted medals and the number of credits (reserved number). This process is executed by the sub-control circuit 101. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 also serves as a unit (light emission control unit) that controls the turning on / off of the LED provided on the MAX bet button 21 based on the information on the number of inserted medals and the number of credits. .

[Start command reception processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 96, the process at the time of receiving the start command performed in S356 in the flowchart of the effect content determination process (see FIGS. 91 and 92) will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 102 performs a variable setting process (S411). In this process, the sub CPU 102 performs a setting process of various variables (various flags, counters, and the like) used for effect control according to the type of the sub game state. The details of the variable setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 performs a payout state update process (S412). In this process, the sub CPU 102 updates information on the game state (previous), the game state (current), and the game state (next time). Details of the payout state update processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 108 described later.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 performs a Bns (bonus) state updating process (S413). In this process, the sub CPU 102 performs a setting process of various variables (various flags, counters, and the like) used for effect control according to the type of the pseudo BB state. The details of the Bns state update processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 109 described later.

  The types of the pseudo BB state managed in the present embodiment are “at the time of winning BB”, “between BB flags”, “waiting for BB operation”, “during BB”, “during JAC”, “during ChaBB”, and “during ChaJAC”. 7 types. Note that “between BB flags” indicates a state where the pseudo BB game is being carried over, and “during JAC” indicates a state of “JACGAME guaranteed section”. Further, “during ChaBB” indicates the state of “JACIN challenge section” in “general middle BB”, and “chaJAC” indicates the state of “JACIN challenge section” in “BB during AT”.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the sub game state is a game start of “general medium” (hereinafter, referred to as “general medium_game start”) (S414).

  In S414, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub game state is “general medium_game start” (if S414 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs general medium_game start processing (S415). . Note that the details of the general medium_game start process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 117 and 118 described later. Then, after the processing of S415, the sub CPU 102 performs the processing of S426 described later.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub game state is not “general medium_game start time” in S414 (if S414 is NO), the sub CPU 102 sets the sub game state to “general medium BB”. It is determined whether it is a start time (hereinafter, referred to as “general medium BB_game start time”) (S416).

  In S416, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub game state is “at the time of general BB_game start” (when S416 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the general BB_game start process (S417). . The details of the general middle BB_game start process will be described later with reference to FIG. 120 described later. Then, after the processing of S417, the sub CPU 102 performs the processing of S426 described later.

  On the other hand, in S416, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub game state is not “general medium BB_game start time” (NO in S416), the sub CPU 102 starts the game in which the sub game state is “during race”. It is determined whether or not it is time (hereinafter, referred to as “during the race_at the start of the game”) (S418).

  In S418, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub game state is “during race_game start” (when S418 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs a race_game start process (S419). . The details of the during-game start process will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, after the processing of S419, the sub CPU 102 performs the processing of S426 described later.

  On the other hand, in S418, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub game state is not “during the race_game start” (if S418 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub game state is “AT preparation”. It is determined whether or not it is a start time (hereinafter, referred to as “AT preparations_game start”) (S420).

  In S420, when sub CPU 102 determines that the sub game state is “AT preparation_game start” (S420: YES determination), sub CPU 102 performs AT preparation_game start processing (S420). S421). Note that details of the AT preparation-in-game start process will be described later with reference to FIG. 125 described later. Then, after the processing in S421, the sub CPU 102 performs the processing in S426 described later.

  On the other hand, in S420, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub game state is not “AT preparation_game start” (NO in S420), the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub game state is “AT”. It is determined whether or not the game is to be started (hereinafter, referred to as “at the time of AT_game start”) (S422).

  In S422, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub game state is “at the time of AT_game start” (when the determination of S422 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the process at the time of AT_game start (S423). . The details of the AT-in-game start process will be described later with reference to FIG. 128 described later. After the processing of S423, the sub CPU 102 performs the processing of S426 described later.

  On the other hand, in S422, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub game state is not “at AT_at the start of game” (when S422 is NO), the sub CPU 102 sets the sub game state to “AT AT BB”. It is determined whether or not it is a start time (hereinafter, referred to as “AT during BB_game start”) (S424).

  In S424, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub game state is “at the start of BB_game during AT” (when S424 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs a process at the start of BB_AT game during AT (S425). . Note that the details of the process during BB_game start during AT will be described later with reference to FIG. 129 described later. Then, after the processing of S425, the sub CPU 102 performs the processing of S426 described later.

  On the other hand, in S424, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub game state is not “at the time of AT BB_at the start of game” (if S424 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S426 described later.

  After the processing of S415, S417, S419, S421, S423, or S425, or when the determination of S424 is NO, the sub CPU 102 performs the BB precursor counter management processing (S426). In this process, the sub CPU 102 subtracts the value of the BB sign counter indicating the number of remaining sign games until the activation of the pseudo BB game.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 performs a game state setting process (S427). In this process, the sub CPU 102 sets a game state (next time). The details of the game state setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, after the processing of S427, the sub CPU 102 ends the processing at the time of receiving the start command, and also ends the effect content determination processing (see FIGS. 91 and 92).

  Although not shown in FIG. 96, in the above-described series of repetition processing of the sub game state determination processing and the game start processing during the start command reception processing, the sub game state is actually “W chance”. And a game start process of “While a chance” and a process of determining whether the sub game state is “additional challenge” and a game start process of “additional challenge”. Be done.

[Variable setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 97 and FIG. 98, the variable setting process performed in S411 in the flowchart of the start command receiving process (see FIG. 96) will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the game state (next time) is “general” (S431).

  In S431, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (next time) is “general medium” (if S431 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs general medium_variable setting processing (S432). Details of the general medium_variable setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 99 described later. Then, after the processing of S432, the sub CPU 102 performs the processing of S441 described later.

  On the other hand, in S431, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (next time) is not “general medium” (if S431 is NO), the sub CPU 102 sets the gaming state (next time) to the pseudo BB state (“general medium”). BB ”or“ BB during AT ”) is determined (S433).

  In S433, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (next time) is during the pseudo BB (if S433 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the BB variable_variable setting process (S434). Note that details of the BB_variable setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 100 described later. Then, after the processing of S434, the sub CPU 102 performs the processing of S441 described later.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S433 that the game state (next time) is not during the pseudo BB (NO in S433), the sub CPU 102 determines whether the game state (next time) is “AT preparation”. It is determined whether or not it is (S435).

  In S435, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (next time) is “AT preparation” (if S435 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs AT preparation_variable setting processing (S436). Note that details of the AT preparation in progress_variable setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 101 described later. Then, after the processing of S436, the sub CPU 102 performs the processing of S441 described later.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S435 that the gaming state (next time) is not “AT preparation” (NO in S435), the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (next time) is “AT in progress”. It is determined whether or not this is the case (S437).

  In S437, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (next time) is “AT” (when S437 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs AT_variable setting processing (S438). The details of the AT_variable setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. After the processing of S438, the sub CPU 102 performs the processing of S441 described later.

  On the other hand, in S437, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (next time) is not “AT” (if S437 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether the gaming state (next time) is “Race”. It is determined whether or not it is (S439).

  In S439, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (next time) is not “during race” (if S439 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the processing of S441 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S439 that the gaming state (next time) is “during a race” (if S439 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs a race_variable setting process (S440). The details of the in-race_variable setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. After the processing of S440, the sub CPU 102 performs the processing of S441 described later.

  After the processing of S432, S434, S436, S438, or S440, or in the case of NO determination in S439, the sub CPU 102 terminates the game in which the gaming state (current) is “general” (hereinafter referred to as “general termination”). ) Is determined (S441).

  In S441, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (present) is “at the time of general end” (if S441 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs a general end time_variable setting process (S442). Details of the general end time_variable setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 104 described later. After the processing in S442, the sub CPU 102 performs the processing in S449 described later.

  On the other hand, in S441, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is not “at the time of general end” (if S441 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is “general medium BB”. It is determined whether or not the game has ended (hereinafter, referred to as “at the end of general BB”) (S443).

  In S443, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is “at the end of the general middle BB” (if S443 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the general middle BB end_variable setting process. (S444). The details of the general medium BB end time_variable setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 105 described later. After the processing of S444, the sub CPU 102 performs the processing of S449 described later.

  On the other hand, in S443, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is not “at the end of the general medium BB” (NO in S443), the sub CPU 102 sets the gaming state (current) to “during race”. It is determined whether or not the game has ended (hereinafter, referred to as “race end”) (S445).

  In S445, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is “at the end of the race” (if S445 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs a race end_variable setting process (S446). The details of the race end time_variable setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, after the processing of S446, the sub CPU 102 performs the processing of S449 described later.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S445 that the gaming state (current) is not “at the end of the race” (NO in S445), the sub CPU 102 sets the gaming state (current) to “AT BB”. It is determined whether or not the game has ended (hereinafter, referred to as “at the end of BB during AT”) (S447).

  In S447, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is not “at the end of the BB during AT” (if S447 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S449 described later. On the other hand, in S447, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is “at the end of the BB during AT” (if S447 is YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the BB variable at the end of the AT BB. Is performed (S448). Note that details of the AT-time BB end_variable setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 107 described later. After the process in S448, the sub CPU 102 performs a process in S449 described later.

  After the processing of S442, S444, S446, or S448, or when S447 is determined to be NO, the sub CPU 102 initializes “the number of G (game) added directly to the AT” (S449). In this process, the sub CPU 102 sets “0” to the number of additional AT games. Then, after the process of S449, the sub CPU 102 ends the variable setting process, and moves the process to S412 of the start command receiving process (see FIG. 96).

  Although not shown in FIGS. 97 and 98, in the above-described series of repetition processing of the game state (next) determination processing and the variable setting processing during the variable setting processing, the game state (next) is actually “ A determination process is performed to determine whether the state is any of "W chance" and "additional challenge", and a variable setting process in the sub game state is also performed. In the variable setting process when the gaming state (next time) is “W chance”, “5” is set as the number of times of bell navigation.

  Further, although not shown in FIGS. 97 and 98, in the above-described series of repetition processing of the game state (current) determination processing and the variable setting processing during the variable setting processing, the game state (current) is actually “ A determination process is performed to determine whether the state is any of "W chance" and "additional challenge", and a variable setting process in the sub game state is also performed. In the variable setting process when the gaming state (current) is “W chance”, “5” is set as the number of times of bell navigation.

[General middle_variable setting process]
Next, the general medium_variable setting process performed in S432 in the flowchart of the variable setting process (see FIGS. 97 and 98) will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the gaming state (current) is different from the gaming state (next time) (“general”) (S451).

  In S451, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the game state (current) is not different from the game state (next time) (NO in S451), the sub CPU 102 ends the general medium_variable setting process, and The process moves to S441 of the variable setting process (see FIGS. 97 and 98). On the other hand, in S451, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is different from the gaming state (next time) (in the case of YES determination in S451), the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is “during race”. It is determined whether or not there is (S452).

  In S452, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is not “during a race” (if S452 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the general medium_variable setting process, and proceeds to the variable setting process. It moves to S441 of (refer to FIG. 97 and FIG. 98).

  On the other hand, in S452, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is “during a race” (if S452 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines the next cycle ( The number of reduced games in the non-AT state of the next set (the next reduced number of games) is calculated (S453).

  In addition, "Oyado Point" is the total number of surplus shortened games generated by the cycle shortening lottery (which may be performed a plurality of times) performed during the normal game of the current cycle (current set), and It corresponds to the total game number of all the reduced number of reduced games generated by the pseudo BB cycle shortening lottery performed during the pseudo BB game (may be performed a plurality of times).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 sets “180” in the cycle counter (S454). Next, the sub CPU 102 subtracts the next reduced game number calculated in S453 from the value (180) of the cycle counter (S455). By this processing, the subtraction result is set as the number of staying games in the normal state in the next set. Then, after the processing of S455, the sub CPU 102 ends the general medium_variable setting processing, and moves the processing to S441 of the variable setting processing (see FIGS. 97 and 98).

  As described above, in S455 of the general medium_variable setting process of the present embodiment, the number of set games in the next set of normal games (180 games) is reduced to the number of next reduced games (the number of surplus reduced games in the current set). Is performed by the sub-control circuit 101. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 also serves as a unit (game number subtraction unit) for subtracting the surplus reduced game number from the next set of normal game set games.

[BB_variable setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 100, the BB variable setting process performed in S434 in the flowchart of the variable setting process (see FIGS. 97 and 98) will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the game state (current) is different from the game state (next time) (“General BB” or “AT BB”) (S461).

  In S461, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is not different from the gaming state (next time) (if S461 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the BB_variable setting process, and The process moves to S441 of the variable setting process (see FIGS. 97 and 98). On the other hand, in S461, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is different from the gaming state (next time) (YES in S461), the sub CPU 102 sets the value of the BB precursor counter to “0”. It is determined whether or not this is the case (S462).

  In S462, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the BB precursor counter is not “0” (NO in S462), the sub CPU 102 ends the BB variable_variable setting process, and executes the variable setting process ( It moves to S441 of FIG. 97 and FIG. 98).

  On the other hand, in S462, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the BB precursor counter is “0” (if S462 is YES), the sub CPU 102 resets the value of the BB precursor counter (to “−1”). Set) (S463). Then, after the processing of S463, the sub CPU 102 ends the BB_variable setting processing, and moves the processing to S441 of the variable setting processing (see FIGS. 97 and 98).

[AT preparation in progress_variable setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 101, the AT preparation_variable setting process performed in S436 in the variable setting process flowchart (see FIGS. 97 and 98) will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the gaming state (current) is different from the gaming state (next time) (“AT preparation”) (S471).

  In S471, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the game state (current) is not different from the game state (next time) (NO in S471), the sub CPU 102 ends the AT preparing_variable setting process, and To S441 of the variable setting process (see FIGS. 97 and 98). On the other hand, in S471, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is different from the gaming state (next time) (in the case of YES determination in S471), the sub CPU 102 sets the "race victory flag", "race runner map". , "Race win rate map" and "race consecutive loss counter" are cleared (S472).

  The “race victory flag” is a flag indicating whether or not the set “race victor” (the race victory target (candidate)) wins in the race effect. If the “race victor” wins the race, , "1" is set in the "race victory flag". The “race consecutive loss counter” is a counter that manages the number of times the set “race winner” loses continuously in the race effect (the number of consecutive AT non-wins). In the present embodiment, if the “race winner” loses the race effect ten times in a row (at the ceiling), the AT is won.

  Then, after the processing of S472, the sub CPU 102 ends the AT preparation_variable setting processing, and moves the processing to S441 of the variable setting processing (see FIGS. 97 and 98).

[AT_variable setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 102, the AT_variable setting process performed in S438 in the flowchart of the variable setting process (see FIGS. 97 and 98) will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the gaming state (current) is different from the gaming state (next time) (“AT preparation”) (S481). In S481, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is not different from the gaming state (next time) (NO in S481), the sub CPU 102 ends the AT_variable setting process, and The process moves to S441 of the variable setting process (see FIGS. 97 and 98).

  On the other hand, in S481, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is different from the gaming state (next time) (if S481 is YES), the sub CPU 102 sets “0” to the number of penalty games ( S482). Next, the sub CPU 102 sets “0” to the value of the penalty counter (S483).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 turns off the penalty flag (S484). After the process in S484, the sub CPU 102 ends the AT_variable setting process, and moves the process to S441 in the variable setting process (see FIGS. 97 and 98).

[During race_variable setting process]
Next, the in-race_variable setting process performed in S440 in the flowchart of the variable setting process (see FIGS. 97 and 98) will be described with reference to FIG.

  The sub CPU 102 sets “0” to the value of the penalty counter (S491). Then, after the process of S491, the sub CPU 102 ends the in-race_variable setting process, and shifts the process to S441 of the variable setting process (see FIGS. 97 and 98).

[General end_variable setting process]
Next, the general end time_variable setting process performed in S442 in the flowchart of the variable setting process (see FIGS. 97 and 98) will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the gaming state (current) (“at the end of general”) is different from the gaming state (next time) (S501).

  In S501, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is not different from the gaming state (next time) (if S501 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the general end time_variable setting process, and To S449 of the variable setting process (see FIGS. 97 and 98). On the other hand, in S501, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is different from the gaming state (next time) (if S501 is YES), the sub CPU 102 clears the "winning combination history" (S502). .

  The “winning winning history” is data representing the winning history of the internal winning combinations (including “losing”, “small win”, and “replay”) for five games, and is used for the cycle shortening random determination and the direct addition random determination. Can be

  Then, after the processing of S502, the sub CPU 102 ends the general end time_variable setting processing, and shifts the processing to S449 of the variable setting processing (see FIGS. 97 and 98).

[General BB end_variable setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 105, a description will be given of the general middle BB end-variable setting process performed in S444 in the flowchart of the variable setting process (see FIGS. 97 and 98).

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the gaming state (current) (“general medium BB”) is different from the gaming state (next time) (S511).

  In S511, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the game state (present) is not different from the game state (next time) (NO in S511), the sub CPU 102 ends the general middle BB end time_variable setting process. , The process proceeds to S449 of the variable setting process (see FIGS. 97 and 98). On the other hand, in S511, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is different from the gaming state (next time) (if S511 is YES), the sub CPU 102 initializes the “BB game counter” (“−”). 1 "is set) (S512). The “BB game counter” is a counter that manages the number of remaining games in a JACIN challenge section (a section in which a game of a two-choice push order for acquiring JACGAME is performed).

  Then, after the process of S512, the sub CPU 102 terminates the general medium BB end_variable setting process, and shifts the process to S449 of the variable setting process (see FIGS. 97 and 98).

[Race end_variable setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 106, the race end_variable setting process performed in S446 in the flowchart of the variable setting process (see FIGS. 97 and 98) will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the gaming state (current) (“under the race”) is different from the gaming state (next time) (S521).

  In S521, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the game state (current) is not different from the game state (next time) (if S521 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the race end_variable setting process, and To S449 of the variable setting process (see FIGS. 97 and 98). On the other hand, in S521, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is different from the gaming state (next time) (if S521 is YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the “number of race games” and the “race occurrence flag”. Then, the data of the "race flag after AT" and the "race win rate rewriting flag" are cleared (S522).

  The “number of race games” is data for managing the elapsed game number (1 to 10 games) of the race effect performed in the transition effect game, and the “race occurrence flag” indicates whether or not a race effect is to be generated. It is a flag to indicate. The "race flag after AT" is a flag indicating whether or not a race effect is generated after the AT, and the "race win rate rewriting flag" is a flag indicating whether or not the race win rate data is to be rewritten. Although a detailed description is omitted, in the present embodiment, when a “rare role” is won in a game in a normal state, an up lottery of a race winning rate is performed. Then, when the lottery of the race win rate is won, the “race win rate rewriting flag” is turned on.

  Then, after the processing in S522, the sub CPU 102 ends the race end_variable setting processing, and moves the processing to S449 of the variable setting processing (see FIGS. 97 and 98).

[At BB end during AT_variable setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 107, the AT BB end_variable setting process performed in S448 of the variable setting process flowchart (see FIGS. 97 and 98) will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the gaming state (current) ("AT BB") is different from the gaming state (next time) (S531).

  In S531, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is not different from the gaming state (next time) (NO in S531), the sub CPU 102 ends the AT BB end_variable setting process. , The process proceeds to S449 of the variable setting process (see FIGS. 97 and 98).

  On the other hand, in S531, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is different from the gaming state (next time) (if S531 is determined to be YES), the sub CPU 102 initializes the “BB game counter” (“−”). 1 "is set) (S532). Next, the sub CPU 102 sets “0” to the number of penalty games (S533).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 sets “0” to the value of the penalty counter (S534). Next, the sub CPU 102 turns off the penalty flag (S535). Then, after the processing of S535, the sub CPU 102 ends the at-BB during-AT_variable setting processing, and shifts the processing to S449 of the variable setting processing (see FIGS. 97 and 98).

[Outgoing state update processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 108, the payout state update processing performed in S412 in the flowchart of the start command reception processing (see FIG. 96) will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the gaming state (previous) is different from the gaming state (current) (S541).

  In S541, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (previous state) is not different from the gaming state (current) (when S541 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the processing of S543 described later. On the other hand, in S541, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (previous) is different from the gaming state (current) (if S541 is YES), the sub CPU 102 changes the gaming state (previous) to the gaming state (current). Is set (S542).

  After the processing of S542 or when S541 is NO, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the gaming state (current) is different from the gaming state (next time) (S543). In S543, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the game state (current) is not different from the game state (next time) (if S543 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the payout state update processing and starts the processing. The process moves to S413 of the command reception process (see FIG. 96).

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S543 that the gaming state (current) is different from the gaming state (next time) (if S543 is YES), the sub CPU 102 changes the gaming state (current) to the gaming state (next). Is set (S544). Then, after the processing of S544, the sub CPU 102 ends the payout state update processing, and moves the processing to S413 of the start command reception processing (see FIG. 96).

[Bns state setting processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 109, the Bns state setting processing performed in S413 in the flowchart of the start command reception processing (see FIG. 96) will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the pseudo BB state is “at the time of BB winning” (S551).

  In S551, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the pseudo BB state is “at the time of winning BB” (if S551 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs a BB winning time_Bns state setting process (S552). The details of the BB winning time_Bns state setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, after the processing of S552, the sub CPU 102 ends the Bns state setting processing, and moves the processing to S414 of the start command reception processing (see FIG. 96).

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S551 that the pseudo BB state is not “at the time of winning BB” (NO in S551), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the pseudo BB state is “between BB flags”. Is determined (S553).

  In S553, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the pseudo BB state is “between BB flags” (if S553 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs a BB flag between_Bns state setting process (S554). Details of the BB flag interval_Bns state setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, after the processing of S554, the sub CPU 102 ends the Bns state setting processing, and moves the processing to S414 of the start command receiving processing (see FIG. 96).

  On the other hand, in S553, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the pseudo BB state is not “between BB flags” (if S553 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether the pseudo BB state is “waiting for BB operation”. Is determined (S555).

  In S555, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the pseudo BB state is “BB operation waiting” (if S555 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs BB operation waiting_Bns state setting processing (S556). The details of the BB operation wait_Bns state setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 112 described later. Then, after the processing of S556, the sub CPU 102 ends the Bns state setting processing, and moves the processing to S414 of the start command receiving processing (see FIG. 96).

  On the other hand, in S555, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the pseudo BB state is not “waiting for BB operation” (NO in S555), the sub CPU 102 determines whether the pseudo BB state is “BB in progress”. It is determined (S557).

  In S557, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the pseudo BB state is “BB in progress” (if S557 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs BB in_Bns state setting processing (S558). The details of the BB-in-Bns state setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 113 described later. Then, after the processing of S558, the sub CPU 102 ends the Bns state setting processing, and moves the processing to S414 of the start command receiving processing (see FIG. 96).

  On the other hand, in S557, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the pseudo BB state is not “BB in progress” (if S557 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether the pseudo BB state is “in JAC”. (S559).

  When the sub CPU 102 determines that the pseudo BB state is “in JAC” in S559 (if S559 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the JAC in_Bns state setting process (S560). The details of the JAC-in-Bns state setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 114 described later. Then, after the processing of S560, the sub CPU 102 ends the Bns state setting processing, and shifts the processing to S414 of the start command receiving processing (see FIG. 96).

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S559 that the pseudo BB state is not “JAC” (NO in S559), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the pseudo BB state is “ChaBB”. (S561).

  In S561, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the pseudo BB state is “ChaBB in progress” (if S561 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the ChaBB in-Bns state setting process (S562). The details of the ChaBB-in-Bns state setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 115 described later. Then, after the processing of S562, the sub CPU 102 ends the Bns state setting processing, and shifts the processing to S414 of the start command receiving processing (see FIG. 96).

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S561 that the pseudo BB state is not “ChaBB” (NO in S561), the sub CPU 102 determines whether the pseudo BB state is “ChaJAC”. (S563).

  In S563, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the pseudo BB state is “ChaJAC in progress” (if S563 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs ChaJAC in_Bns state setting processing (S564). Note that the details of the ChaJAC-in-Bns state setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 116 described later. Then, after the processing of S564, the sub CPU 102 ends the Bns state setting processing, and moves the processing to S414 of the processing at the time of receiving the start command (see FIG. 96).

  On the other hand, in S563, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the pseudo BB state is not “ChaJAC” (NO in S563), the sub CPU 102 ends the Bns state setting processing and proceeds to the start command reception processing. The process moves to S414 (see FIG. 96).

[BB Winning_Bns Status Setting Process]
Next, the BB winning time_Bns state setting processing performed in S552 in the flowchart of the Bns state setting processing (see FIG. 109) will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 102 changes the pseudo BB state to “between BB flags” (S571). Next, the sub CPU 102 performs a BB flag interval_Bns state setting process (S572). Details of the BB flag interval_Bns state setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, after the processing of S572, the sub CPU 102 ends the BB winning time_Bns state setting processing and also ends the Bns state setting processing (see FIG. 109).

[BB flag interval_Bns state setting processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 111, S554 in the flowchart of the Bns state setting process (see FIG. 109) or BB flag interval_Bns performed in S572 in the flowchart of the BB winning time_Bns state setting process (see FIG. 110) The state setting process will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the gaming state (current) is “General BB” or “AT BB” (S581).

  In S581, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the game state (current) is not “general BB” or “AT BB” (if S581 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S583 described later. On the other hand, in S581, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is “General BB” or “AT BB” (if S581 is YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the pseudo BB state to “ BB operation waiting "(S582).

  After the processing of S582 or when the determination of S581 is NO, the sub CPU 102 performs the BB operation waiting_Bns state setting processing (S583). The details of the BB operation wait_Bns state setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 112 described later. Then, after the processing of S583, the sub CPU 102 ends the BB flag interval_Bns state setting processing, and also ends the Bns state setting processing (see FIG. 109) or the BB winning time_Bns state setting processing (see FIG. 110).

[BB operation wait_Bns state setting processing]
Next, referring to FIG. 112, S556 in the flowchart of the Bns state setting process (see FIG. 109) or BB operation waiting_Bns performed in S583 in the flowchart of the BB flag_Bns state setting process (see FIG. 111) The state setting process will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether the “BB rush flag” is on (S591). Note that the “BB entry flag” is a flag indicating whether or not the pseudo BB state shifts from “waiting for BB operation” to “during BB”. If the pseudo BB state is on, the pseudo BB state is “ "BB in progress", and a pseudo BB game is started.

  In S591, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the BB entry flag is not in the ON state (if S591 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the BB operation wait_Bns state setting processing and the Bns state setting processing (FIG. 109). BB flag _Bns state setting processing (see FIG. 111).

  On the other hand, in S591, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the BB rush flag is on (if S591 is YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the BB rush flag to off (S592). Next, the sub CPU 102 changes the pseudo BB state to “during BB” (S593).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the initial value “2” to “BB guaranteed JAC number” (S594). The “BB guaranteed JAC number” is the number of successful JACINs (the number of JACGAME executions) guaranteed in the JACGAME guaranteed section. In the present embodiment, two JACGAMEs are guaranteed in the JACGAME guaranteed section.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the value of the BB game counter to the initial value “10” (S595).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 sets an initial value “5” to the value of “the number of times of JAC bell navigation” (S596). In the present embodiment, one JACGAME game period is managed by the number of navigating times (number of times of bell navigating) of the small role related to the “push order bell” (CT bell) in which ten medals are paid out, and is five times. When the number of times of bell navigation ends, one game period of JACGAME ends. The “number of times of JAC bell navigation” indicates the remaining number of times of bell navigation in JACGAME.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 turns off the “penalty flag” (S597). The “penalty flag” is a flag indicating whether or not a penalty has occurred. Then, after the processing of S597, the sub CPU 102 ends the BB operation wait_Bns state setting processing, and also ends the Bns state setting processing (see FIG. 109) or the BB flag interval_Bns state setting processing (see FIG. 111).

[BB_Bns state setting processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 113, the BB_Bns state setting processing performed in S558 in the flowchart of the Bns state setting processing (see FIG. 109) will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the “BARJAC rush flag” is on (S601). The “BARJAC entry flag” is a flag indicating whether or not the transition to the “JAC” state of the pseudo BB state has been determined. A predetermined symbol combination (“black BAR”-“black BAR”-“black BAR” or “black cherry”-“black BAR”-“black BAR”) is an effective line for the “BARJAC entry flag”. It is turned on when a stop is displayed above.

  In step S601, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the BARJAC entry flag is not in the ON state (NO in step S601), the sub CPU 102 ends the BB_Bns state setting process and performs the Bns state setting process (see FIG. 109). ) Also ends.

  On the other hand, in S601, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the BARJAC entry flag is in the ON state (if S601 is YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the BARJAC entry flag to the OFF state (S602). Next, the sub CPU 102 changes the pseudo BB state to “during JAC” (S603).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the BB guaranteed JAC number is larger than “0” (S604). When the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of BB guaranteed JACs is not larger than “0” in S604 (NO in S604), the sub CPU 102 terminates the BB-in-Bns state setting process and executes the Bns state setting process. (See FIG. 109) is also terminated.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S604 that the number of BB guaranteed JACs is larger than “0” (if S604 is YES), the sub CPU 102 subtracts “1” from the number of BB guaranteed JACs (S605). Then, after the processing in S605, the sub CPU 102 ends the BB_Bns state setting processing and also ends the Bns state setting processing (see FIG. 109).

[JAC-in-Bns state setting processing]
Next, the JAC-in-Bns state setting processing performed in S560 in the flowchart of the Bns state setting processing (see FIG. 109) will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the number of times of JAC bell navigation is “0” (S611). In S611, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of times of JAC bell navigation is not “0” (NO in S611), the sub CPU 102 terminates the JAC_Bns state setting processing and the Bns state setting processing (FIG. 109). See also).

  On the other hand, in S611, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of times of JAC bell navigation is “0” (if S611 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines whether the BB guaranteed JAC number is larger than “0”. (S612).

  In S612, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of BB guaranteed JACs is not larger than “0” (when S612 is NO), the sub CPU 102 changes the pseudo BB state to “ChaBB in progress” (S613). On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S612 that the BB guaranteed JAC number is larger than “0” (YES in S612), the sub CPU 102 changes the pseudo BB state to “BB in progress” (S614). .

  After the processing of S613 or S614, the sub CPU 102 sets the value of the number of times of JAC bell navigation to an initial value “5” (S615). Then, after the processing of S615, the sub CPU 102 ends the JAC_Bns state setting processing and also ends the Bns state setting processing (see FIG. 109).

[During ChaBB_Bns state setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 115, the ChaBB_Bns state setting processing performed in S562 in the flowchart of the Bns state setting processing (see FIG. 109) will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the BB game counter is less than “0” (S621).

  When the sub CPU 102 determines in S621 that the BB game counter is not less than “0” (NO in S621), the sub CPU 102 performs the processing of S623 described later. On the other hand, in S621, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the BB game counter is smaller than “0” (if S621 is YES), the sub CPU 102 changes the pseudo BB state to “None” (S622). In this process, the data indicating the pseudo BB state is reset, and the sub game state returns from the pseudo BB state to the normal state.

  After the processing of S622 or when the determination of S621 is NO, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the BARJAC entry flag is on (S623). When the sub CPU 102 determines in S623 that the BARJAC entry flag is not in the ON state (NO in S623), the sub CPU 102 terminates the ChaBB_Bns state setting processing and sets the Bns state setting processing (see FIG. 109). ) Also ends.

  On the other hand, in S623, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the BARJAC entry flag is in the ON state (if S623 is YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the BARJAC entry flag to the OFF state (S624). Next, the sub CPU 102 changes the pseudo BB state to “cha JAC” (S625).

  After the processing of S625, the sub CPU 102 ends the ChaBB_Bns state setting processing and also ends the Bns state setting processing (see FIG. 109).

[During ChaJAC_Bns state setting processing]
Next, the ChaJAC-in-Bns status setting process performed in S564 in the flowchart of the Bns status setting process (see FIG. 109) will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the number of times of JAC bell navigation is “0” (S631). When the sub CPU 102 determines in S631 that the number of times of JAC bell navigation is not “0” (NO in S631), the sub CPU 102 ends the ChaJAC_Bns state setting processing and the Bns state setting processing (FIG. 109). See also).

  On the other hand, in S631, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of JAC bell navigations is “0” (if S631 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines whether the value of the BB game counter is greater than “0”. It is determined (S632).

  In S632, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the BB game counter is not larger than “0” (if S632 is NO), the sub CPU 102 changes the pseudo BB state to “None” (S633). In this process, the data indicating the pseudo BB state is reset, and the sub game state returns from the pseudo BB state to the AT state. On the other hand, in S632, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the BB game counter is larger than “0” (if S632 is YES), the sub CPU 102 changes the pseudo BB state to “ChaBB in progress” (S634). ).

  After the processing of S633 or S634, the sub CPU 102 sets the value of the number of times of JAC bell navigation to an initial value “5” (S635). Then, after the processing of S635, the sub CPU 102 ends the ChaJAC-in-Bns state setting processing and also ends the Bns state setting processing (see FIG. 109).

[General middle_game start process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 117 and FIG. 118, the general middle_game start processing performed in S415 in the flowchart of the start command reception processing (see FIG. 96) will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the cycle counter is greater than “0” (S641).

  In S641, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the cycle counter is not larger than “0” (NO in S641), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S643 described later. On the other hand, in S641, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the cycle counter is larger than “0” (if S641 is YES), the sub CPU 102 subtracts “1” from the value of the cycle counter (S642).

  After the processing of S642 or when the determination of S641 is NO, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the race information MAP data is “0” (S643). In the present embodiment, as described above, five race information MAP data ("1" to "10") up to four races ahead (first to fifth races) are stored at the start of the normal game setting. Each time a race effect ends, the race information MAP data of the end race is erased, and one race information MAP data of the next and subsequent sets is stored in the storage area on the head side. It is shifted and stored. At this time, “0” is stored as race information MAP data in the last storage area that is empty. Therefore, in the process of S643, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the race information data of the storage area to be referred to is empty.

  When the sub CPU 102 determines in S643 that the race information MAP data is “0” (YES in S643), the sub CPU 102 performs the race information lottery process described in FIG. 94 (S644). In other words, when the information regarding the contents of the race effect of the current set (the type of the ally character to be the race victory target (candidate), the race winning rate data of the ally character) is not set, the game of the normal game of the current set is set. At the start of the period, information on the contents of the race effect is determined by lottery. At this time, information on the contents of the race effects from the current set to four sets ahead (first to fifth races) is determined. Then, after the processing of S644, the sub CPU 102 performs the processing of S659 described later.

  On the other hand, in S643, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the race information MAP data is not “0” (if S643 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the gaming state (previous) is “in a race”. Is determined (S645). In S645, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (previous time) is not “in a race” (if S645 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the processing of S659 described later.

  On the other hand, in S645, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (previous) is “in a race” (if S645 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines that the re-lottery condition of the race runner MAP is satisfied. It is determined whether or not there is (S646). In the present embodiment, the re-lottery condition of the race runner MAP is a case where the number of consecutive defeats in the race (the value of the race consecutive defeat counter) is “5”.

  In S646, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the re-lottery condition of the race runner MAP is not satisfied (NO in S646), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S649 described later.

  On the other hand, in S646, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the re-lottery condition of the race runner MAP is satisfied (if S646 is YES), the sub CPU 102 executes the race runner MAP lottery table (see FIG. 32). , A race runner MAP lottery process is performed (S647). Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the value (race information MAP number) of the lottery result of the race runner MAP lottery process to “race runner MAP” (S648).

  After the processing of S648 or when the determination of S646 is NO, the sub CPU 102 refers to the race information MAP data table (see FIG. 33), and based on the value (race information MAP number) of the "race runner MAP", The type (target tables A to J) of the winning target lottery table (see FIG. 34) corresponding to the MAP data is determined (S649). In this process, based on the value of the set race runner MAP (race information MAP), the “target table” (target table) corresponding to the race information MAP data of up to four races (first to fifth races) A to J) are determined. Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the “target table” for the determined first to fifth races (S650).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 performs a lottery process of race victory targets (candidates) of the first to fifth races based on the “target table” of the first to fifth races set in S650 (step S650). S651). Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the lottery result of the victory target player lottery process to “race winner” (S652). By this processing, the race winners of the first to fifth races (any one of “male A”, “male B”, “female A”, “tengu”, “kappa”, and “male A / male B”) Is set to "Race Winner".

  Next, the sub CPU 102 checks the race winning rate data of the current set (S653).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the “race information data” is “0” (S654). The “race information data” is race win rate data, and in the processing of S654, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the current set race win rate data is set.

  In S654, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the race information data is not “0” (NO in S654), the sub CPU 102 performs the processing of S659 described later.

  On the other hand, in S654, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the race information data is “0” (if S654 is YES), the sub CPU 102 refers to the race win rate MAP lottery table (see FIG. 35) and performs the race. A winning percentage MAP lottery process is performed (S655). In this processing, the sub CPU 102 determines the race win rate data of the “race winner” (the race winner) set in S652 based on the current set value (any of 1 to 6). To determine.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the lottery result (race win rate MAP) of the race win rate MAP lottery process in the “race win rate map” (S656).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 refers to the race win ratio MAP data table (see FIG. 36) and acquires race win ratio data corresponding to the set “race win ratio map” (S657). In this process, as shown in FIG. 36, only the race winning rate data of the current set race (first race) may be determined, or the race winning rate data of the second and subsequent races may be determined. is there. Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the race win rate data acquired in S657 (S658).

  After the process of S644 or S658, or when the determination of S645 or S654 is NO, the sub CPU 102 performs a pseudo BB lottery process (S659). The details of the pseudo BB lottery process will be described later with reference to FIG. 119 described later.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the number of penalty games is “0” (S660). When the sub CPU 102 determines in S660 that the number of penalty games is not “0” (NO in S660), the sub CPU 102 terminates the general medium_game start process and executes the start command process. The process moves to S426 of (see FIG. 96). In other words, when the current game is in a penalty, the period shortening-related processing in S661 described below is not performed, and the benefit of reducing the number of games in the normal game cannot be obtained.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S660 that the number of penalty games is “0” (if S660 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs a cycle shortening related process (S661). In this process, the sub CPU 102 refers to the cycle shortened lottery table (see FIGS. 44 and 45) and performs the cycle shortened lottery based on the data of the “winning combination history”.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the cycle counter is “10” or more and the “race occurrence flag” is in an off state (S662).

  In S662, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the determination condition of S662 is not satisfied (if S662 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines that the “stay hotel point” is in the lottery result of the cycle shortening lottery determined in S661. The number of corresponding shortened games is added (S663).

  After the processing of S663, the sub CPU 102 performs a race victory expectation data up lottery with reference to a race victory expectation lottery table (not shown) (S664). Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the lottery result of the race win expectation data up lottery to the race win rate data (S665). Then, after the processing of S665, the sub-CPU 102 ends the general medium_game start processing, and shifts the processing to S426 of the start command reception processing (see FIG. 96).

  On the other hand, in S662, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the determination condition of S662 is satisfied (YES in S662), the sub CPU 102 determines the lottery result (the shortened lottery) of the cycle shortened lottery determined in S661 from the value of the cycle counter. (The number of games) is subtracted, and the calculation result is set to the value of the cycle counter. Then, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the cycle counter after the subtraction is less than “10” (S666).

  In S666, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the cycle counter after the subtraction is not less than “10” (if S666 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the general medium_game start process and executes the process. The process moves to S426 of the start command receiving process (see FIG. 96).

  On the other hand, in S666, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the cycle counter after the subtraction is less than “10” (in the case of YES determination in S666), the sub CPU 102 Is added to the “hotel” point (S667). Next, the sub CPU 102 sets “10” to the value of the cycle counter (S668). Then, after the processing of S668, the sub CPU 102 ends the general medium_game start processing, and shifts the processing to S426 of the start command reception processing (see FIG. 96).

  As described above, in S661 of the general medium_game start process of the present embodiment, a short lottery of the game period of the normal game is performed, and this process is executed by the sub control circuit 101. That is, in the present embodiment, in the normal game, the sub control circuit 101 also serves as a means for determining the subtraction number of the current remaining unit game number of the normal game (normal game shortening means, first normal game shortening means). In S667 of the general medium_game start process, if the value obtained by subtracting the reduced game number determined by the cycle reduction lottery of the regular game from the remaining unit game number of the regular game is less than 10 games, the subtraction result is obtained. Is stocked as the number of surplus shortened games. That is, in the present embodiment, when the subtraction result is less than 10 games, the sub-control circuit 101 also serves as a means for stocking the subtraction result as a surplus reduced game number (excess game number stock means).

[Pseudo BB lottery process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 119, a description will be given of the pseudo BB random determination process performed in S659 in the flowchart of the general medium_game start process (see FIGS. 117 and 118).

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the BB precursor counter is equal to or greater than “0” (S671). In S671, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the BB precursor counter is equal to or more than “0” (if S671 is determined to be YES), the sub CPU 102 ends the pseudo BB lottery process, and proceeds to the general middle game. The process moves to S660 of the start-time process (see FIGS. 117 and 118).

  On the other hand, in S671, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the BB precursor counter is not equal to or more than “0” (if S671 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether the gaming state (current) is “general”. It is determined whether or not it is (S672).

  In S672, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (present) is not “general” (NO in S672), the sub CPU 102 performs a pseudo BB lottery (during AT / AT preparation / during race) table. With reference to FIG. 42, a pseudo BB lottery process is performed based on the internal winning combination (S673). On the other hand, in S672, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is “general medium” (if S672 is YES), the sub CPU 102 executes the pseudo BB lottery (general medium) table (see FIG. 41). ), A pseudo BB lottery process is performed based on the internal winning combination (S674).

  After the processing of S673 or S674, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the pseudo BB lottery has been won (S675). In S675, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the pseudo BB lottery has not been won (NO in S675), the sub CPU 102 ends the pseudo BB lottery process, and proceeds to the general middle_game start process (FIG. 117). And S660 of FIG. 118).

  On the other hand, if the sub CPU 102 determines that the pseudo BB lottery has been won in S675 (if S675 is YES), the sub CPU 102 sets “BB winning” in the pseudo BB state (S676). Next, the sub CPU 102 performs a pseudo BB precursor lottery process based on the internal winning combination with reference to the pseudo BB precursor lottery table (see FIG. 43) (S677).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the lottery result of the pseudo BB precursor lottery (the number of precursor games of the pseudo BB game) in the BB precursor counter (S678). Then, after the processing of S678, the sub CPU 102 ends the pseudo BB lottery processing, and moves the processing to S660 of the general medium_game start processing (see FIGS. 117 and 118).

  Note that, as described above, the pseudo BB lottery process of the present embodiment is executed by the sub control circuit 101. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 also functions as a means for determining the execution of the pseudo BB game (special game determination means). Further, the pseudo BB lottery (general medium) process in S674 performed at the start of the game is executed by the sub control circuit 101. That is, when the game state (present) is “general”, the sub-control circuit 101 determines whether or not to execute the pseudo BB game (special game) at the start of the game (at the time of detecting the start operation). 1 special game determination means).

[General Medium BB_ Game Start Process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 120, the general middle BB_game start processing performed in S417 in the flowchart of the start command reception processing (see FIG. 96) will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the number of penalty games is “0” (S681).

  In S681, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of penalty games is not “0” (if S681 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the processing of S683 described later. That is, when the current game is being penalized, the BB rush determination process (at the start of the game) of S682 described later is not performed. In this case, since the process of turning on the BB entry check flag (the process of shifting to the pseudo BB game) is not performed, a state occurs in which the pseudo BB game is not started.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S681 that the number of penalty games is “0” (if S681 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs BB rush determination processing (at the start of a game) (S682). In this process, the sub CPU 102 manages ON / OFF of a “BB entry check flag” provided for checking occurrence of “missing command”. The details of the BB entry determination process (at the start of the game) will be described later with reference to FIG. 121 described later.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 performs BBJAC transition determination processing (at the start of the game) (S683). In this process, the sub CPU 102 manages ON / OFF of a “BARJAC entry check flag” provided for checking occurrence of “missing command”. The details of the BBJAC transition determination process (at the start of the game) will be described later with reference to FIG. 122 described later.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 performs a BB counter management process (S684). The details of the BB counter management process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the race occurrence flag is on (S685).

  In S685, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the race occurrence flag is on (in the case of YES determination in S685), the sub CPU 102 refers to a not-shown winning after-race winning lottery table (not shown) and increases the after-race winning winning lottery. The processing is performed (S686). Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the lottery result of the winning percentage increase lottery processing after the race winning in the race winning percentage data (S687). Then, after the processing of S687, the sub CPU 102 performs the processing of S695 described later.

  On the other hand, in S685, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the race occurrence flag is not in the ON state (when S685 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the cycle counter is “1” or more. (S688). In step S688, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the cycle counter is not equal to or greater than “1” (when S688 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S695 described later.

  On the other hand, in S688, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the cycle counter is “1” or more (when S688 is YES), the sub CPU 102 refers to the pseudo BB cycle shortening lottery table (see FIG. 46). Then, a pseudo BB cycle shortening lottery process is performed based on the "winning winning combination history" (S689). Next, the sub CPU 102 subtracts the number of shortened games determined in the pseudo BB cycle shortening lottery process from the current value of the cycle counter, and sets the calculation result in the cycle counter (S690).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the cycle counter after the calculation processing in S690 is “0” or less (S691). In step S691, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the cycle counter is not equal to or less than “0” (if S691 is determined to be NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S695 described later.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S691 that the value of the cycle counter is equal to or less than “0” (if S691 is determined to be YES), the sub CPU 102 turns on the race occurrence flag (S692). By this processing, after the pseudo BB game ends, the race effect of the transition effect game is started.

  Next, the surplus reduced number of games (the absolute value of the calculation result) corresponding to the value of the calculation result in S690 is added to the “stay point” (S693). Next, the sub CPU 102 sets “0” to the value of the cycle counter (S694). After the processing of S694, the sub CPU 102 performs the processing of S695 described later.

  After the processing of S687 or S694, or when the determination of S688 or S691 is NO, the sub CPU 102 refers to a push order navigation lottery table (not shown) and performs the push order navigation lottery process of the small combination related to “push order bell”. (S695). Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the lottery result of the push order navigation lottery process to “push order navigation number” (S696). Then, after the processing of S696, the sub CPU 102 ends the general middle BB_game start processing, and moves the processing to S426 of the start command reception processing (see FIG. 96).

  As described above, in S689 of the general middle BB_game start process of the present embodiment, a short lottery of the game period of the normal game (pseudo BB cycle short lottery) is performed, and this process is executed by the sub control circuit 101. Is done. That is, in the present embodiment, in the pseudo BB game, the sub-control circuit 101 also serves as a means (a second normal game shortening means) for determining the subtraction number of the current remaining unit game number of the normal game.

[BB entry determination process (at the start of the game)]
Next, with reference to FIG. 121, the BB entry determination process (at the start of the game) performed in S682 in the flowchart of the general middle BB_game start process (see FIG. 120) will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the BB rush check flag is on (S701).

  In step S701, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the BB entry check flag is not in the ON state (if S701 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S703 described later. On the other hand, in S701, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the BB entry check flag is in the ON state (if S701 is YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the penalty flag to the ON state (S702).

  After the processing of S702 or when the determination of S701 is NO, the sub CPU 102 turns off the BB rush check flag (S703). Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the gaming state (current) is “during a race” (S704).

  In S704, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is not “running” (if S704 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the pseudo BB state is “waiting for BB operation”. It is determined (S705). In S705, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the pseudo BB state is not “waiting for BB operation” (NO in S705), the sub CPU 102 ends the BB rush determination process (at the start of the game), and proceeds to the general process. The process moves to S683 of the middle BB_game start process (see FIG. 120).

  On the other hand, in S705, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the pseudo BB state is “BB operation waiting” (in the case of YES determination in S705), the sub CPU 102 sets the internal winning combination to “normal lip 1” to “normal lip 1”. 8 ”is determined (S706).

  In S706, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the internal winning combination is not one of “Normal Lip 1” to “Normal Lip 8” (NO in S706), the sub CPU 102 performs BB rush determination processing (game start). ) Is ended, and the process moves to S683 of the general middle BB_game start process (see FIG. 120). On the other hand, in step S706, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the internal winning combination is any of “normal lip 1” to “normal lip 8” (if S706 is YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the BB entry check flag. Is turned on (S707). Then, after the processing of S707, the sub CPU 102 ends the BB rush determination processing (at the start of the game), and shifts the processing to S683 of the general BB_game start-time processing (see FIG. 120).

  Here, returning to the processing of S704 again, in S704, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub game state is “during a race” (when S704 is YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the pseudo BB state to “ It is determined whether or not “between BB flags” (S708). In S708, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the pseudo BB state is not “between the BB flags” (NO in S708), the sub CPU 102 ends the BB entry determination process (at the start of the game), and The process moves to S683 of the middle BB_game start process (see FIG. 120).

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the pseudo BB state is “between BB flags” in S708 (if S708 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines that the internal winning combination is “normal lip 2” or “normal lip 2”. It is determined whether it is "4" (S709).

  In S709, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the internal winning combination is not “Normal Lip 2” or “Normal Lip 4” (NO in S709), the sub CPU 102 performs the BB rush determination process (at the start of the game). The process is ended, and the process moves to S683 of the general middle BB_game start process (see FIG. 120). On the other hand, in S709, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the internal winning combination is “Normal Lip 2” or “Normal Lip 4” (if S709 is YES), the sub CPU 102 turns on the BB rush check flag. (S710). Then, after the process of S710, the sub CPU 102 ends the BB rush determination process (at the start of the game), and shifts the process to S683 of the general middle BB_game start process (see FIG. 120).

[BBJAC shift determination process (at the start of the game)]
Next, with reference to FIG. 122, the BBJAC transition determination process (at the start of a game) performed in S683 in the flowchart of the general middle BB_game start process (see FIG. 120) will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the BARJAC rush check flag is on (S721). In S721, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the BARJAC entry check flag is not in the ON state (if S721 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S725 described later.

  On the other hand, in S721, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the BARJAC entry check flag is in the ON state (if S721 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the pseudo BB state is “BB in progress”. (S722). In S722, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the pseudo BB state is not “BB in progress” (NO in S722), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S725 described later.

  On the other hand, in S722, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the pseudo BB state is “BB in progress” (if S722 is YES), the sub CPU 102 turns on the BARJAC entry flag (S723). Next, the sub CPU 102 performs the BB_Bns state setting process described in FIG. 113 (S724). Then, after the processing in S724, the sub CPU 102 performs the processing in S725 described later.

  After the processing of S724, or when the determination of S721 or S722 is NO, the sub CPU 102 turns off the BARJAC entry check flag (S725).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether the pseudo BB state is “during BB” or “during ChaBB” (S726). In S726, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the pseudo BB state is not “BB” or “ChaBB” (NO in S726), the sub CPU 102 ends the BBJAC shift determination process (at the start of the game). The process is shifted to S684 of the general middle BB_game start process (see FIG. 120).

  On the other hand, in S726, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the pseudo BB state is “BB in progress” or “ChaBB in progress” (if S726 is YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the internal winning combination to “Normal Lip 1”. It is determined whether or not any one of “normal lip 8” and “bell lip 1” to “bell lip 4” (S727).

  In S727, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the internal winning combination is not one of “Normal lip 1” to “Normal lip 8” and “Ber lip 1” to “Ber lip 4” (if S727 is NO), the sub CPU 102 The CPU 102 ends the BBJAC transition determination process (at the start of the game), and shifts the process to S684 of the general BB_game start process (see FIG. 120). On the other hand, in step S727, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the internal winning combination is one of “normal lip 1” to “normal lip 8” and “bell lip 1” to “bell lip 4” (if S727 is YES, ), The sub CPU 102 turns on the BARJAC entry check flag (S728). Then, after the processing of S728, the sub CPU 102 ends the BBJAC shift determination processing (at the time of starting the game), and moves the processing to S684 of the general BB_game starting processing (see FIG. 120).

[BB counter management processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 123, the BB counter management process performed in S684 in the flowchart of the general middle BB_game start process (see FIG. 120) will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the pseudo BB state is “ChaBB in progress” (S731). In S731, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the pseudo BB state is not “ChaBB” (NO in S731), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S734 described later.

  On the other hand, in S731, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the pseudo BB state is “ChaBB in progress” (if S731 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines whether the value of the BB game counter is greater than “0”. Is determined (S732).

  When the sub CPU 102 determines in S732 that the value of the BB game counter is not larger than “0” (NO in S732), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S734 described later. On the other hand, in S732, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the BB game counter is larger than “0” (if S732 is YES), the sub CPU 102 subtracts “1” from the value of the BB game counter (S733). ). Then, after the processing of S733, the sub CPU 102 performs the processing of S734 described later.

  After the processing of S733, or when S731 or S732 is NO, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the pseudo BB state is “during JAC” or “during ChaJAC” (S734).

  In S734, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the pseudo BB state is not “JAC” or “ChaJAC” (NO in S734), the sub CPU 102 ends the BB counter management process, and the process is in general. It moves to S685 of the process at the time of BB_game start (see FIG. 120). On the other hand, in S734, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the pseudo BB state is “JAC” or “ChaJAC” (YES in S734), the sub CPU 102 sets the internal winning combination to “push order bell”. (CT bell: one of the winning numbers “17” to “48”) is determined (S735).

  In S735, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the internal winning combination is not “push order bell” (if S735 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the BB counter management processing and starts the general processing BB_game. The process moves to S685 of the process (see FIG. 120). On the other hand, in S735, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the internal winning combination is “push order bell” (if S735 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines whether the number of JAC bell navigation times is greater than “0”. It is determined (S736).

  When the sub CPU 102 determines in S736 that the number of times of JAC bell navigation is not larger than “0” (NO in S736), the sub CPU 102 ends the BB counter management process, and starts the general BB_game. The process moves to S685 of the process (see FIG. 120).

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S736 that the number of times of JAC bell navigation is greater than “0” (if S736 is YES), the sub CPU 102 subtracts “1” from the number of times of JAC bell navigation (S737). Then, after the processing of S737, the sub CPU 102 ends the BB counter management processing, and moves the processing to S685 of the general BB_game start processing (see FIG. 120).

[Processing during race_game start]
Next, with reference to FIG. 124, the during-race_game start process performed in S419 in the flowchart of the start command reception process (see FIG. 96) will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the number of penalty games is “0” (S741).

  When the sub CPU 102 determines in S741 that the number of penalty games is not “0” (NO in S741), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S743 described later. That is, when the current game is being penalized, the BB rush determination process (at the start of the game) of S742 described later is not performed. In this case, since the process of turning on the BB entry check flag (the process of shifting to the pseudo BB game) is not performed, a state occurs in which the pseudo BB game is not started.

  On the other hand, in S741, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of penalty games is “0” (if S741 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the BB rush determination process (at the start of the game) described with reference to FIG. 121. Perform (S742).

  After the processing of S742 or when the determination of S741 is NO, the sub CPU 102 adds “1” to the number of racing games (S743).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the number of racing games is “1” (S744). When the sub CPU 102 determines in S744 that the number of racing games is not “1” (NO in S744), the sub CPU 102 performs the processing of S749 described below.

  On the other hand, in S744, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of race games is “1” (if S744 is YES), the sub CPU 102 is set with reference to the race result lottery table (see FIG. 38). A race result lottery process is performed based on the current race winning percentage data (S745). In this process, the result of the race effect performed in the transition effect game (winning / non-winning) is determined. That is, in the present embodiment, the race result (AT game winning / non-winning) is determined by lottery in the first game (start game) of the race effect.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not a race victory has been won by the race result lottery (whether or not an AT has been won), or whether or not the value of a race consecutive loss counter (continuous non-execution number counting means) is “9” or more. It is determined whether or not to determine (S746).

  When the sub CPU 102 determines in S746 that the determination condition of S746 is satisfied (YES in S746), the sub CPU 102 sets the race victory flag to the ON state (S747). After the processing of S747, the sub CPU 102 performs the processing of S749 described later.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S746 that the determination condition of S746 is not satisfied (NO in S746), the sub CPU 102 adds “1” to the value of the consecutive race loss counter (S748). Then, after the processing of S748, the sub CPU 102 performs the processing of S749 described later.

  In the present embodiment, a case is won in which a race win rate data rewriting lottery (S945 in FIG. 137) described later is won and the race win rate is rewritten to 0% (when a penalty process based on a penalty counter is performed). In the processing of S748, the addition processing of the race consecutive loss counter (ceiling counter) is not performed. In this case, the ceiling cycle number of the normal game in which the AT winning is determined is substantially extended.

  After the processing of S747 or S748, or when the determination of S744 is NO, the sub CPU 102 performs the pseudo BB lottery processing described in FIG. 119 (S749). Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the pseudo BB state is “at the time of BB winning” (S750).

  In S750, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the pseudo BB state is not “at the time of winning BB” (NO in S750), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S752 described later. On the other hand, in S750, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the pseudo BB state is “at the time of winning BB” (if S750 is YES), the sub CPU 102 turns on the race victory flag (S751).

  After the processing in S751 or when the determination in S750 is NO, the sub CPU 102 determines whether the pseudo BB state is “between BB flags” or “waiting for BB operation” (S752). In step S752, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the pseudo BB state is not “between BB flags” or “waiting for BB operation” (if S752 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S755 described later.

  On the other hand, in S752, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the pseudo BB state is “between the BB flags” or “BB operation waiting” (if S752 is determined to be YES), the sub CPU 102 executes the direct-addition lottery table (FIG. 47A). Referring to FIG. 47B), additional lottery processing (direct addition lottery processing) of the number of AT games is performed based on the “winning winning combination history” (S753). At this time, if the penalty flag is in the off state, the directly added lottery (penalty flag OFF) table in FIG. 47A is referred to, and if the penalty flag is on, the directly added lottery in FIG. 47B ( Penalty flag ON: during a race) The table is referred to. Next, the sub CPU 102 adds the value of the lottery result of the direct addition lottery process (the number of additional AT games) to the remaining number of AT games (S754).

  After the processing in S754 or when the determination in S752 is NO, the sub CPU 102 refers to a pressing order navigation lottery table (not shown) and performs a pressing order navigation lottery process of the small combination relating to the “push order bell” (S755). Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the lottery result of this push order navigation lottery process to “push order navigation number” (S756). Then, after the processing of S756, the sub CPU 102 ends the processing during race_game start, and shifts the processing to S426 of the processing at the time of receiving the start command (see FIG. 96).

  As described above, in S745 of the during-game_start-of-game process of the present embodiment, AT random determination is performed, and this process is executed by the sub control circuit 101. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 also serves as a means for determining whether or not to play an AT game (notification game determining means).

[AT preparation _ game start processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 125, the AT preparation-in-game start processing performed in S421 in the flowchart of the start command reception processing (see FIG. 96) will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 102 performs the pseudo BB lottery process described in FIG. 119 (S761). Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the gaming state (current) is different from the gaming state (previous) (S762).

  In S762, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is different from the gaming state (previous) (if S762 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the processing of S775 described later. On the other hand, in S762, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is not different from the gaming state (previous) (when S762 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines that the “race winner” is “male A”. Is determined (S763).

  In S763, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the “race winner” is “male A” (if S763 is determined to be YES), the sub CPU 102 performs a male A victory_game start process (S764). . In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines the number of AT start games (the number of basic stay games in the AT state) of the AT game according to the content of the above-described game for determining the number of AT start games when the “male A” wins. In this process, the sub CPU 102 turns on the AT entry flag. After the processing in S764, the sub CPU 102 performs the processing in S775 described later.

  On the other hand, in S763, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the “race winner” is not “male A” (if S763 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether the “race winner” is “male B”. It is determined whether or not it is (S765).

  In S765, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the “race winner” is “male B” (in the case of YES determination in S765), the sub CPU 102 performs a male B win time_game start process (S766). . In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines the number of AT start games of the AT game in accordance with the content of the above-described game for determining the number of AT start games when the “male B” wins. In this process, the sub CPU 102 turns on the AT entry flag. Then, after the processing of S766, the sub CPU 102 performs the processing of S775 described later.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S765 that the “race winner” is not “male B” (NO in S765), the sub CPU 102 determines whether the “race winner” is “female A”. It is determined whether or not it is (S767).

  In S767, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the “race winner” is “female A” (if S767 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the female A victory_game start processing (S768). . In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines the number of AT start games of the AT game in accordance with the content of the above-described game for determining the number of AT start games when the “Female A” wins. The details of the female A victory_game start process will be described later with reference to FIG. 126 described later. Then, after the processing in S768, the sub CPU 102 performs the processing in S775 described later.

  On the other hand, in S767, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the “race winner” is not “female A” (if S767 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether the “race winner” is “Kappa”. Is determined (S769).

  In S769, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the “race winner” is “Kappa” (if S769 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs a Kappa victory_game start time process (S770). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines the number of AT start games of the AT game in accordance with the content of the game for determining the number of AT start games when the “Kappa” wins. Details of the Kappa victory_game start process will be described later with reference to FIG. 127 described later. After the processing of S770, the sub CPU 102 performs the processing of S775 described later.

  On the other hand, in S769, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the “race winner” is not “Kappa” (NO in S769), the sub CPU 102 determines whether the “race winner” is “Tengu”. Is determined (S771).

  In S771, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the “race winner” is “Tengu” (YES in S771), the sub CPU 102 performs a tengu victory_game start process (S772). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines the number of AT start games of the AT game according to the content of the game for determining the number of AT start games when the “Tengu” wins. In this process, the sub CPU 102 turns on the AT entry flag. After the processing of S772, the sub CPU 102 performs the processing of S775 described later.

  On the other hand, in S771, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the “race winner” is not “tengu” (NO in S771), the sub CPU 102 determines that the “race winner” is “male A / male B”. It is determined whether or not there is (S773). In S773, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the “race winner” is not “male A / male B” (NO in S773), the sub CPU 102 performs the processing of S775 described later.

  On the other hand, in S773, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the “race winner” is “male A / male B” (in the case of YES determination in S773), the sub CPU 102 performs the male_male / male B victory_game A start time process is performed (S774). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines the number of AT start games of the AT game in accordance with the content of the game for determining the number of AT start games when the “male A / male B” wins. In this process, the sub CPU 102 turns on the AT entry flag. Then, after the processing in S774, the sub CPU 102 performs the processing in S775 described later.

  After the processing of S764, S766, S768, S770, S772 or S774, if S762 is YES, or if S773 is NO, the sub CPU 102 refers to a pressing order navigation lottery table (not shown), Is performed (S775). Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the lottery result of the push order navigation lottery process to “push order navigation number” (S776). Then, after the process of S776, the sub CPU 102 ends the AT preparation-in-game start process, and shifts the process to S426 of the start command reception process (see FIG. 96).

[Processing when female A wins_game start]
Next, with reference to FIG. 126, a description will be given of the female A victory time_game start time process performed in S768 in the flowchart of the AT preparation_game start process (see FIG. 125).

  First, the sub CPU 102 turns on the AT entry flag (S781). Next, the sub CPU 102 determines an AT start game number random determination (when the female A wins) table (see FIGS. 48A and 48B) used in the AT start game number determination process (S782).

  In the processing of S782, the number of AT start games is increased by 50 in one MAX bet operation, and the first mode in which the continuation probability is 50%, and the AT start game is performed in one MAX bet operation. An AT start game number random determination table (when female A wins) corresponding to one of the second modes in which the number is increased by 5 and the continuation probability is 95% is determined. In the present embodiment, in S782, the AT start game number random determination (for female A victory) table (see FIG. 48B) corresponding to the second mode is set so as to be automatically determined. The present invention is not limited to this, and it may be set in S782 so that the AT start game number lottery (when female A wins) table (see FIG. 48A) corresponding to the first mode is automatically determined.

  Then, after the processing of S782, the sub CPU 102 ends the female A victory time_game start time processing, and shifts the processing to S775 of AT preparing_game start time processing (see FIG. 125).

[Kappa victory _ game start processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 127, the Kappa victory_game start process performed in S770 in the flowchart of AT preparation_game start process (see FIG. 125) will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the kappa sushi MAP data (see FIG. 53) of the current game is “0” (whether or not the kappa sushi MAP is not set) (S791).

  In S791, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the Kappa sushi MAP data is not “0” (if S791 is NO), the sub CPU 102 sends the Kappa sushi MAP data from the next game onward to the top storage area. One is moved (S792). More specifically, the sub CPU 102 stores one kappa sushi MAP data (one of “1” to “8” stored or empty (“0”)) in the second to tenth dishes. It shifts to the Kappa sushi MAP data storage area of the 9th to 9th dishes, respectively, and empties the storage area of the 10th Kappa sushi MAP data (stores "0"). Then, after the processing in S792, the sub CPU 102 performs the processing in S797 described later.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S791 that the Kappa sushi MAP data is “0” (if S791 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines the number of AT start game lotteries (when Kappa wins) (FIG. 49). -Kappa sushi MAP lottery processing is performed with reference to FIG. 52 (S793). By this processing, the number of “Kappa Sushi MAP” is determined. Next, the sub CPU 102 refers to the Kappa sushi MAP data table (see FIG. 53) and, based on the number of the “Kappa sushi MAP” determined in S793, the Kappa sushi MAP data ( Sushi data is acquired (S794).

  After the process of S794, the sub CPU 102 sets the kappa sushi MAP data of the first to tenth dishes acquired in S794 (S795). Specifically, the sub CPU 102 stores the first to tenth Kappa sushi MAP data defined in the Kappa sushi MAP in the corresponding storage area. Next, the sub CPU 685 sets an initial value “5” to a kappa end counter (S796).

  After the processing of S792 or S796, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the Kappa sushi MAP data of the sixth dish is empty ("0") (S797). When the sub CPU 102 determines in S797 that the sixth plate of the Kappa sushi MAP data is not empty (NO in S797), the sub CPU 102 performs the processing of S801 described later.

  On the other hand, in S797, when sub CPU 102 determines that the sixth plate of Kappa sushi MAP data is empty (if S797 is YES), sub CPU 102 randomly selects the number of AT start games (when Kappa wins). With reference to the table (see FIGS. 49 to 52), the kappa sushi MAP lottery process is performed based on the current kappa sushi MAP number (S798). By this processing, the number of “Kappa Sushi MAP” set in the sixth dish is determined.

  Next, sub CPU 102 refers to the Kappa sushi MAP data table (see FIG. 53) and acquires Kappa sushi MAP data for 10 dishes based on the number of “Kappa sushi MAP” determined in S798 (S799). . Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the Kappa sushi MAP data for ten dishes specified in the Kappa sushi MAP acquired in S799 in the empty storage area of the sixth and subsequent dishes (S800).

  After the processing of S800 or when the determination of S797 is NO, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the internal winning combination is “group 1 combination” (S801). The “group 1 combination” is an internal winning combination corresponding to one of the winning numbers “9” to “14”, and is “213 bell 1” to “213 bell 8”, “231 bell 1” to “231”. Inside of any one of "bell 8", "312 bell 1" to "312 bell 8", "321 bell 1" to "321 bell 8", "1xx 3 bells", "2xx 3 bells", and "3xx 3 bells" It is a winning combination.

  In step S801, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the internal winning combination is not “group 1 combination” (if S801 is NO), the sub CPU 102 refers to the kappa sushi data conversion occurrence lottery table (see FIG. 55), A kappa sushi data conversion occurrence lottery process is performed based on the internal winning combination (S802).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the kappa sushi data conversion occurrence lottery has been won (S803). If the sub CPU 102 determines in S803 that the kappa sushi data conversion occurrence lottery has not been won (NO in S803), the sub CPU 102 ends the kappa victory_game start process and prepares the process for AT preparation. The process moves to S775 of the middle_game start process (see FIG. 125).

  On the other hand, in S803, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the kappa sushi data conversion occurrence lottery has been won (if S803 is YES), the sub CPU 102 reads the Kappa sushi data conversion lottery table (see FIGS. 56 to 60). With reference to the sushi material (Kappa sushi MAP data) of five dishes (second dish to sixth dish) after the next game, conversion lottery processing is performed (S804).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 rewrites the kappa sushi MAP data (sushi material) of the second to sixth dishes based on the lottery result of the kappa sushi data conversion occurrence lottery processing of S804 (S805). Then, after the processing of S805, the sub CPU 102 ends the kappa victory_game start processing, and shifts the processing to S775 of the AT preparation_game start processing (see FIG. 125).

  Here, returning to the processing of S801 again, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S801 that the internal winning combination is “Group 1 combination” (if S801 is YES), the sub CPU 102 With reference to the acquired lottery table (see FIG. 54), the number of acquired AT games is determined by lottery based on the Kappa sushi MAP data (sushi story) (S806). Next, the sub CPU 102 adds the determined number of acquired AT games to the number of currently acquired AT games (S807).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the sushi material at the time of acquiring the number of AT games is any of “squid”, “salmon” and “tuna” (Kappa sushi MAP data is “1,” “4” and “6”). ) Is determined (S808). In S808, when sub CPU 102 determines that the sushi material is not one of “squid”, “salmon” and “tuna” (NO in S808), sub CPU 102 performs the process of S810 described later.

  On the other hand, in S808, when sub CPU 102 determines that the sushi material is any of “squid”, “salmon”, and “tuna” (YES in S808), sub CPU 102 determines the value of the kappa end counter. Is subtracted by "1" (S809).

  After the processing of S809 or when the determination of S808 is NO, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the kappa end counter is less than “0” (S810).

  In S810, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the kappa end counter is not less than “0” (NO in S810), the sub CPU 102 sets the number of AT games after the addition operation in S807 to “AT start game number”. "(S811). Then, after the processing of S811, the sub CPU 701 ends the Kappa victory_game start processing, and shifts the processing to S775 of AT preparation_game start processing (see FIG. 125).

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S810 that the value of the kappa end counter is less than “0” (if S810 is YES), the sub CPU 102 turns on the AT entry flag (S812). Next, the sub CPU 102 sets “20 times” to “BET return chance” (S813).

  By the process of S813, as the resumption lottery of the game for determining the number of AT start games to be performed at the end of the process at the time of the Kappa victory_game start, the lottery by pressing the BET button 20 times (continuous hit resumption) becomes possible. If the resurrection lottery by the 20 pressing operations of the BET button is won, the Kappa victory_game start time process (AT start game number acquisition process) is performed again.

  Then, after the processing in S813, the sub CPU 102 ends the Kappa victory_game start processing, and shifts the processing to S775 of the AT preparation_game start processing (see FIG. 125).

  Although not shown in FIG. 127, if the sushi material is “Kappa-maki” in the lottery process of the acquired AT game number in S806 (Kappa sushi MAP data is “3”), “LIFE UP” Wins. In this case, instead of a series of processes from the process of adding the number of AT games (S807) to the process of subtracting the kappa end counter (S809), the sub CPU 102 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the kappa end counter. Done.

  As described above, in S793 of the Kappa victory_game start process of the present embodiment, sushi ingredients (Kappa sushi MA data) for 10 dishes (for 10 games) sequentially displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 are determined. This process is executed by the sub control circuit 101. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub control circuit 101 also serves as a means (additional game information determining means) for determining game information for ten games sequentially displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 in the Kappa sushi production.

  In addition, in S804 of Kappa victory_game start processing, if the internal winning combination is other than “Group combination 1” (for example, “Loose”) and the Kappa sushi data conversion occurrence lottery is won, the second plate to the sixth plate Whether or not to rewrite the kappa sushi MAP data (sushi material) is determined by lottery, and this processing is executed by the sub-control circuit 101. That is, in the present embodiment, when the internal winning combination is a loss, the sub control circuit 101 determines whether or not to change the Kappa sushi MAP data (sushi story) of the second and subsequent plates (game information change). Determination means). In addition, when the Kappa sushi MAP data (sushi material) is determined to be rewritten in S805 of Kappa victory_game start process, the Kappa sushi MAP data (sushi material) of the second to sixth plates is rewritten. This process is executed by the sub control circuit 101. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 also serves as a means (game information changing means) for changing the MAP data (sushi material) of the second and subsequent dishes.

  In addition, in S807 of the Kappa victory_game start process, when the internal winning combination is “group winning 1” (prescribed internal winning combination), the acquired AT game number is added to the current acquired AT game number. This process is executed by the sub control circuit 101. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub control circuit 101 also serves as a unit (unit game number adding unit) for adding the acquired AT game number to the currently acquired AT game number.

  Also, in S807-S809 of the process of Kappa victory_game start time, when the internal winning combination is “group combination 1”, the value of the kappa end counter is updated according to the sushi material (Kappa sushi MA data) (“ This process is executed by the sub-control circuit 101. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 also serves as a means for updating the value of the kappa end counter (end information updating means). In addition, in S811 of the Kappa victory_game start time process, if the value of the kappa end counter is less than “0” (when the game for determining the number of AT start games at the time of “Kappa” victory ends), it is acquired at that time. The total number of the executed AT games is set as the AT start game number, and this processing is executed by the sub control circuit 101. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub control circuit 101 sets the total sum of the number of AT games acquired up to the end of the game for determining the number of AT start games when “Kappa” wins as the number of AT start games (basic unit). Game number determination means). Further, in S813 of the process of Kappa victory_game start time, at the end of the AT start game number determination game, resurrection lottery of the AT start game number determination game at the time of “Kappa” victory is performed. Be executed. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 performs the resumption lottery of the game for determining the number of AT start games when winning the “Kappa” at the end of the game period of the game for determining the number of AT start games when the “Kappa” wins. Return lottery means).

[Processing during AT_game start]
Next, with reference to FIG. 128, the AT-in-game start processing performed in S423 in the flowchart of the start command reception processing (see FIG. 96) will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the number of penalty games is greater than “0” (S821).

  If the sub CPU 102 determines in S821 that the number of penalty games is not greater than “0” (if S821 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the processing of S823 described later. On the other hand, in S821, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of penalty games is larger than “0” (if S821 is YES), the sub CPU 102 subtracts “1” from the number of penalty games (S822).

  After the processing of S822 or when the determination of S821 is NO, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the number of remaining AT games is larger than “0” (S823).

  When the sub CPU 102 determines in S823 that the number of remaining AT games is not larger than “0” (if S823 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S825 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S823 that the number of remaining AT games is greater than “0” (if S823 is YES), the sub CPU 102 subtracts “1” from the remaining AT game number (S824).

  After the processing of S824 or when the determination of S823 is NO, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the gaming state (present) is different from the gaming state (previous) and the gaming state (previous) is "AT preparation". (S825). In S825, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the determination condition of S825 is not satisfied (when S825 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs a process of S832 described later.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S825 that the determination condition of S825 is satisfied (YES in S825), the sub CPU 102 determines whether the game number lottery end flag is in an off state (S826). ).

  The number-of-games lottery end flag indicates whether or not the number-of-AT-start-games determination process by the player's continuous beating operation of the MAX bet button 21 (continuous-stroke lottery) has ended in the game for determining the number of AT-start games when "Female A" wins. This flag is used to determine whether or not (the pressing operation has been performed until the addition lottery of the number of AT start games becomes non-winning). In the game for determining the number of AT start games when the “Female A” wins, when the processing for determining the number of AT start games by the continuous beating operation of the MAX bet button 21 is completed (when the number of AT start games is determined) The game number lottery end flag is turned on. However, in the game for determining the number of AT start games when “Female A” wins, if the continuous beating operation of the MAX bet button 21 is not executed, or during the continuous betting random determination (additional lottery of the number of AT start games becomes non-winning) If the player stops pressing the MAX bet button 21, that is, if the number of AT start games when the “Female A” wins is not determined, the game number lottery end flag is turned off. .

  In S826, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the number-of-games lottery end flag is in the off state (if S826 is determined to be YES), that is, in the previous game (the last game of the AT start game number determination game), the "woman A If the number of AT start games at the time of victory has not been determined, the sub CPU 102 executes a female A_AT start game number determination process (S827). In this process, the predetermined number of AT start games (5 games or 50 games) is referred to by referring to the AT start game number lottery (when female A wins) table (FIG. 48A or 48B) determined in the AT start game number determination game. If the result of the lottery is a win (continuation), a predetermined number of AT start games is added to the currently determined number of AT start games. The details of the female A_AT start game number determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 148 described later.

  Next, after the processing of S827, the sub CPU 102 returns the processing to S826. Then, the processing of S826 and S827 is repeated until the game number lottery end flag is turned off. That is, in the present embodiment, when the number of AT start games is not determined in the game for determining the number of AT start games when “Female A” wins, the predetermined number of AT start games (5 games or The loop addition lottery of (50 games) is automatically performed, and the number of AT start games when “Female A” wins is determined.

  On the other hand, in S826, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the number-of-games lottery end flag is not in the OFF state (in the case of NO determination in S826), that is, in the case where the number of AT start games when “Female A” wins is determined. In step S828, the sub CPU 102 performs a lottery process for the race victory target (candidate) with reference to the winning target lottery table (see FIG. 34). Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the lottery result of the victory target player lottery process to “race winner” (S829).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 refers to the post-AT race victory expectation data selection lottery table (see FIG. 39) and performs a winning percentage lottery process (a post-AT race win percentage lottery process) of the race performed in the transition effect game after the AT ( S830). Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the lottery result of the post-AT race win rate lottery process of S830 in the race win rate data (S831).

  After the process in S831 or when the determination in S825 is NO, the sub CPU 102 performs the pseudo BB lottery process described in FIG. 119 (S832). Next, the sub CPU 102 performs an additional lottery process (direct additional lottery process) on the number of AT games, with reference to the direct additional lottery table (see FIGS. 47A and 47C) (S833). At this time, if the penalty flag is in the off state, the directly-placed lottery (penalty flag OFF) table in FIG. 47A is referred to, and if the penalty flag is in the on-state, the directly-placed lottery in FIG. Penalty flag ON: AT, BB during AT) table is referenced. Next, the sub CPU 102 adds the value of the lottery result of the direct addition lottery process (the number of additional AT games) to the remaining number of AT games (S834).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 refers to a pressing order navigation lottery table (not shown) and performs a pressing order navigation lottery process of the small combination related to “push order bell” (S835). Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the lottery result of the push order navigation lottery process to “push order navigation number” (S836). Then, after the processing of S836, the sub CPU 102 ends the processing during AT_game start, and shifts the processing to S426 of the processing at start command reception (see FIG. 96).

  As described above, in the during-AT process at the start of the game in the present embodiment, an additional lottery is performed for the number of AT games, and this process is executed by the sub control circuit 101. That is, in the present embodiment, in the AT game, the sub control circuit 101 also serves as a means for determining the number of additions of the unit game number of the AT game (notification game addition means, first notification game addition means). In the above-described AT-in-game start processing, when the number of AT start games is not determined in the transition effect game when “Female A” wins (when the game number lottery end flag is OFF), the AT game is started. At the start, the number of AT start games when “Female A” wins is determined, and this processing is executed by the sub control circuit 101. That is, in the present embodiment, if the number of AT start games (the number of basic unit games) is not determined in the transition effect game when “Female A” wins, the sub control circuit 101 sets “Female A” at the start of the AT game. It also serves as means for determining the number of AT start games at the time of victory (second basic game number determining means).

[AT BB_ Game Start Process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 129, the AT BB_game start processing performed in S425 in the flowchart of the start command reception processing (see FIG. 96) will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the number of penalty games is “0” (S841).

  In S841, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of penalty games is not “0” (NO in S841), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S843 described later. That is, when the current game is being penalized, the BB rush determination process (at the start of the game) of S842 described later is not performed. In this case, since the process of turning on the BB entry check flag (the process of shifting to the pseudo BB game) is not performed, a state occurs in which the pseudo BB game is not started.

  On the other hand, in S841, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of penalty games is “0” (if S841 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the BB rush determination process (at the start of the game) described with reference to FIG. Perform (S842).

  After the processing of S842 or when S841 is determined to be NO, the sub CPU 102 performs the BBJAC transition determination processing (at the time of starting the game) described with reference to FIG. 122 (S843). Next, the sub CPU 102 performs the BB counter management process described with reference to FIG. 123 (S844).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 refers to the directly added lottery table (see FIGS. 47A and 47C) and performs additional lottery processing (directly added lottery processing) of the number of AT games (S845). At this time, if the penalty flag is in the off state, the directly-placed lottery (penalty flag OFF) table in FIG. 47A is referred to, and if the penalty flag is in the on-state, the directly-placed lottery in FIG. Penalty flag ON: AT, BB during AT) table is referenced. Next, the sub CPU 102 adds the value of the lottery result of the direct addition lottery process (the number of additional AT games) to the remaining number of AT games (S846).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 refers to a pressing order navigation lottery table (not shown) and performs a pressing order navigation lottery process of the small combination related to “push order bell” (S847). Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the lottery result of the push order navigation lottery process to “push order navigation number” (S848). Then, after the processing of S848, the sub CPU 102 ends the processing during BB_game start during AT, and moves the processing to S426 of the processing at the time of receiving the start command (see FIG. 96).

  As described above, in the during-AT BB_game start process of the present embodiment, an additional lottery is performed for the number of AT games, and this process is executed by the sub control circuit 101. That is, in the present embodiment, in the pseudo BB game, the sub control circuit 101 also serves as a means (a second notification game addition means) for determining the number of additions of the unit game number of the AT game.

[Game state setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 130, the game state setting process performed in S427 in the flowchart of the start command receiving process (see FIG. 96) will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the gaming state (current) is “general” (S851).

  In S851, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is "general" (S851 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs a general medium_game state setting process (S852). Details of the general medium_game state setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 131 described later. Then, after the process of S852, the sub CPU 102 ends the game state setting process and also ends the start command receiving process (see FIG. 96).

  On the other hand, in S851, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is not “general medium” (if S851 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is “general medium BB”. It is determined whether or not this is the case (S853).

  In S853, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the game state (current) is “general medium BB” (if S853 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs general medium BB_game state setting processing (S854). Details of the general middle BB_game state setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 132 described later. Then, after the processing of S854, the sub CPU 102 ends the game state setting processing, and also ends the start command reception processing (see FIG. 96).

  On the other hand, in S853, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is not “general medium BB” (NO in S853), the sub CPU 102 is in the “racing” gaming state (current). It is determined whether or not it is (S855).

  In S855, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is “during a race” (if S855 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs a racing_game state setting process (S856). The details of the in-race_game state setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 133 described later. Then, after the process of S856, the sub CPU 102 ends the game state setting process and also ends the start command receiving process (see FIG. 96).

  On the other hand, in S855, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is not “running” (S855: NO), the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is “AT preparation”. It is determined whether or not this is the case (S857).

  In S857, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is “AT preparation” (if S857 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs AT preparation_game state setting processing (S858). . The details of the AT preparation in progress_game state setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 134 described later. Then, after the processing of S858, the sub CPU 102 ends the game state setting processing and also ends the start command reception processing (see FIG. 96).

  On the other hand, in S857, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is not “AT preparation” (NO in S857), the sub CPU 102 sets the gaming state (current) to “AT BB”. It is determined whether or not there is (S859).

  In S859, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is "BB during AT" (if S859 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs BB during AT_game state setting processing (S860). The details of the during-AT BB_game state setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 135 described later. Then, after the process of S860, the sub CPU 102 ends the game state setting process and also ends the start command receiving process (see FIG. 96).

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S859 that the sub game state is not “AT BB” (NO in S859), the sub CPU 102 terminates the game state setting processing and executes the start command reception processing. (See FIG. 96) is also terminated.

  Although not shown in FIG. 130, in the series of repetition processing of the above-described sub game state determination processing and the game state setting processing during the game state setting processing, the sub game state is actually “W chance”. The process of determining whether or not there is a game state and the process of setting a game state of “W chance”, the process of determining whether or not the sub game state is “AT” and the process of setting the game state of “AT” are also performed. .

[General middle_game state setting processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 131, the general medium_game state setting processing performed in S852 in the flowchart of the game state setting processing (see FIG. 130) will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the cycle counter is “0” (S871).

  In S871, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the cycle counter is not “0” (if S871 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S873 described later. On the other hand, in S871, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the cycle counter is “0” (when S871 is determined to be YES), the sub CPU 102 sets “in race” to the game state (next time) ( S872).

  After the process of S872 or in the case of NO determination in S871, the sub CPU 102 determines whether the value of the BB precursor counter is “0” (S873). When the sub CPU 102 determines in S873 that the value of the BB precursor counter is not “0” (NO in S873), the sub CPU 102 terminates the general medium_game state setting processing and sets the game state setting processing. (See FIG. 130) is also ended.

  On the other hand, in S873, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the BB precursor counter is “0” (if S873 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines whether the gaming state (next time) is “during race”. It is determined whether or not it is (S874).

  In S874, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (next time) is not “in a race” (if S874 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S876 described later. On the other hand, in S874, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (next time) is “during a race” (if S874 is YES), the sub CPU 102 turns on the race occurrence flag (S875).

  After the process of S875 or when the determination of S874 is NO, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the race occurrence flag is on (S876). In S876, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the race occurrence flag is not in the ON state (when S876 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S878 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S876 that the race occurrence flag is in the ON state (if S876 is YES), the sub CPU 102 sets “0” to the cycle counter (S877).

  After the process of S877 or when the determination of S876 is NO, the sub CPU 102 sets “general medium BB” to the game state (next time) (S878). Then, after the process of S878, the sub CPU 102 ends the general medium_game state setting process and also ends the game state setting process (see FIG. 130).

[General medium BB_game state setting processing]
Next, the normal middle BB_game state setting process performed in S854 in the flowchart of the game state setting process (see FIG. 130) will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the BB game counter is “0” (S881). In S881, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the BB game counter is not “0” (if S881 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the general middle BB_game state setting process and sets the game state setting process. (See FIG. 130) is also ended.

  On the other hand, in S881, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the BB game counter is “0” (if S881 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines that the pseudo BB state is “ChaJAC” and the JAC It is determined whether or not the number of times of bell navigation is greater than “0” (S882). In S882, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the determination condition of S882 is satisfied (YES in S882), the sub CPU 102 ends the general middle BB_game state setting process and sets the game state setting process (see FIG. 130). ) Also ends.

  On the other hand, in S882, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the determination condition of S882 is not satisfied (NO in S882), the sub CPU 102 determines whether the race occurrence flag is on (S883). .

  In S883, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the race occurrence flag is not in the ON state (if S883 is NO), the sub CPU 102 sets “general medium” to the game state (next time) (S884). Then, after the processing of S884, the sub CPU 102 ends the general middle BB_game state setting processing and also ends the game state setting processing (see FIG. 130).

  On the other hand, in S883, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the race occurrence flag is in the ON state (if S883 is YES), the sub CPU 102 sets “in race” to the gaming state (next time) (S885). . Then, after the processing of S885, the sub CPU 102 ends the general middle BB_game state setting processing and also ends the game state setting processing (see FIG. 130).

[During race_game state setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 133, the in-race_game state setting process performed in S856 in the flowchart of the game state setting process (see FIG. 130) will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the number of racing games is the tenth game (S891). If the sub CPU 102 determines in S891 that the number of race games is not the tenth game (NO in S891), the sub CPU 102 terminates the in-race_game state setting processing and sets the game state setting processing (FIG. 130).

  On the other hand, in S891, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of race games is the tenth game (if S891 is determined to be YES), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the race victory flag is in the ON state (S891). S892).

  In S892, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the race victory flag is not in the ON state (if S892 is NO), the sub CPU 102 sets “general medium” to the gaming state (next time) (S893). Then, after the processing of S893, the sub CPU 102 ends the in-race_game state setting processing and also ends the game state setting processing (see FIG. 130).

  On the other hand, in S892, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the race victory flag is on (in the case of YES determination in S892), the sub CPU 102 determines whether the value of the BB precursor counter is “0”. (S894).

  In S894, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the BB precursor counter is not “0” (NO in S894), the sub CPU 102 sets “AT preparation” in the game state (next time) (S895). ). Then, after the processing of S895, the sub CPU 102 ends the in-race_game state setting processing and also ends the game state setting processing (see FIG. 130).

  On the other hand, in S894, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the BB precursor counter is “0” (if S894 is YES), the sub CPU 102 sets “AT BB” in the game state (next time). (S896). Then, after the processing of S896, the sub CPU 102 ends the in-race_game state setting processing and also ends the game state setting processing (see FIG. 130).

[AT preparation_game state setting processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 134, the AT preparation_game state setting processing performed in S858 in the flowchart of the game state setting processing (see FIG. 130) will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the AT entry flag is on (S901). In S901, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the AT entry flag is not in the ON state (when S901 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the AT preparation_game state setting processing and ends the game state setting processing (FIG. 130).

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S901 that the AT entry flag is in the ON state (if S901 is YES), the sub CPU 102 sets “AT AT” to the gaming state (next time) (S902). . Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the BB precursor counter is “0” or more (S903).

  In step S903, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the BB precursor counter is not equal to or more than “0” (NO in step S903), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of step S906 described below.

  On the other hand, in S903, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the BB precursor counter is equal to or more than “0” (if S903 is YES), the sub CPU 102 sets “0” to the value of the BB precursor counter. (S904). Next, the sub CPU 102 sets “BB during AT” to the gaming state (next time) (S905).

  After the processing of S905 or when the determination of S903 is NO, the sub CPU 102 turns off the “game number lottery end flag” (S906). The “game number lottery end flag” is a flag indicating whether or not to end the AT start game number determination game. Then, after the process of S906, the sub CPU 102 ends the AT preparation_game state setting process and also ends the game state setting process (see FIG. 130).

[AT BB_Gaming state setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 135, the BB_in-AT game state setting process performed in S860 in the flowchart of the game state setting process (see FIG. 130) will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the BB game counter is “0” (S911). When the sub CPU 102 determines in S911 that the value of the BB game counter is not “0” (NO in S911), the sub CPU 102 ends the BB_game state setting process during AT and sets the game state setting process. (See FIG. 130) is also ended.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S911 that the value of the BB game counter is “0” (YES in S911), the sub CPU 102 determines that the pseudo BB state is “ChaJAC” and the JAC It is determined whether or not the number of times of bell navigation is greater than “0” (S912). When the sub CPU 102 determines in S912 that the determination condition of S912 is satisfied (YES in S912), the sub CPU 102 terminates the AT BB_game state setting process and sets the game state setting process (see FIG. 130). ) Also ends.

  On the other hand, in S912, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the determination condition of S912 is not satisfied (NO in S912), the sub CPU 102 determines whether the race victory flag is on (S913). .

  In S913, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the race victory flag is in the ON state (if S913 is YES), the sub CPU 102 sets "AT preparation" in the gaming state (next time) (S914). Then, after the processing in S914, the sub CPU 102 ends the AT BB_game state setting processing and also ends the game state setting processing (see FIG. 130).

  On the other hand, in S913, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the race victory flag is not in the ON state (when S913 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether the “additional challenge flag” is in the ON state ( S915). The “additional challenge flag” is a flag indicating whether or not a game in the additional challenge state is executed, and is set in the AT preparation_game state setting process (not shown).

  When the sub CPU 102 determines in S915 that the additional challenge flag is in the ON state (if S915 is YES), the sub CPU 102 sets "additional challenge in progress" to the gaming state (next time) (S916). Then, after the processing of S916, the sub CPU 102 ends the BB_game state during AT processing and also ends the game state setting processing (see FIG. 130).

  On the other hand, in S915, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the additional challenge flag is not in the ON state (if S915 is NO), the sub CPU 102 sets "AT AT" to the gaming state (next time) (S917). Then, after the processing of S917, the sub CPU 102 terminates the AT BB_game state setting processing and terminates the game state setting processing (see FIG. 130).

[Reel stop command reception processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 136, a description will be given of the reel stop command receiving process performed in S360 in the flowchart of the effect content determination process (see FIGS. 91 and 92).

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not a special processing condition is satisfied (S921). The “special processing condition” is a condition under which penalty determination is not performed. Specifically, when the maximum number of medals that can be inserted is two, the gaming state is a state between 3 MB flags. Or when the MB is in operation.

  When the sub CPU 102 determines in S921 that the special processing condition is satisfied (YES in S921), the sub CPU 102 terminates the reel stop command receiving process and renders the effect contents determination process (FIG. 91). And FIG. 92). On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S921 that the special processing condition is not satisfied (NO in S921), the sub CPU 102 determines whether the current reel stop state is a state other than the first stop state. It is determined whether or not it is (S922).

  In S922, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the current reel stop state is a state other than the first stop (if S922 is YES), the sub CPU 102 terminates the reel stop command reception processing, The effect content determination processing (see FIGS. 91 and 92) also ends. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S922 that the current reel stop state is not a state other than the first stop (NO in S922), the sub CPU 102 sets the gaming state (current) to “general”. Is determined (S923).

  In S923, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (present) is “general” (when S923 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs a general medium penalty process (S924). The details of the general medium penalty process will be described later with reference to FIG. 137 described later. Then, after the processing of S924, the sub CPU 102 ends the processing at the time of receiving the reel stop command, and also ends the effect content determination processing (see FIGS. 91 and 92).

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S923 that the gaming state (current) is not “general” (NO in S923), the sub CPU 102 determines whether the gaming state (current) is “in race”. It is determined whether or not it is (S925).

  In S925, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is “in a race” (if S925 is YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the internal winning combination to “push order bell” (CT bell). It is determined whether or not the first stopped reel is other than the left reel 3L (S926).

  In S926, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the determination condition of S926 is not satisfied (when S926 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the reel stop command receiving process and performs the effect content determination process (FIG. 91 and FIG. 91). 92 is also ended. On the other hand, in S926, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the determination condition of S926 is satisfied (when S926 is YES), the sub CPU 102 adds “5” to the number of penalty games and sets “1” in the value of the penalty counter. Is added (S927).

  In the process of S927, if the number of penalty games after addition exceeds “10” (the upper limit of the number of penalty games), the sub CPU 102 sets “10” as the number of penalty games. If the value of the penalty counter after the addition exceeds “10” (the upper limit of the value of the penalty counter), the sub CPU 102 sets “10” as the value of the penalty counter. Then, after the process of S927, the sub CPU 102 ends the process at the time of receiving the reel stop command, and also ends the effect content determination process (see FIGS. 91 and 92).

  Here, returning to the process of S925 again, in S925, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is not “during race” (if S925 is NO), the sub CPU 102 sets the gaming state ( It is determined whether or not (current) is “general BB” or “AT BB” (S928).

  In S928, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is “General BB” or “AT BB” (if S928 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs a BB penalty process (S928). S929). Note that details of the BB penalty process will be described later with reference to FIG. 138 described later. Then, after the process of S929, the sub CPU 102 ends the process at the time of receiving the reel stop command, and also ends the effect content determination process (see FIGS. 91 and 92).

  On the other hand, in S928, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is not “general BB” or “AT BB” (if S928 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) It is determined whether or not "at AT" (S930).

  When the sub CPU 102 determines in S930 that the gaming state (current) is not “AT” (NO in S930), the sub CPU 102 ends the reel stop command receiving process and renders the effect contents determination process. (See FIGS. 91 and 92). On the other hand, in S930, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is “AT” (if S930 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the number of penalty games is greater than “0”. Is determined (S931).

  When the sub CPU 102 determines in S931 that the number of penalty games is not larger than “0” (NO in S931), the sub CPU 102 ends the reel stop command receiving process and renders the effect contents determination process ( 91 and 92 are also ended. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S931 that the number of penalty games is larger than “0” (if S931 is YES), the sub CPU 102 subtracts “1” from the number of penalty games (S932). Then, after the processing of S932, the sub CPU 102 ends the processing at the time of receiving the reel stop command, and also ends the effect content determination processing (see FIGS. 91 and 92).

[General medium penalty processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 137, the general medium penalty processing performed in S924 in the flowchart of the reel stop command reception processing (see FIG. 136) will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the internal winning combination is “push order bell” (CT bell) and whether the first stopped reel is other than the left reel 3L (S941).

  When the sub CPU 102 determines in S941 that the determination condition of S941 is not satisfied (NO in S941), the sub CPU 102 determines whether the number of penalty games is greater than “0” (S942).

  In S942, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of penalty games is not larger than “0” (if S942 is NO), the sub CPU 102 terminates the general medium penalty process, and performs a reel stop command receiving process ( 136) also ends. On the other hand, in S942, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of penalty games is larger than “0” (if S942 is YES), the sub CPU 102 subtracts “1” from the number of penalty games (S943). Then, after the processing of S943, the sub CPU 102 ends the general medium penalty processing and also ends the reel stop command reception processing (see FIG. 136).

  Here, returning to the process of S941 again, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S941 that the determination condition of S941 is satisfied (YES in S941), the sub CPU 102 sets “5” as the number of penalty games. Then, "1" is added to the value of the penalty counter (S944). In this process, if the number of penalty games after addition exceeds “10” (the upper limit of the number of penalty games), the sub CPU 102 sets “10” as the number of penalty games. If the value of the penalty counter after the addition exceeds “10” (the upper limit of the value of the penalty counter), the sub CPU 102 sets “10” as the value of the penalty counter.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 performs a race win rate data rewrite lottery process with reference to the race win rate data rewrite (during penalty) table shown in FIG. 40 (S945). When the lottery process is won (when the winning type is other than “no rewriting”), the race win rate data is rewritten as a penalty so that the race win rate (AT win probability) in the current cycle is reduced.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the race winning rate data rewriting lottery in S945 has been won (whether or not the winning type is other than “no rewriting”) (S946). In S946, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the race win rate data rewriting lottery has not been won (if S946 is NO), the sub CPU 102 terminates the general medium penalty process and performs a reel stop command reception process (FIG. 136) also ends.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S946 that the winning in the race win rate data rewriting lottery has been won (if S946 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines the lottery result in the race win rate (the race win rate is 0% in the present embodiment). Is set (S947). Then, after the processing of S947, the sub CPU 102 ends the general medium penalty processing and also ends the reel stop command reception processing (see FIG. 136).

[Penalty processing during BB]
Next, the BB penalty process performed in S929 in the flowchart of the reel stop command reception process (see FIG. 136) will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the number of penalty games is greater than “0” (S951).

  When the sub CPU 102 determines in S951 that the number of penalty games is not larger than “0” (if S951 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S953 described later. On the other hand, in S951, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of penalty games is greater than “0” (if S951 is YES), the sub CPU 102 subtracts “1” from the number of penalty games (S952).

  After the processing in S952 or when the determination in S951 is NO, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the pseudo BB state is “BB operation waiting” (S953).

  In S953, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the pseudo BB state is not “BB operation waiting” (NO in S953), the sub CPU 102 terminates the BB in-penalty process and performs the reel stop command receiving process ( 136) also ends. On the other hand, in S953, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the pseudo BB state is “BB operation waiting” (if S953 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines whether the number of penalty games is greater than “0” or It is determined whether or not the flag is on (S954).

  In step S954, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the determination condition of step S954 is not satisfied (NO in step S954), the sub CPU 102 terminates the BB-in-penalty process and performs a reel stop command reception process (see FIG. 136). ) Also ends. On the other hand, in S954, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the determination condition of S954 is satisfied (if S954 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines that the internal winning combination is “push order bell” (CT bell), and It is determined whether the first stopped reel is other than the left reel 3L (S955).

  In step S955, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the determination condition of step S955 is not satisfied (NO in step S955), the sub CPU 102 terminates the BB-in-penalty process and performs a reel stop command reception process (see FIG. 136). ) Also ends. On the other hand, in S955, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the determination condition of S955 is satisfied (YES in S955), the sub CPU 102 adds “5” to the number of penalty games (S956). In this process, if the number of penalty games after addition exceeds “10” (the upper limit of the number of penalty games), the sub CPU 102 sets “10” as the number of penalty games.

  Then, after the processing of S956, the sub CPU 102 ends the BB in-penalty processing and also ends the reel stop command receiving processing (see FIG. 136).

[Processing when receiving a winning operation command]
Next, with reference to FIG. 139, a description will be given of the processing at the time of receiving a winning operation command performed in S362 in the flowchart of the effect content determination processing (see FIGS. 91 and 92).

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the sub game state is a winning time of “general medium BB” (hereinafter, referred to as “general medium BB_winning”) (S961).

  In S961, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub gaming state is “general medium BB_winning” (if S961 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs general medium BB_winning processing (S962). The details of the general middle BB_winning process will be described later with reference to FIG. 140 described later. Then, after the processing of S962, the sub CPU 102 ends the processing at the time of receiving the winning operation command, and also ends the effect content determination processing (see FIGS. 91 and 92).

  On the other hand, in S961, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub game state is not “general medium BB_winning” (NO in S961), the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub gaming state is “during race” ( Hereafter, it is determined whether or not “the race is in progress—at the time of winning” (S963).

  In S963, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub game state is “during a race_winning” (if S963 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs a race_winning process (S964). The details of the during-prize-winning process will be described later with reference to FIG. 143 described later. Then, after the processing of S964, the sub CPU 102 ends the processing at the time of receiving the winning operation command, and also ends the effect content determination processing (see FIGS. 91 and 92).

  On the other hand, in S963, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub game state is not “during the race_winning” (if S963 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether the sub game state is “AT BB”. (Hereinafter, referred to as “AT during BB_winning”) is determined (S965). In S965, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub game state is not “at the time of AT BB_winning” (if S965 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the processing at the time of receiving the winning operation command and determines the effect contents. The processing (see FIGS. 91 and 92) also ends.

  On the other hand, in S965, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub game state is “AT during BB_winning” (if S965 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs BB during AT_winning processing (S966). . The details of the processing during BB_win during AT will be described later with reference to FIG. 144 described later. Then, after the processing of S966, the sub CPU 102 ends the processing at the time of receiving the winning operation command, and also ends the effect content determination processing (see FIGS. 91 and 92).

[General Medium BB_ Winning Process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 140, the general middle BB_winning process performed in S962 in the flowchart of the winning operation command receiving process (see FIG. 139) will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 102 performs BB rush determination processing (at the time of winning) (S971). The details of the BB rush determination process (at the time of winning) will be described later with reference to FIG. 141 described later.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 performs BBJAC transition determination processing (at the time of winning) (S972). The details of the BBJAC transition determination process (at the time of winning) will be described later with reference to FIG. 142 described later. Then, after the process of S972, the sub CPU 102 terminates the normal middle BB_winning process and the winning operation command receiving process (see FIG. 139).

[BB entry determination process (at the time of winning)]
Next, the BB rush determination process (at the time of winning) performed in S971 in the flowchart of the general middle BB_winning process (see FIG. 140) will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the BB rush check flag is on (S981). In S981, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the BB rush check flag is not in the ON state (if S981 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the BB rush determination process (at the time of winning), and performs the process BB_winning in general. The process moves to S972 of the time process (see FIG. 140).

  On the other hand, in S981, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the BB rush check flag is on (when S981 is YES), the sub CPU 102 turns the BB rush check flag off (S982).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the player has pressed the stop button according to the pressing order navigation of the stop button notified by the liquid crystal display device 11 when the pseudo BB game enters (hereinafter referred to as “BB entry navigation”). (S983).

  In the present embodiment, when the internal winning combination is “Normal Lip 1” or “Normal Lip 3”, an order of “middle right and left” is notified as a pressing order of the stop button. When the internal winning combination is “Normal Lip 2” or “Normal Lip 4”, the order of pressing the stop button is “Right Middle Left”. When the internal winning combination is “Normal Lip 5” or “Normal Lip 7”, the order of “middle left and right” is notified as the pressing order of the stop button. When the internal winning combination is “Normal Lip 6” or “Normal Lip 8”, an order of “middle right left” is notified as a pressing order of the stop button.

  In S983, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the player has followed the BB rush navigation (when the determination in S983 is YES), the sub CPU 102 turns on the BB rush flag (S984). Next, the sub CPU 102 turns off the penalty flag (S985). After the processing of S985, the sub CPU 102 ends the BB rush determination processing (at the time of winning), and shifts the processing to S972 of the general middle BB_winning processing (see FIG. 140).

  On the other hand, in S983, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the player did not follow the BB rush navigation (in the case of NO determination in S983), that is, when the BB rush navigation was ignored, the sub CPU 102 sets the number of penalty games. It is determined whether it is “0” (S986).

  In S986, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of penalty games is not “0” (NO in S986), the sub CPU 102 ends the BB rush determination process (at the time of winning), and performs the process BB_winning in general. The process moves to S972 of the time process (see FIG. 140). On the other hand, in S986, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of penalty games is “0” (if S986 is YES), the sub CPU 102 turns on the penalty flag (S987). Then, after the processing of S987, the sub CPU 102 ends the BB rush determination processing (at the time of winning), and shifts the processing to S972 of the general middle BB_winning processing (see FIG. 140).

[BBJAC transition judgment processing (at the time of winning)]
Next, the BBJAC transition determination process (at the time of winning) performed in S972 in the flowchart of the general middle BB_winning process (see FIG. 140) will be described with reference to FIG. 142.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the BARJAC entry check flag is on (S991). In S991, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the BARJAC rush check flag is not in the ON state (if S991 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S998 described later.

  On the other hand, in S991, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the BARJAC entry check flag is on (when the determination in S991 is YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the BARJAC entry check flag to off (S992). Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the pseudo BB state is “BB in progress” (S993).

  In S993, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the pseudo BB state is “BB in progress” (if S993 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the processing of S997 described later. On the other hand, in S993, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the pseudo BB state is not “BB in progress” (if S993 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether the pseudo BB state is “ChaBB in progress”. (S994).

  In step S994, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the pseudo BB state is not “ChaBB in progress” (if S994 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S998 described later. On the other hand, in S994, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the pseudo BB state is “ChaBB in progress” (if S994 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines whether the display combination (winning combination) is “BAR lip”. It is determined whether or not it is (S995). The winning combination “BAR lip” corresponds to “bell lip 3” or “bell lip 4”.

  In S995, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the display combination (winning combination) is “BAR lip” (if S995 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the processing of S997 described later. On the other hand, in S995, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the display combination (winning combination) is not “BAR Rip” (NO in S995), the sub CPU 102 sets the gaming state (current) to “AT during BB”. It is determined whether or not there is (S996).

  In S996, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is “AT BB” (if S996 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the processing of S997 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S996 that the gaming state (current) is not “AT BB” (NO in S996), the sub CPU 102 performs the processing of S998 described later.

  If the determination in S993, S995 or S996 is YES, the sub CPU 102 sets the BARJAC entry flag to the on state (S997).

  After the processing of S997, or when S991, S994 or S996 is NO, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the gaming state (current) is different from the gaming state (next time) (S998). In S998, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is not different from the gaming state (next time) (NO in S998), the sub CPU 102 ends the BBJAC transition determination processing (at the time of winning). BB_winning process (see FIG. 140) also ends.

  On the other hand, in S998, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is different from the gaming state (next time) (YES in S998), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the BARJAC entry flag is on. Is determined (S999). In S999, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the BARJAC entry flag is not in the ON state (if S999 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the BBJAC transition determination process (at the time of winning), and performs the general middle BB_winning process. (See FIG. 140).

  On the other hand, in S999, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the BARJAC entry flag is in the ON state (if S999 is YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the gaming state (current) to the gaming state (next time) (S1000). ). Next, the sub CPU 102 sets “0” to the value of the BB game counter (S1001). Then, after the processing of S1001, the sub CPU 102 ends the BBJAC shift determination processing (at the time of winning) and also ends the general middle BB_winning processing (see FIG. 140).

[During prize-winning process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 143, the during-race_winning process performed in S964 in the flowchart of the winning operation command receiving process (see FIG. 139) will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the BB rush check flag is on (S1011). In S1011, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the BB rush check flag is not in the ON state (if S1011 is NO), the sub CPU 102 terminates the race_winning process and receives a winning operation command ( 139) also ends.

  On the other hand, in S1011, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the BB rush check flag is on (when S1011 is YES), the sub CPU 102 turns the BB rush check flag off (S1012).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the pressing order of the stop button by the player is a predetermined order (whether or not the pressing order is correct) (S1013).

  In S1013, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the order in which the player presses the stop button is not the predetermined order (NO in S1013), the sub CPU 102 turns on the penalty flag (S1014). Then, after the processing of S1014, the sub CPU 102 ends the processing during race_winning and ends the processing at the time of receiving a winning operation command (see FIG. 139).

  On the other hand, in S1013, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the order of pressing the stop button by the player is the predetermined order (if S1013 is YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the BB entry flag to the ON state (S1015). ). Next, the sub CPU 102 sets "BB during AT" to the gaming state (next time) (S1016). Then, after the processing of S1016, the sub CPU 102 ends the processing during race_winning and ends the processing at the time of receiving a winning operation command (see FIG. 139).

[BB during AT_Winning process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 144, the BB_winning-at-AT process performed in S966 in the flowchart of the winning operation command receiving process (see FIG. 139) will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 102 performs the BB rush determination process (at the time of winning) described in FIG. 141 (S1021). Next, the sub CPU 102 performs the BBJAC transition determination process (at the time of winning) described in FIG. 142 (S1022). Then, after the processing of S1022, the sub CPU 102 ends the processing during BB_winning during AT, and also ends the processing upon receiving a winning operation command (see FIG. 139).

[Process when receiving the payout end command]
Next, with reference to FIG. 145, a description will be given of the processing at the time of receiving the payout end command performed in S364 in the flowchart of the effect content determination processing (see FIGS. 91 and 92).

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the gaming state (the gaming state managed by the main CPU 93) is the non-MB state (S1031).

  In S1031, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state is the non-MB state (YES in S1031), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the number of credits of medals is “3” or more ( S1032).

  In S1032, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of credits of the medal is not equal to or more than “3” (NO in S1032), the sub CPU 102 ends the payout end command receiving process and renders the effect content determination process ( 91 and 92 are also ended. On the other hand, in S1032, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of credits of medals is “3” or more (if S1032 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S1034 described later.

  Here, returning to the process of S1031, again, in S1031, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state is not the non-MB state (in the case of NO determination in S1031), the sub CPU 102 sets the credit number of medals to “2”. Is determined (S1033).

  In S1033, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of credits of medals is not equal to or more than “2” (NO in S1033), the sub CPU 102 ends the payout end command receiving process and renders the effect content determination process ( 91 and 92 are also ended. On the other hand, in S1033, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of credits of medals is “2” or more (if S1033 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S1034 described later.

  If the determination in S1032 or S1033 is YES, the sub CPU 102 issues a lighting request to the LED provided on the MAX bet button 21 (S1034). Then, after the processing of S1034, the sub CPU 102 terminates the processing at the time of receiving the payout end command, and also ends the effect content determination processing (see FIGS. 91 and 92).

[Process when receiving no operation command]
Next, with reference to FIG. 146, a description will be given of the non-operation command receiving process performed in S374 in the flowchart of the effect content determination process (see FIGS. 91 and 92).

  First, the sub CPU 102 provides the status information (for example, on / off information of the BET switch 77, the start switch 79, and the like) of the input port of each operation unit included in the received data of the no-operation command in the sub RAM 103. It is stored in the input port status storage area (S1041). Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the current state is after receiving the payout end command and before receiving the medal insertion command (S1042).

  In S1042, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the determination condition of S1042 is not satisfied (NO in S1042), the sub CPU 102 terminates the no-operation command receiving process and renders the effect contents determination process (FIG. 91 and FIG. 91). 92 is also ended. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S1042 that the determination condition of S1042 is satisfied (YES in S1042), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the gaming state (current) is “AT preparation”. (S1043).

  In S1043, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is not “AT preparation” (NO in S1043), the sub CPU 102 ends the no-operation command reception process and determines the effect contents. The processing (see FIGS. 91 and 92) also ends.

  On the other hand, in S1043, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is “AT preparation” (if S1043 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs an AT preparation button pressing process (S1044). ). In this process, an AT start game number determination process when “Female A” wins and a resumption lottery process for an AT start game number determination game when “Kappa” wins are performed. Note that the details of the process when the AT preparation button is pressed will be described later with reference to FIG. 147 described later. Then, after the process of S1044, the sub CPU 102 ends the no-operation command receiving process and also ends the effect content determination process (see FIGS. 91 and 92).

[Process when pressing AT preparation button]
Next, with reference to FIG. 147, the processing when the AT preparation button is pressed in S1044 in the flowchart of the no-operation command reception processing (see FIG. 146) will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the MAX bet button 21 has been pressed by the player and the race winner is “Kappa” (S1051).

  In S1051, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the determination condition of S1051 is satisfied (YES in S1051), the sub CPU 102 performs a process of pressing the Kappa victory_MAX bet button (S1052). In this process, resurrection lottery of the game for determining the number of AT start games when “Kappa” wins is performed. Then, after the process of S1052, the sub CPU 102 terminates the process when the AT preparation button is pressed and also terminates the process when the no-operation command is received (see FIG. 146).

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S1051 that the determination condition of S1051 is not satisfied (if S1051 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines that the selection button 25 (chance button) is pressed by the player and the It is determined whether or not the victor is “Female A” (S1053).

  In S1053, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the determination condition of S1053 is satisfied (YES in S1053), the sub CPU 102 performs an AT start game number random determination table switching process (S1054).

  In the game for determining the number of AT start games when “Female A” wins, as described above, the first mode (continuation probability is 50%, addition for each MAX bet operation) The number of games is 50 and the second mode (the continuation probability is 95% and the number of added games for each MAX bet operation is 5) is prepared. In the process of S1054, the AT start game number random determination table (one of FIGS. 48A and 48B) corresponding to the currently set one mode is set to the AT start game number random determination (female A win) corresponding to the other mode. Time) Switch to the table (the other of FIGS. 48A and 48B).

  For example, in the situation where the currently set AT start game number random determination (when female A wins) table is the AT start game number random determination (when female A wins) table corresponding to the second mode (FIG. 48B), When the selection button 25 (chance button) is pressed by the user, the AT start game number lottery (when female A wins) table (FIG. 48A) corresponding to the first mode is set to “female A” by the switching process in S1054. The number of AT start games to be determined in the victory is set as a table for the number of AT start games to be used in the game (when the female A wins). Then, after the processing of S1054, the sub CPU 102 terminates the processing when the AT preparation button is pressed and also terminates the processing when the no-operation command is received (see FIG. 146).

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S1053 that the determination condition of S1053 is not satisfied (NO in S1053), the sub CPU 102 determines that the MAX bet button 21 has been pressed by the player and that the race winner has not been determined. It is determined whether it is "Female A" (S1055).

  In S1055, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the determination condition of S1055 is not satisfied (NO in S1055), the sub CPU 102 terminates the AT preparation button press-down process and the no-operation command reception process ( 146) also ends.

  On the other hand, in S1055, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the determination condition of S1055 is satisfied (YES in S1055), the sub CPU 102 performs a female A_AT start game number determination process (S1056). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines the number of AT start games when the “Female A” wins. The details of the female A_AT start game determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 148 described later.

  Then, after the processing of S1056, the sub CPU 102 terminates the processing at the time of pressing the AT preparation button and terminates the processing at the time of receiving the no-operation command (see FIG. 146).

  As described above, in the processing when the AT preparation button is pressed according to the present embodiment, when the MAX bet button 21 is pressed by the player and the race winner is “woman A”, the “woman A” The number of AT start games at the time of victory is determined, and this processing is executed by the sub control circuit 101. That is, in the present embodiment, when the race winner is “woman A”, the sub control circuit 101 determines the number of AT start games triggered by the pressing operation of the MAX bet button 21 (the first basic game). Number determination means).

[Female A_AT start game determination process]
Next, referring to FIG. 148, the woman performing in S827 in the flowchart of the AT-in-game start process (see FIG. 128) or S1056 in the flowchart of the AT preparation button press-down process (see FIG. 147). The A_AT start game determination process will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the game number lottery end flag is in an off state (S1061).

  In S1061, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the game number lottery end flag is not in the OFF state (if S1061 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the female A_AT start game determination process and the female A_AT start game determination process. If the destination of the call is the AT-game start process (see FIG. 128), the process proceeds to S826 of the AT-game start process. In addition, when the call destination of the female A_AT start game determination process is the AT preparation button pressing process (see FIG. 147), and when S1061 is NO, the sub CPU 102 ends the female A_AT start game determination process. At the same time, the process when the AT preparation button is pressed is also terminated.

  On the other hand, in S1061, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the number-of-games random determination end flag is in the OFF state (if S1061 is determined to be YES), the sub CPU 102 reads the AT start game number random determination table (see FIGS. 48A and 48B). With reference to this, the female A_AT start game number lottery process is performed (S1062). Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the female A_AT start game number random determination in S1062 has been won (S1063).

  In S1063, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the female A_AT start game number lottery has been won (if S1063 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines the predetermined number of games (5 games or 50 games) corresponding to the lottery result. Is added to the currently determined AT start game number (S1064). Then, after the processing of S1064, the sub CPU 102 ends the female A_AT start game determination processing, and when the call destination of the female A_AT start game determination processing is the AT_game start time processing (see FIG. 128), The process is shifted to S826 of AT-in-game start process. If the destination of the female A_AT start game determination process is the AT preparation button press-down process (see FIG. 147), after the process of S1064, the sub CPU 102 ends the female A_AT start game determination process, The process when the AT preparation button is pressed is also terminated.

  On the other hand, in S1063, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the female A_AT start game number lottery has not been won (if S1063 is NO), the sub CPU 102 sets a game number lottery end flag to an ON state (S1065). Then, after the processing of S1065, the sub CPU 102 ends the female A_AT start game determination processing, and when the call destination of the female A_AT start game determination processing is the AT-in-game start processing (see FIG. 128), The process is shifted to S826 of AT-in-game start process. If the destination of the female A_AT start game determination process is the AT preparation button press process (see FIG. 147), after the process of S1065, the sub CPU 102 terminates the female A_AT start game determination process, The process when the AT preparation button is pressed is also terminated.

<Various effects>
In the pachislo 1 of the present embodiment, the following various effects can be obtained in the playability.

[Various effects obtained in a game in the state between 2 MB flags]
In the present embodiment, as described above, in the RT1 (high RT) game state in which the bonus “2 MB” to be won and won only in the two-slot game is carried over, that is, in the state between the 2 MB flags, the predetermined game number (190) Various games such as a non-AT state game (a normal game and a transition effect game) in which one cycle is a game) and a certain number of AT state games are performed. In the game in the state between the 2 MB flags, a suggestion of playing three cards is performed, and as long as the player plays a game of playing three cards in accordance with the suggestion, the player can play the game without winning the bonus “2 MB”. Note that as long as the player plays a game with three cards in the state between the 2 MB flags, the lottery table in which the formation and winning of the bonus “2 MB” are not specified is referred to, so that the bonus “2 MB” performs any stop operation. And won't win.

  In the pachislot 1 of the present embodiment, in the normal game, when “losing” or a specific internal winning combination (small winning combination or replay combination) is achieved once internally or continuously, a non-AT state game period (normally A lottery (cycle shortening lottery) for reducing the number of games in a game period is performed. Then, if this cycle shortening lottery is won, the game period of the current set in the non-AT state is shortened, and the period until shifting to the AT state can be shortened. Further, in the present embodiment, when “losing” or a predetermined internal winning combination (replay combination) is once internally won or consecutively won in the AT game, an additional lottery (direct addition lottery) of the number of AT games is performed. When the lottery is performed, the number of remaining AT games increases.

  That is, in the pachislo 1 of the present embodiment, in the game in the high RT gaming state in which the bonus is being carried over, even if the internal winning combination is "losing", the advantageous game can be continued without winning the bonus. . Further, in the present embodiment, the contents of the privilege given at the time of "losing" winning are made different depending on the type of the sub game state ("normal state" or "AT state") in the high RT gaming state in which the bonus is carried over. be able to.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, it is possible to give a game value to "losing" generated in a game in a high RT game state in which a bonus is carried over, and it is possible to widen a range of the game. Further, in a game in a high RT gaming state in which a bonus is being carried over, a "losing" in which a bonus is not won can be appropriately generated, so that the gambling of the gaming machine can be maintained. As described above, in the pachislo 1 of the present embodiment, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game in the high RT game state during the carryover of the bonus.

  Further, in the pachislot 1 of the present embodiment, in the game in the state between the 2 MB flags, if the total of the current credit number and the inserted number of medals is less than three, the MAX bet operation is performed by the player. Also, the MAX bet operation is invalidated. In this case, in the state between the 2 MB flags, the game of two sheets is not started by the MAX bet operation, and the winning of the bonus “2 MB” being carried over can be more reliably avoided.

  In other words, in the present embodiment, in the state between the 2 MB flags, a game with the number of medals that is disadvantageous to the player cannot be performed by the MAX bet operation. Therefore, in the pachislo 1 of the present embodiment, even a player who has no knowledge of the game can play the game with peace of mind.

[Various effects obtained by short cycle lottery of normal games]
In the present embodiment, as a result of subtracting the number of remaining games of the current game of the current set from the number of shortened games determined by the cycle shortening lottery performed during the normal game, the subtraction result is less than the predetermined number of games (10 games). In the case of no longer, the surplus reduced game number corresponding to the subtraction result is stocked. Then, the number of reduced games corresponding to the stock surplus is applied as the number of reduced games of the next set. In this case, the game is played with the non-AT state game period shortened from the start of the next set.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the normal game, the number of shortened games (privileges) that have become excess in the current set can be applied to the next set of normal games without wasting. It is possible to give the player interest in the game. Further, in this case, a motivation for causing the player to execute the next set of normal games can be generated, so that the operating rate of the gaming machine can be increased.

[Various effects obtained by pseudo BB game]
As described above, the pachislot 1 of the present embodiment includes the pseudo BB game in which the payout of medals increases, and when the pseudo BB lottery is won in the normal game or the AT game, the pseudo BB game is started as an interruption process. You. Therefore, the normal game is not a game in which the game is simply digested, but a game in which more medals can be obtained by the pseudo BB game.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the pseudo BB game started during the normal game, even when the “losing” or the “rare role” is internally won, the cycle of the non-AT state game period (the normal game playing period) Abbreviated lottery is performed. When the number of remaining games in the current set is subtracted from the number of shortened games determined by the cycle shortening lottery at this time, if the subtraction result is less than “0”, the surplus corresponding to the subtraction result is obtained. Minutes of reduced games are stocked. Then, the number of reduced games corresponding to the stock surplus is applied as the number of reduced games of the next set.

  On the other hand, in the pseudo BB game started during the AT game, when “losing” or “rare role” is internally won, an additional lottery (direct addition lottery) of the number of AT games is performed, and the additional lottery is won. In this case, the current number of remaining AT games increases.

  In other words, in the pseudo BB game, the privilege given to the winning of “losing” or “rare role” according to the type of the sub game state (“normal state” or “AT state”) at the time of starting the pseudo BB game Can be different. Further, in the pseudo BB game, it is possible to give a "losing" a gaming value. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the interest in the pseudo BB game can be improved.

  Further, in the AT game in the state between the 2MB flags, not only the game of notifying the player of the small win that has been internally won to the player but also the pseudo BB game may be started. The AT game can be prevented from becoming a monotonous game.

[Various effects obtained by determining the number of AT start games when "Kappa" wins]
In the game for determining the number of AT start games at the time of victory of “Kappa” of the present embodiment, as described above, the character “Kappa” eats sushi material that is sequentially output for each game according to the type of the internal winning combination, and The number of AT start games is determined according to the type of sushi material that has been eaten. That is, in the game for determining the number of AT start games when the “Kappa” wins, the number of basic staying games in the AT state (the number of AT start games) is not determined by one lottery, but is determined over a plurality of games. Is determined based on the type of the internal winning combination and the sushi material (game information) displayed on the liquid crystal screen of the liquid crystal display device 11. Therefore, in the present embodiment, it is possible to enhance the interest of the player in the game of obtaining the number of games in the AT state (AT start game number determination game).

  Further, in the game for determining the number of AT start games when “Kappa” wins in the present embodiment, as described above, even if the internal winning combination is “Loss”, data (game information) of sushi material after the next game is obtained. May be converted to better data for the player. That is, in the present embodiment, even in the AT start game number determination game, “losing” can be given a gaming value, and even if “losing” is determined, interest can be maintained.

<Various modifications>
The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment. For example, the following various modifications can be considered.

[Modification 1]
In the pachi-slot 1 of the above embodiment, when "losing" is won in the normal game or the pseudo BB game (once or once), the game period in the normal state (the number of stay games) is reduced (cycle reduction). There is a possibility that the privilege of being obtained. In the pachislot 1 of the above embodiment, when "losing" is won in an AT game, there is a possibility that a privilege of adding the number of AT games is obtained.

  However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in a game in a sub game state other than the normal game, the pseudo BB game, and the AT game, a function of providing a privilege by winning (one time or continuous winning) of “losing” is provided. You may. Therefore, in the first modified example, a pachislot provided with a function of obtaining a privilege of AT winning when “losing” is won in a transition effect game (race effect) will be described.

(1) During Race_Loss Lottery Table First, with reference to FIG. 149, a description will be given of the during-loss lottery table required to execute the function of providing the above benefits (AT winning) in the transition effect game (race effect). I do. FIG. 149 is a diagram illustrating a configuration of a lottery table during a race_loss. Note that, during the race_losing lottery table, for example, during the racing_gaming start processing (see FIG. 150 described later) during a racing_losing lottery process (see FIG. 150 described later), the winning / non-winning of the race victory is performed. It is referred to when determining the AT game winning / non-winning.

  During the race_losing lottery table, the correspondence between the winning / non-winning of the race victory and the lottery value is defined for each value of the loss counter (“1” to “4”). The losing counter is a counter that manages (counts) the number of consecutive winnings of “losing” during the race effect period (10 games).

  Therefore, for example, when “losing” is won three times in a row during the race effect, the value of the loss counter becomes “3”. In this case, a race victory is not won with a probability of 6554/32768, and a race victory is won with a probability of 26214/32768 (the race victory flag is ON). When the value of the losing counter is “1” (at the time of the first “losing” winning), the winning of the race is always non-winning (AT non-winning).

(2) During Race_Game Start Processing Next, with reference to FIG. 150, during race_game start processing in Modification Example 1 will be described. Note that the processing during the race_game start in this example is also performed in S419 in the flowchart of the start command reception processing (see FIG. 96) of the above embodiment.

  In this example, processes other than the process during the race_game start by the sub control circuit 101 are the same as those in the above embodiment. Therefore, here, only the processing during the race_game start will be described.

  As is apparent from a comparison between the flowchart of the during-game process at the start of the game of this example shown in FIG. 150 and the flowchart of the process at the time of game start of the above-described embodiment shown in FIG. The processing from S1101 to S1114 in the flowchart of the game start processing is the same as the processing of S741 to S754 in the during-game start processing flowchart of the above embodiment. Therefore, the description of the processing from S1101 to S1114 is omitted here.

  In this example, after the processing of S1114 or when S1112 is NO, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the result of the race result lottery is a non-winning race victory and the internal winning combination is “losing”. (S1115).

  In S1115, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the determination condition of S1115 is not satisfied (if S1115 is NO), the sub CPU 102 sets “0” to a loss counter (S1116). Then, after the processing of S1116, the sub CPU 102 performs the processing of S1121 described later.

  On the other hand, in S1115, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the determination condition of S1115 is satisfied (YES in S1115), the sub CPU 102 adds “1” to the value of the loss counter (S1117). Next, the sub CPU 102 refers to the during-loss lottery table (see FIG. 149) and performs the during-loss lottery process based on the value of the loss counter after the addition (S1118).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the result of the during-loss lottery process is a non-winning race victory (S1119). In S1119, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the result of the during-loss lottery process is a non-winning race victory (YES in S1119), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S1121 described later.

  On the other hand, in S1119, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the result of the in-race lottery process at the time of loss is not a non-winning race victory (if S1119 is NO), the sub CPU 102 sets the race victory flag to the ON state. (S1120). After the processing of S1120, the sub CPU 102 performs the processing of S1121 described below.

  After the processing of S1116 or S1120, or in the case of YES determination in S1119, the sub CPU 102 refers to a pressing order navigation lottery table (not shown) and performs the pressing order navigation lottery processing of the small combination related to “push order bell” (S1121). ). Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the lottery result of the push order navigation lottery process to “push order navigation number” (S1122). Then, after the processing of S1122, the sub CPU 102 ends the processing during the race_game start, and shifts the processing to S426 of the processing at the time of receiving the start command (see FIG. 96).

  In the pachislot of the first modification described above, the same effect as in the above embodiment can be obtained, and even in the transition effect state (during the period of the race effect), it is possible to give a “losing” a gaming value, Interestingness for the transition effect game can be improved. In the first modification, an example has been described in which, when “losing” is internally won once (when the value of the loss counter is “1”), non-winning of a race victory is always determined. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be configured such that the winning of the race victory can be obtained with a predetermined probability even in the case of the single winning of “losing”.

[Modification 2]
In the second modification, as in the first modification, a pachi-slot provided with a function of obtaining a privilege of AT winning when “losing” is won (one time or continuous winning) in a transition effect game (race effect). Will be described. However, in this example, the lottery form of the AT lottery performed at the time of “losing” winning is changed from that of the first modification.

  Specifically, in this example, according to the value of the losing counter, not only the winning / non-winning of the race victory, but also the race win rate MAP lottery table determined at the start of the set (cycle) of the normal game (see FIG. 35). The re-lottery of the race winning rate using the "?" Is also selectable. Therefore, the configuration of the in-race_losing lottery table used in this example is different from that of the first modification.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 151, a description will be given of the during-race-loss lottery table in the second modification. FIG. 151 is a diagram showing a configuration of a lottery table during a race_loss in this example. Also in this example, the during-race lottery table is referred to in, for example, the during-game-start-of-game-running-loss-lottery-at-lottery process (S1118) of Modification 1 of FIG. 150 described above. You.

  In this example, during the race_losing lottery table, the type of lottery result (winning / non-winning of race victory and re-lotting of race winning rate) and the lottery result The correspondence with the lottery value is defined. Also in this example, the value of the losing counter indicates the number of consecutive winnings of “losing” during the race effect period (10 games).

  In this example, as shown in FIG. 151, when the value of the loss counter is “1”, a non-winning race victory is always obtained as a lottery result. When the value of the loss counter is “2”, a re-lottery of the race winning rate is always obtained as a lottery result. When the value of the losing counter is “3”, a winning of a race victory is always obtained as a lottery result.

  In this example, when the value of the loss counter is “2” in the during-race-loss-lottery process (S1118) during the during-race-game start process shown in FIG. In the process of S1118, the sub CPU 102 refers to the race winning percentage MAP lottery table determined at the time of starting the set, and performs re-lotting of the race winning percentage data based on the set value.

  In this example, the configuration is the same as that of the first modification, except that the lottery form of the AT lottery performed at the time of “losing” is different from that of the first modification. Therefore, also in Modification 2, the same effect as in Modification 1 can be obtained. In the second modification, an example has been described in which, when “losing” is internally won once (when the value of the loss counter is “1”), the non-winning of the race victory is always determined. The present invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which at least one of the winning of the re-lottery of the race winning rate and the winning of the race victory can be obtained with a predetermined probability even at the time of winning the “losing” once.

[Modification 3]
In the above first and second modifications, the pachislot having the function of obtaining the privilege of AT winning when “losing” is won (one time or continuous winning) in the transition effect game (race effect) has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. In the transition effect game, when "losing" is won, another privilege may be given. For example, when "losing" is won in the transition effect game (one time or continuous winning), a pseudo-BB game is won with a high probability over a predetermined number of games and is stocked in the "additional challenge state". May be stocked.

  In this case, the game in the "additional challenge state" stocked during the transition effect game (race production) is a specific symbol combination ("yellow BAR"-"yellow BAR"-"yellow BAR") after transition to the AT state. The stop is displayed on the activated line and started.

  In the configuration of this example, it is possible to make the game after the transition to the AT state more advantageous to the player, and to increase the difference in the playability (the advantage of the game) between the AT state and the other states. Can be. Therefore, in this example, the playability between the AT state and other states can be sharpened, and the interest of the game can be further improved.

[Modification 4]
In the pachi-slot 1 of the above embodiment, when "losing" is won in the normal game or the pseudo BB game (once or once), the game period in the normal state (the number of stay games) is reduced (cycle reduction). However, the present invention is not limited to this. In the normal game or the pseudo BB game, when "losing" is won (one time or continuous winning), the cycle shortening lottery may not be performed.

  In this case, the configurations of the cycle shortening lottery table and the pseudo BB cycle shortening lottery table used in this example are the cycle shortening lottery table (see FIGS. 44 and 45) and the pseudo BB cycle shortening lottery table (see FIG. 46) of the above embodiment. ), The column defining the lottery value for “losing” is deleted.

  As in this example, by making a configuration in which a privilege is not given when “losing” is won in a normal game or a pseudo BB game, a game property between the AT state and other states (advantage of the game) Can be increased. Therefore, in this example, the playability between the AT state and other states can be sharpened, and the interest of the game can be further improved.

[Modification 5]
In the pachislo of the embodiment or the various modified examples described above, a configuration in which a predetermined privilege is given when a "losing" is won in a plurality of types of sub game states has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Only in one sub-game state among the game states, a privilege giving function at the time of "losing" may be provided.

[Modification 6]
In the above embodiment, a penalty flag, a penalty counter (number of penalties) and a number of penalty games are provided as parameters for determining whether or not to perform a penalty process, and these determination parameters are appropriately used depending on the object to which the penalty is imposed. Was explained.

  In the case where the penalty processing of the above embodiment is employed, the penalty state may continue over a period of a plurality of games. For example, in the normal state, when the small win related to the “push order bell” (CT bell) is internally won and the first stop operation of the reel is performed on a stop button other than the left stop button 19L (unusual) If a push operation is performed), “5” is added to the number of penalty games. In this case, the cycle shortening lottery is prohibited for a period of at least five games.

  Therefore, in the penalty process of the above embodiment, even if the player presses the stop button in the wrong order unintentionally (due to a simple operation error or the like), the stoppage is uniformly performed for a predetermined game period thereafter. Therefore, disadvantages such as prohibition of the cycle shortening lottery may occur. In this case, the interest of the player may be reduced. Further, in the penalty processing of the above-described embodiment, when there is a malicious player who intentionally performs an irregular pressing operation on the stop button and stops the game in a state where a penalty is generated, the gaming machine in the penalty-generated state In, there is a possibility that a disadvantage may be given to another player who starts the next game, even though the penalty operation is not performed by himself.

  Therefore, in Modification 6, in order to prevent the above-described problem that may occur when the penalty state continues over the period of a plurality of games, a penalty operation (such as an operation of pressing a stop button that imposes a penalty) is performed. An example of a penalty process in which a penalty is imposed only on the played game and the penalty is not carried over to the next game will be described.

(1) Outline of Penalty Processing In this example, when the sub game state is the normal state (the game state (current) is “general”), the player performs an irregular push operation on the stop button. (When the first stop operation of the reel is performed on a reel other than the left reel 3L), a penalty is given to the cycle shortening lottery and the pseudo BB lottery only in the game in which the irregular pushing operation is performed. The penalty processing to be imposed will be described.

  In the above-described embodiment, the cycle shortening-related processing and the pseudo BB lottery processing are performed at the start of the game of the normal game (the processing of the general medium_game shown in FIGS. 117 and 118). And the pseudo BB lottery process is performed after all the reels stop (when a reel stop command corresponding to the third stop of the reels is received).

  In this example, when a penalty occurs at the time of the third stop of the reel (when an irregular pressing operation is performed), the cycle shortening lottery prepared separately for the penalty occurrence is prepared. The pseudo BB lottery is executed with reference to a table (not shown), and the pseudo BB lottery (general medium) table (not shown) for a penalty prepared separately is also executed with reference to the table.

  The cycle shortening lottery table for when a penalty occurs, the winning probability of the number of shortened games (probability of acquiring the number of shortened games) in the cycle shortening lottery, and the cycle shortening lottery table for when a non-penalty occurs (see FIGS. 44 and 45) It is configured to be lower than that in the case where the cycle shortening lottery is performed by using. Note that the state in which the winning probability of the number of shortened games in the cycle shortened lottery (the probability of obtaining the number of shortened games) is low refers to a state in which the benefit of obtaining the number of shortened games is difficult to be given. This includes not only a state where the probability that the predetermined number of shortened games can be obtained by the cycle shortening lottery (the winning probability of the predetermined number of shortened games) is low, but also a state where the number of shortened games that can be obtained by the cycle shortening random drawing is small.

  The configuration of the cycle shortening lottery table for when a penalty occurs can be arbitrarily configured as long as the privilege of obtaining the number of shortened games is less likely to be provided than the cycle shortening lottery table for when a non-penalty occurs. . For example, a cycle shortening lottery table for when a penalty occurs is configured such that the number of winable (acquirable) shortened games specified in the cycle shortening lottery table is smaller than that of the cycle shortening lottery table for when a non-penalty occurs. May be. In addition, for example, the number of shortened games that can be won specified in the cycle shortened lottery table for when a penalty occurs is the same as that of the cycle shortened lottery table for when a non-penalty occurs, and the number of shortened games that can be drawn is determined by lottery. The cycle shortening lottery table for when a penalty occurs may be configured such that the value is smaller than that of the cycle shortening lottery table for when a non-penalty occurs.

  Further, in the pseudo BB lottery (general medium) table for when a penalty occurs, the winning probability of the pseudo BB is set lower than that of the pseudo BB lottery (general medium) table for when a non-penalty occurs (see FIG. 41). A lottery value is set.

  On the other hand, in this example, if no penalty occurs at the time of the third stop of the reel (if the irregular push operation is not performed), the cycle shortening lottery is executed in the same manner as in the above-described embodiment. The pseudo BB lottery at the time of non-penalty occurrence is executed with reference to the non-penalty occurrence cycle shortening lottery table shown in FIG. . In this example, a penalty flag is used as a determination parameter indicating whether to perform a penalty process (whether or not an irregular push operation has been performed).

(2) Processing at Reception of Reel Stop Command Next, processing at the time of reel stop command reception including penalty processing in this example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 152 is a flowchart showing a procedure of a process at the time of receiving a reel stop command in this example. In addition, the process at the time of receiving the reel stop command in this example is performed in S360 in the flowchart of the effect content determination process (see FIGS. 91 and 92), similarly to the above embodiment.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether a special processing condition is satisfied (S1131). Note that the “special processing condition” in this example is also a condition under which penalty determination is not performed, as in the above-described embodiment. Specifically, the maximum number of medals that can be inserted is two. This corresponds to the case where the gaming state is between the 3MB flags, or the case where the MB is operating.

  In S1131, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the special processing condition is satisfied (in the case of YES determination in S1131), the sub CPU 102 ends the reel stop command receiving process and performs the effect content determination process (FIG. 91). And FIG. 92). On the other hand, in S1131, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the special processing condition is not satisfied (if S1131 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether the current reel stop state is the third stop state. Is determined (S1132).

  In S1132, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the current stopped state of the reel is the third stop (when S1132 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S1136 described later. On the other hand, in S1132, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the current stopped state of the reel is not the third stop (NO in S1132), the sub CPU 102 determines that the current stopped state of the reel is other than the first stop. It is determined whether or not it is in the state (S1133).

  In S1133, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the current reel stop state is a state other than the first stop (if S1133 is YES), the sub CPU 102 ends the reel stop command receiving process, The effect content determination processing (see FIGS. 91 and 92) also ends. On the other hand, in S1133, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the current stopped state of the reel is not a state other than the first stop (in the case of S1133 being NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the first stop operation to set the remaining reels other than the left reel 3L. It is determined whether or not the reel has been stopped (S1134).

  In S1134, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the reels other than the left reel 3L have not been stopped by the first stop operation (NO in S1134), the sub CPU 102 ends the reel stop command receiving process, The effect content determination processing (see FIGS. 91 and 92) also ends. On the other hand, in S1134, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the reels other than the left reel 3L have been stopped by the first stop operation (an irregular push operation has been performed) (in the case of YES determination in S1134), the sub CPU 102 The penalty flag is turned on (S1135). Then, after the processing of S1135, the sub CPU 102 ends the reel stop command reception processing, and also ends the effect content determination processing (see FIGS. 91 and 92).

  Here, returning to the process of S1132 again, if the determination of S1132 is YES, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the gaming state (current) is “general” (S1136).

  When the sub CPU 102 determines in S1136 that the gaming state (current) is not “general” (NO in S1136), the sub CPU 102 ends the reel stop command receiving process and renders the effect contents determination process. (See FIGS. 91 and 92). On the other hand, in S1136, when sub CPU 102 determines that the game state (current) is “general” (YES in S1136), sub CPU 102 determines whether the penalty flag is on. (S1137).

  In step S1137, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the penalty flag is not in the ON state (if S1137 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs a cycle shortening-related (during non-penalty) process and a process of setting (updating) various parameters. (S1138).

  In the process of S1138, the sub CPU 102 refers to the cycle shortening lottery table for non-penalty occurrence shown in FIGS. 44 and 45 and performs the cycle shortening based on the data of the "winning winning combination history", as in the above embodiment. Perform lottery. In the processing of S1138, the sub CPU 102 sets the cycle counter based on the number of shortened games corresponding to the result of the cycle shortened lottery (during non-penalty) and the current value of the cycle counter (at the time of the lottery). (Decrement processing of the value of the cycle counter) and set (update) processing of the "stay point" are performed. Further, in the process of S1138, when the value of the current (before subtraction) cycle counter is less than "10", the sub CPU 102 refers to the race victory expectation lottery table (not shown) and updates the race victory expectation data. The lottery is performed, and a process of setting the lottery result of the race win expectation data up lottery to the race win rate data is performed. That is, in the processing of S1138, the sub CPU 102 performs the processing of S661 and the subsequent processing (the processing of S661 to S668) during the general medium_game start time processing of the embodiment shown in FIGS. 117 and 118.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 performs pseudo BB lottery (during normal, non-penalty) processing and set (update) processing of various parameters (S1139).

  In the process of S1139, the sub CPU 102 performs the pseudo BB lottery based on the internal winning combination with reference to the pseudo BB lottery (general medium) table for non-penalty occurrence, as shown in FIG. . Then, in the process of S1139, when the pseudo BB lottery is won, the sub CPU 102 sets “at the time of BB winning” in the pseudo BB state, and then refers to the pseudo BB precursor lottery table (refer to FIG. 43) to obtain the internal lottery. A pseudo BB precursor lottery is performed based on the winning combination. Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the lottery result of the pseudo BB precursor lottery (the number of precursor games of the pseudo BB game) in the BB precursor counter. That is, in the processing of S1139, the sub CPU 102 performs the processing of S674 and subsequent processing (the processing of S674 to S678) during the pseudo BB lottery processing of the embodiment shown in FIG. 119.

  Then, after the processing of S1139, the sub CPU 102 ends the processing at the time of receiving the reel stop command, and also ends the effect content determination processing (see FIGS. 91 and 92).

  On the other hand, in S1137, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the penalty flag is in the ON state (when S1137 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the cycle shortening related (during penalty) process and the setting process of various parameters ( S1140).

  In the process of S1140, the sub CPU 102 performs the cycle shortening lottery with reference to the cycle shortening lottery table (not shown) for generating a penalty. In the processing of S1140, the sub CPU 102 sets the cycle counter (step S1140) based on the number of shortened games corresponding to the result of the cycle shortened lottery (during the penalty) and the current value of the cycle counter (during the lottery). The process of subtracting the value of the cycle counter) and the process of setting (updating) the “stay point” are performed. Further, in the process of S1140, if the current (before subtraction) value of the cycle counter is less than “10”, the sub CPU 102 refers to a race victory expectation lottery table (not shown) and updates the race victory expectation data. The lottery is performed, and a process of setting the lottery result of the race win expectation data up lottery to the race win rate data is performed. That is, in the processing of S1140, the sub CPU 102 performs the cycle shortening-related processing using the cycle shortening lottery table (not shown) for the occurrence of a penalty, and then performs the process of FIG. 117 and FIG. The processing after S662 during the game start processing (the processing of S662 to S668) is performed.

  After the processing of S1140, the sub CPU 102 performs a pseudo BB lottery (during general, penalty) processing and a set (update) processing of various parameters (S1141).

  In the processing of S1141, the sub CPU 102 performs a pseudo BB lottery process based on the internal winning combination with reference to a pseudo BB lottery (general medium) table (not shown) for when a penalty occurs. Then, in the processing of S1141, when the pseudo BB lottery is won, the sub CPU 102 sets “at the time of BB winning” in the pseudo BB state, and thereafter, refers to the pseudo BB precursor lottery table (see FIG. 43) and internally wins. A pseudo BB precursor lottery is performed based on the winning combination. Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the lottery result of the pseudo BB precursor lottery (the number of precursor games of the pseudo BB game) in the BB precursor counter. That is, in the process of S1141, the sub CPU 102 performs the pseudo BB lottery process based on the pseudo BB lottery (general medium) table for the occurrence of a penalty, and then performs S675 during the pseudo BB lottery process of the above embodiment shown in FIG. 119. The subsequent processing (the processing of S675 to S678) is performed.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 turns off the penalty flag (S1142). By this processing, a state is generated in which the penalty is not carried over after the next game. Then, after the processing of S1142, the sub CPU 102 terminates the processing at the time of receiving the reel stop command, and also terminates the effect content determination processing (see FIGS. 91 and 92).

  In this example, the processing at the time of receiving the reel stop command is performed as described above. In the process at the time of receiving the reel stop command in this example, the processes of S1135 and S1142 are executed by the sub control circuit 101. That is, in this example, the sub-control circuit 101 turns on the penalty flag at the first stop and turns off the penalty flag at the third stop when an irregular push operation is performed on the stop button by the player. (Penalty flag setting means). In the processing at the time of receiving the reel stop command in this example, the processing of S1137 is executed by the sub control circuit 101. That is, in this example, the sub-control circuit 101 also serves as a means (penalty determining means) for determining whether or not the pressing operation of the stop button is an irregular pressing operation based on the state of the penalty flag.

  In the processing at the time of receiving the reel stop command in this example, the cycle reduction random determination (during non-penalty) in S1138 is executed by the sub control circuit 101. That is, in this example, the sub control circuit 101 sets the normal game when the penalty flag is in the OFF state at the time of the third stop of the reel (when the pressing operation of the stop button is not the irregular pressing operation: the first case). Of the present remaining unit game number (first normal game shortening means). In the processing at the time of receiving the reel stop command in this example, the sub control circuit 101 executes the period reduction random determination (during the penalty) of the normal game in S1140. That is, in this example, the sub-control circuit 101 normally sets the penalty flag to the ON state at the time of the third stop of the reel in the normal game (when the pressing operation of the stop button is the irregular pressing operation: the second case). It also serves as a means for determining a subtraction number of the current remaining unit game number of the game (second normal game shortening means).

  Further, in the processing when the reel stop command is received in this example, the pseudo BB lottery (during normal, non-penalty) processing during the normal game in S1139 is executed by the sub control circuit 101. That is, in this example, the sub control circuit 101 determines whether or not to execute the pseudo BB game (special game) when the penalty flag is in the off state (first case) at the time of the third stop of the reel in the normal game. It also serves as a means (first special game determination means). In the processing at the time of receiving a reel stop command in this example, the pseudo BB lottery (during general, penalty) processing during the normal game in S1141 is executed by the sub control circuit 101. That is, in this example, the sub control circuit 101 determines whether or not to execute the pseudo BB game (special game) when the penalty flag is in the ON state at the time of the third stop of the reel in the normal game (second case). It also serves as a means (second special game determination means).

  In this example, since the cycle shortening lottery process and the pseudo BB lottery process are performed at the time of the third stop of the normal game reel, at the time of starting the game of the normal game (the process of the general medium_game start process shown in FIGS. 117 and 118). ), The cycle shortening lottery process and the pseudo BB lottery process are not performed. Further, in this example, as described above, a penalty flag is used as a parameter for determining whether or not to impose a penalty, and the number of penalty games and the penalty counter used in the above embodiment are not used. Therefore, in this example, the various penalty-related processes of the number of penalty games and the penalty counter (for example, the determination process of the number of penalty games and the penalty counter, the addition process, the subtraction process, and the reset process, which are performed during the various processes of the above embodiment) Etc.) are not performed. In this example, the configuration such as the processing content other than the difference from the above-described embodiment can be configured in the same manner as the above-described embodiment.

  Further, in this example, the configuration example in which both the cycle shortening lottery and the pseudo BB lottery are executed at the time of the third stop of the reel has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. One of the cycle shortening lottery and the pseudo BB lottery may be executed at the time of the third stop of the reel, and the other may be executed at the time of starting the game (general medium_game start time processing shown in FIGS. 117 and 118). Further, in this example, an example has been described in which both the cycle shortening lottery and the pseudo BB lottery are executed even when a penalty occurs, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the penalty occurs, the cycle shortening lottery and the pseudo BB lottery are performed. May be configured not to execute at least one of the above.

  When the above-described penalty processing of this example is adopted, the penalty is imposed only in the game in which the penalty has occurred, and is not reflected after the next game. In this case, for example, even if the player stops the reels in an unintended order (due to a simple operation error), the cycle shortening lottery is not performed over a plurality of game periods. Does not occur, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest of the player. Also, for example, even if there is a malicious player who intentionally performs an irregular push operation (penalty operation) and stops the game in a state where a penalty has been generated, the game machine starts the next game. Since a penalty is not imposed on another player who plays the game, the other player can play the game with peace of mind.

  That is, in the pachislot of this example, when a penalty operation such as an irregular push operation of the stop button is performed, it is possible to prevent occurrence of excessive profit provision, and to set the penalty to the player who performed the penalty operation. Can only be imposed on

[Modification 7]
In the modified example 7, similarly to the modified example 6, in order to prevent the above-described problem that may occur when the penalty state continues over a plurality of game periods, the penalty is imposed only in the game in which the penalty operation is performed. Then, another example of the penalty processing for preventing the penalty from being carried over to the next game will be described. Note that, also in this example, similarly to the above-described modification 6, an example will be described in which a penalty is imposed when the player performs an irregular pressing operation on the stop button.

(1) Outline of Penalty Processing In the penalty processing of this example, first, the cycle shortening lottery processing and the pseudo BB lottery processing are performed at the time of the start of the game of the normal game as in the above-described embodiment (see the general medium shown in FIGS. 117 and 118). _ Game start process). Next, when a penalty operation (irregular push operation) is detected in the game, the cycle for penalty occurrence is shortened at the time of the third stop of the reel of the game (when a reel stop command corresponding to the third stop is received). The lottery process and the pseudo BB lottery process are performed again, and each lottery result is rewritten.

  In this example, when a penalty occurs during the third stop of the reel (when an irregular push operation is performed), the cycle shortening lottery is performed in the same manner as in the above-described modified example 6 to reduce the cycle for the penalty occurrence. The pseudo-BB lottery is executed with reference to a lottery table (not shown), and the pseudo-BB lottery is executed with reference to a pseudo-BB lottery (general medium) table (not shown) for when a penalty occurs. Also in this example, similarly to the above-described modification 6, a penalty flag is used as a determination parameter indicating whether or not to perform a penalty process (whether or not an irregular push operation has been performed).

(2) Processing at Reception of Reel Stop Command Next, processing at the time of receiving a reel stop command including a penalty processing in this example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 153 is a flowchart showing a procedure of a process at the time of receiving a reel stop command in this example. In addition, the process at the time of receiving the reel stop command in this example is performed in S360 in the flowchart of the effect content determination process (see FIGS. 91 and 92), similarly to the above embodiment.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether a special processing condition is satisfied (S1151). Note that the “special processing condition” in this example is also a condition under which penalty determination is not performed, as in the above-described embodiment. Specifically, the maximum number of medals that can be inserted is two. This corresponds to the case where the gaming state is between the 3MB flags, or the case where the MB is operating.

  In S1151, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the special processing condition is satisfied (if S1151 is YES), the sub CPU 102 ends the reel stop command receiving process and renders the effect contents determination process (FIG. 91). And FIG. 92). On the other hand, in step S1151, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the special processing condition is not satisfied (NO in step S1151), the sub CPU 102 determines whether the current reel stop state is the third stop state. Is determined (S1152).

  In S1152, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the current stopped state of the reel is the third stop (when S1152 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S1156 described later. On the other hand, in S1152, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the current reel stop state is not the third stop state (if S1152 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines that the current reel stop state is other than the first stop state. It is determined whether it is in the state (S1153).

  In S1153, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the current reel stop state is a state other than the first stop (if S1153 is YES), the sub CPU 102 terminates the reel stop command reception processing, The effect content determination processing (see FIGS. 91 and 92) also ends. On the other hand, in step S1153, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the current reel stop state is not a state other than the first stop (NO in step S1153), the sub CPU 102 performs the first stop operation to change the state other than the left reel 3L. It is determined whether or not the reel has been stopped (S1154).

  In S1154, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the reels other than the left reel 3L have not been stopped by the first stop operation (if S1154 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the reel stop command receiving process, The effect content determination processing (see FIGS. 91 and 92) also ends. On the other hand, in S1154, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the reels other than the left reel 3L have been stopped by the first stop operation (if S1154 is YES), the sub CPU 102 turns on the penalty flag (S1155). . Then, after the processing of S1155, the sub CPU 102 ends the reel stop command reception processing, and also ends the effect content determination processing (see FIGS. 91 and 92).

  Here, returning to the processing of S1152 again, if the determination of S1152 is YES, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the gaming state (current) is “general” (S1156).

  When the sub CPU 102 determines in S1156 that the gaming state (current) is not “general” (NO in S1156), the sub CPU 102 terminates the reel stop command reception process and renders the effect contents determination process. (See FIGS. 91 and 92). On the other hand, in S1156, when sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is "general" (YES in S1156), sub CPU 102 determines whether the penalty flag is on. (S1157).

  In S1157, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the penalty flag is not in the ON state (if S1157 is NO), the sub CPU 102 terminates the reel stop command receiving process and renders the effect contents determination process (FIG. 91 and FIG. 91). 92) also ends.

  On the other hand, in S1157, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the penalty flag is in the ON state (if S1157 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs a cycle shortening related (during penalty) process (S1158). In this processing, the sub CPU 102 performs the cycle shortening lottery again using the cycle shortening lottery table (not shown) for the occurrence of a penalty.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 performs rewriting processing of various parameters currently set based on the lottery result of the cycle shortening lottery (during the penalty) performed in S1158 (S1159).

  In the process of S1159, the sub CPU 102 first determines the number of shortened games corresponding to the lottery result of the cycle shortening lottery (during penalty) of S1158 and the value of the cycle counter immediately before the cycle shortening lottery at the start of the game. Again, the process of subtracting the value of the cycle counter and the process of updating the “stay point” are performed. Next, the sub CPU 102 rewrites the value of the cycle counter and the “stay point” set at the start of the current game with the value of the cycle counter and the “stay point” acquired again in the process of S1159. Further, in the process of S1159, when the value of the cycle counter immediately before (before subtraction) the cycle shortening lottery at the start of the game is less than “10”, the sub CPU 102 refers to a race victory expectation degree lottery table (not shown). Then, the race win expectation data up lottery is again performed, the lottery result of the race win expectation data up lottery is obtained as race win rate data, and the race set at the start of the current game is obtained with the obtained race win rate data. Rewrite the winning percentage data.

  That is, in the processing of S1159, the sub CPU 102 again performs the processing during the general medium_game start of the embodiment shown in FIGS. 117 and 118 based on the lottery result of the cycle shortening lottery (during the penalty) performed in S1158. (Steps S662 to S668), and using the value of the cycle counter, the “stay point”, and the race winning percentage data obtained by the processing, these set at the start of the current game. Rewrite parameters.

  After the processing of S1159, the sub CPU 102 performs pseudo BB lottery (during general, during penalty) processing (S1160). In this process, the sub CPU 102 refers to the pseudo BB lottery (general medium) table (not shown) for when a penalty occurs, and performs the pseudo BB lottery (general medium, penalty) again based on the internal winning combination. .

  Next, the sub CPU 102 performs rewriting processing of various parameters that are currently set, based on the lottery result of the pseudo BB lottery (in general, during penalty) performed in S1160 (S1161). Specifically, when the pseudo BB lottery in S1160 is won, the sub CPU 102 sets “at the time of BB winning” to the pseudo BB state. Next, the sub CPU 102 refers to the pseudo BB precursor lottery table (see FIG. 43) and performs the pseudo BB precursor lottery process again based on the internal winning combination. Then, the sub CPU 102 rewrites the value of the BB precursor counter set at the start of the current game with the number of precursor games of the pseudo BB game (lottery result) obtained by the re-performed pseudo BB precursor lottery.

  In other words, in the processing of S1161, the sub CPU 102 again performs the steps from S675 onward in the pseudo BB lottery process of the embodiment shown in FIG. 119 based on the lottery result of the pseudo BB lottery (in the middle, during the penalty) performed in S1160. (The processing of S675 to S678), and the parameters set at the start of the current game are rewritten using the information of the pseudo BB state and the number of precursor games of the pseudo BB game obtained by the processing.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 turns off the penalty flag (S1162). By this processing, a state is generated in which the penalty is not carried over after the next game. Then, after the processing of S1162, the sub CPU 102 ends the processing at the time of receiving the reel stop command, and also ends the effect content determination processing (see FIGS. 91 and 92).

  In this example, the processing at the time of receiving the reel stop command is performed as described above. In the process at the time of receiving the reel stop command in this example, the processes of S1155 and S1162 are executed by the sub control circuit 101. That is, in this example, the sub-control circuit 101 turns on the penalty flag at the first stop and turns off the penalty flag at the third stop when an irregular push operation is performed on the stop button by the player. (Penalty flag setting means). In the process at the time of receiving the reel stop command in this example, the process of S1157 is executed by the sub control circuit 101. That is, in this example, the sub-control circuit 101 also serves as a means (penalty determining means) for determining whether or not the pressing operation of the stop button is an irregular pressing operation based on the state of the penalty flag.

  In the processing at the time of receiving the reel stop command in this example, the series of processing in S1158 and S1159 described above is executed by the sub control circuit 101. That is, in this example, when the penalty flag is in the ON state at the time of the third stop of the reel in the normal game (when the pressing operation of the stop button is an irregular pressing operation: a specific case), the sub control circuit 101 performs the normal operation. The subtraction number of the remaining unit game number of the current set of the game is determined again, and the redetermined subtraction number also serves as a means for rewriting the subtraction number determined at the start of the game (second normal game shortening means).

  Further, in the processing at the time of receiving the reel stop command in this example, the pseudo BB lottery (during normal, non-penalty) processing during the normal game in S1161 is executed by the sub control circuit 101. That is, in this example, the sub control circuit 101 determines again whether or not to execute the pseudo BB game (special game) when the penalty flag is in the ON state (in a specific case) at the time of the third stop of the reel in the normal game. It also serves as a means (second special game determination means).

  In this example, as described above, a penalty flag is used as a parameter for determining whether to impose a penalty, and the number of penalty games and the penalty counter used in the above embodiment are not used. Therefore, in this example, similarly to the above-described modification 6, various types of penalty-related processing of the number of penalty games and the penalty counter (for example, determination processing of the number of penalty games and the penalty counter, which are performed during the various processing of the above-described embodiment, No addition processing, subtraction processing, reset processing, etc.) are performed. Further, in this example, the configuration such as the processing content other than the difference from the above-described embodiment can be configured in the same manner as the above-described embodiment.

  Further, in this example, when a penalty has occurred at the time of the third stop of the reel, both the cycle shortening lottery and the pseudo BB lottery are executed again and the various parameters are rewritten. The present invention is not limited to this. For example, when a penalty occurs, at least one of the cycle shortening lottery and the pseudo BB lottery may not be executed.

  In the penalty process of this example, if the penalty flag is on and the result of the cycle shortening lottery and the pseudo BB lottery performed at the start of the current game is non-winning, various parameters are rewritten. Instead, various parameters set at the start of the current game may be maintained. Furthermore, in the penalty processing of this example, an example has been described in which the cycle shortening lottery, the pseudo BB lottery, and the rewriting processing of various parameters are performed when the penalty flag is on, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, instead of this series of processes performed when the penalty flag is on, the lottery results of the cycle shortening lottery and the pseudo BB lottery performed at the start of the current game, and various parameters set based on the lottery result are set. A lottery process for determining whether to maintain (execute) may be performed.

  In the penalty processing of this example described above, similarly to the sixth modification, the penalty is imposed only in the game in which the penalty has occurred, and is not reflected after the next game. Therefore, in this example, an effect similar to that of the above-described modification 6 can be obtained.

[Modification 8]
In the modified example 8, similarly to the modified examples 6 and 7, in order to prevent the above-described problem that may occur when the penalty state continues over a plurality of game periods, the penalty operation is performed only in the game in which the penalty operation is performed. , And another example of the penalty processing for preventing the penalty from being carried over to the next game will be described. Note that, in this example, as in the above-described modified examples 6 and 7, an example will be described in which a penalty is imposed when the player performs an irregular pressing operation on the stop button.

(1) Outline of Penalty Processing In this example, the number of games for which the player has not performed the irregular push operation (stop operation other than the first left stop) during one game period of the normal game, that is, the penalty operation is executed. A lottery point counter (predetermined stop operation counting means) for counting the number of unplayed games is prepared. Then, when the value of the lottery point counter reaches the number of games (180 games) of one set (one cycle) of the normal game, the sub game state changes to the transition effect state (race effect) in which the AT lottery is performed. Make the configuration to be migrated.

  Specifically, in the penalty process of this example, first, at the time of the first stop of the reel, it is determined whether or not the pressing operation of the player is an irregular pressing operation (whether or not reels other than the left reel 3L have been stopped). A discrimination process is performed, thereby determining whether to impose a penalty.

  Next, when it is determined that the pressing operation of the player is not an irregular pressing operation at the time of the first stop of the reel, “1” is added to the value of the lottery point counter and the cycle shortening lottery is performed. That is, in this example, the cycle shortening related processing is performed not at the time of starting the game but at the time of the first stop of the reel (at the time of receiving the reel stop command corresponding to the first stop). Further, when a predetermined number of shortened games is won by the cycle shortening lottery performed at the time of the first stop of the reel, the predetermined number of shortened games is added to the value of the lottery point counter.

  Then, when the value of the lottery point counter reaches the number of games (180 games) of one set (one cycle) of the normal game through the above-described addition processing of the lottery point counter, a transition effect game (race effect) Is started, and an AT lottery is performed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the pressing operation of the player is an irregular pressing operation at the time of the first stop of the reel, the above-described addition processing of the lottery point counter and the cycle shortening random determination are not performed.

  In this example, since it is determined whether or not a penalty is imposed by the determination process as to whether or not the pressing operation of the player is an irregular pressing operation, the penalty in the embodiment and the modified examples 6 and 7 is determined. The penalty flag, the number of penalty games, and the penalty counter used as the determination parameters are not used. In this example, the reset process of the lottery point counter is performed, for example, during a race_variable setting process performed at the start of a transition effect game (race effect). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the reset processing of the lottery point counter can be performed at any timing as long as it is between the end of the normal game of the current cycle and the start of the normal game of the next cycle. it can.

(2) Processing at Reception of Reel Stop Command and During Race_Variable Setting Processing First, processing at the time of reel stop command reception including penalty processing in this example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 154 is a flowchart showing a procedure of a process at the time of receiving a reel stop command in this example. In addition, the process at the time of receiving the reel stop command in this example is performed in S360 in the flowchart of the effect content determination process (see FIGS. 91 and 92), similarly to the above embodiment.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not a special processing condition is satisfied (S1171). Note that the “special processing condition” in this example is also a condition under which penalty determination is not performed, as in the above-described embodiment. Specifically, the maximum number of medals that can be inserted is two. This corresponds to the case where the gaming state is between the 3MB flags, or the case where the MB is operating.

  In S1171, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the special processing condition is satisfied (YES in S1171), the sub CPU 102 terminates the reel stop command receiving process and renders the effect content determination process (FIG. 91). And FIG. 92). On the other hand, in step S1171, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the special processing condition is not satisfied (NO in step S1171), the sub CPU 102 determines whether the current reel stop state is a state other than the first stop state. It is determined whether or not it is (S1172).

  In S1172, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the current reel stop state is a state other than the first stop (if S1172 is YES), the sub CPU 102 ends the reel stop command receiving process, The effect content determination processing (see FIGS. 91 and 92) also ends. On the other hand, in S1172, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the current stopped state of the reel is not a state other than the first stop (in the case of NO determination in S1172), the sub CPU 102 performs the first stop operation to set the remaining reels other than the left reel 3L. It is determined whether or not the reel has been stopped (S1173).

  When the sub CPU 102 determines in S1173 that the reels other than the left reel 3L have not been stopped by the first stop operation (NO in S1173), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S1179 described later.

  On the other hand, in S1173, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the reels other than the left reel 3L have been stopped by the first stop operation (if S1173 is YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the value of the lottery point counter to “1”. It is added (S1174). Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the gaming state (current) is “general” (S1175).

  If the sub CPU 102 determines in S1175 that the gaming state (current) is not “general” (NO in S1175), the sub CPU 102 ends the reel stop command receiving process and renders the effect contents determination process. (See FIGS. 91 and 92). Although not shown, if the determination in S1175 is NO (the sub game state is not the normal game state), the sub CPU 102 resets the lottery point counter (sets the value of the lottery point counter to “0”). Also).

  On the other hand, in S1175, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is “general” (YES in S1175), the sub CPU 102 sets (updates) the cycle shortening-related processing and various parameters. The processing is performed (S1176).

  In the process of S1176, the sub CPU 102 performs the cycle shortened lottery based on the data of the “winning combination history” with reference to the cycle shortened lottery tables shown in FIGS. 44 and 45, similarly to the above embodiment. In the processing of S1176, the sub CPU 102 sets the cycle counter (the value of the cycle counter) based on the number of shortened games corresponding to the result of the cycle shortened lottery and the current value of the cycle counter (at the time of the lottery). Subtraction processing) and set (update) processing of “Oyado points”. Further, in the process of S1176, if the value of the current (before subtraction) cycle counter is less than “10”, the sub CPU 102 refers to a race victory expectation lottery table (not shown) to increase the race victory expectation data. The lottery is performed, and a process of setting the lottery result of the race win expectation data up lottery to the race win rate data is performed. That is, in the processing of S1176, the sub CPU 102 performs the processing of S661 and the subsequent processing (the processing of S661 to S668) during the processing of the general medium_game start of the embodiment shown in FIGS. 117 and 118.

  After the processing of S1176, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the number of games other than 0 is determined as the number of reduced games in the cycle reduction related processing of S1176 (S1177).

  When the sub CPU 102 determines in S1177 that the number of games other than the reduced game has not been determined as the number of reduced games (S1177 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S1180 described later. On the other hand, in S1177, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of games other than the zero game has been determined as the number of reduced games (if S1177 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines the determined number of reduced games in the lottery point counter. It is added to the value (S1178). Next, the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S1180 described later.

  Here, returning to the processing of S1173 again, if S1173 is NO, the sub CPU 102 adds “1” to the value of the cycle counter (S1179). By this process, the value of the cycle counter updated at the start of the current game (subtracted by “1”) (refer to the general medium_game start process shown in FIGS. 117 and 118) returns to the value before the update. After the processing of S1179, the sub CPU 102 performs the processing of S1180 described later. That is, when the player stops the reels other than the left reel 3L by the first stop operation (when the irregular push operation is performed), the cycle shortening lottery in S1176 is not performed as a penalty (cycle shortening lottery). Is prohibited), and the values of the cycle counter and the lottery point counter are not updated (the number of remaining cycle games does not decrease).

  After the processing of S1178 or S1179, or if S1177 is NO, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the lottery point counter is “180” (S1180).

  If the sub CPU 102 determines in S1180 that the value of the lottery point counter is not “180” (if S1180 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the reel stop command receiving process and renders the effect contents determination process ( 91 and 92 are also ended.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S1180 that the value of the lottery point counter is “180” (if S1180 is YES), the sub CPU 102 sets “during race” to the game state (next time). (S1181). By this processing, a transition effect game (race effect) is started from the next game. Then, after the processing of S1181, the sub CPU 102 ends the processing at the time of receiving the reel stop command, and also ends the effect content determination processing (see FIGS. 91 and 92).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 155, the during-race_variable setting process in this example will be described. FIG. 155 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the during-variable_variable setting process in this example. Also, the in-race_variable setting process of this example is performed at S440 in the flowchart of the variable setting process (see FIGS. 97 and 98), similarly to the above embodiment.

  In the in-race_variable setting process in this example, the sub CPU 102 sets “0” to the value of the lottery point counter (S1191). Then, after the processing of S1191, the sub CPU 102 ends the in-race_variable setting processing, and moves the processing to S441 of the variable setting processing (see FIGS. 97 and 98).

  In this example, as described above, the reel stop command receiving process including the penalty process and the in-race_variable setting process are performed. In the processing at the time of receiving the reel stop command in this example, the cycle control related processing in S1176 is executed by the sub control circuit 101. That is, in this example, when the pressing operation of the stop button is not an irregular pressing operation at the time of the first stop of the reel in the normal game (first case), the sub-control circuit 101 determines the number of remaining unit games in the current set of the normal game. (Normal game shortening means). In the process at the time of receiving the reel stop command in this example, the sub control circuit 101 executes the sub game state setting process of the next game in S1181. That is, in this example, the sub control circuit 101 changes the sub game state to the transition effect state in which the AT lottery is performed when the value of the lottery point counter reaches the predetermined value (180) in the game period of the normal game. It also serves as a means for shifting to a specific game state (game state shifting means).

  In this example, since the cycle shortening-related processing is performed at the time of the first stop of the reel of the normal game, the cycle shortening-related processing is performed at the time of starting the game of the normal game (general medium_game start processing shown in FIGS. 117 and 118). Do not process.

  In the penalty process of this example, as described above, the penalty flag, the number of penalty games, and the penalty counter are not used. Therefore, in this example, for example, various penalty-related processes (judgment process, addition process, subtraction process, set / reset process, and the like) of the penalty flag, the number of penalty games, and the penalty counter are performed during the various processes of the above embodiment. Is not done.

  Further, in this example, since the game state (next time) is set to “during race” based on the value of the lottery point counter, S871 and S872 during the general medium_game state setting process of the above embodiment shown in FIG. 131. (A game state (next time) setting process based on the value of the cycle counter) is not performed. In this example, the configuration such as the processing content other than the difference from the above-described embodiment can be configured in the same manner as the above-described embodiment.

  Further, in this example, an example has been described in which only the cycle shortening lottery is performed in the processing at the time of receiving the reel stop command. However, the present invention is not limited to this. In addition to the cycle shortened lottery, a pseudo BB lottery process may be performed. In this case, after the processing of S1176 (cycle shortening related processing and various types of setting processing) during the processing of receiving the reel stop command of this example, the processing of S1139 during the processing of receiving the reel stop command of the modification 6 shown in FIG. (Pseudo BB random determination (general medium) processing and various setting processing).

  In this example, for example, similarly to the above-described modified example 7, the cycle shortening-related processing and the pseudo BB lottery processing are performed at the start of the game of the normal game (the general middle_game start processing shown in FIGS. 117 and 118). When the irregular push operation is performed by the player (when a penalty occurs), after the third stop of the reel (when a reel stop command corresponding to the third stop is received), the cycle for penalty occurrence is shortened. The related process and the pseudo BB lottery process may be performed again, and each lottery result may be rewritten. In this case, the process of S1176 (cycle shortening related process and various setting processes) during the process of receiving a reel stop command in this example is omitted, and when S1173 is determined to be NO (when an irregular push operation is performed) 153, a series of processing of S1158 to S1161 during the processing of receiving the reel stop command of the above-described modified example 7 (cycle shortening related processing (during penalty), pseudo BB random determination (during general, during penalty), and various parameters Rewriting process).

  Further, in this example, a configuration in which “in race” is set in the gaming state (next time) based on the value of the lottery point counter (see the processing in S1180 and S1181), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the process of S1180 during the process of receiving the reel stop command in this example, it is determined whether or not the value of the cycle counter is “0”, and if the value of the cycle counter is “0”, the gaming state ( (Next time) may be set to “during race”. In this case, there is no need to provide a lottery point counter.

  If the lottery point counter is not provided, the process of subtracting “1” from the value of the cycle counter (the processes of S641 and S642 during the general medium_game start process shown in FIGS. 117 and 118) is performed at the start of the game. Instead, it may be performed at the time of the first stop of the reel. In this case, the process of S1174 during the process of receiving the reel stop command in this example may be replaced with a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the cycle counter (in this case, the process of S1179 is omitted).

  In the penalty processing of this example described above, similarly to the sixth modification, the penalty is imposed only in the game in which the penalty has occurred, and is not reflected after the next game. Therefore, in this example, an effect similar to that of the above-described modification 6 can be obtained. Also, in this example, even if the irregular push operation is performed, the next player is not affected, so that an equal lottery opportunity can be always provided in the AT lottery.

[Modification 9]
In the modified examples 6 and 7, the penalty is imposed only in the penalty generating game, and the penalty processing technique that is not reflected after the next game is changed after the normal game has been exhausted for the predetermined number of games (at the start of the transition effect game). An example in which the present invention is applied to the pachislot 1 having a game property in which an AT lottery is performed has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the penalty processing of Modification 6 or Modification 7 described above can be applied to a gaming machine having a gaming property such as performing an AT lottery in each game in the normal gaming state. Here, various examples (modified examples 9-1 and 9-2) will be described.

(1) Modification 9-1
In the modified example 9-1, the penalty processing of the modified example 6 is applied to, for example, a gaming machine having a game property such as performing an AT lottery (notifying game determining means) in each game in a normal gaming state. Will be described. That is, in this example, in the normal gaming state, when the player performs an irregular pressing operation on the stop button (when the first stop operation of the reel is performed on a reel other than the left reel 3L), A penalty process for imposing a penalty on the AT lottery only in the game in which the irregular push operation is performed will be described.

  Therefore, in this example, the AT lottery process is performed after all the reels stop (when a reel stop command corresponding to the third stop of the reels is received). In this example, if a penalty occurs at the time of the third stop of the reel (if the irregular push operation is performed: the second case), the AT for penalty occurrence is generated based on the internal winning combination. AT lottery is executed with reference to a lottery table (not shown) (second notification game determining means). On the other hand, if the penalty has not occurred at the time of the third stop of the reel (if the irregular push operation has not been performed: the first case), the AT lottery table for non-penalty occurrence occurs based on the internal winning combination. (Not shown), an AT lottery is executed (first notification game determining means).

  Here, although not shown, in each AT lottery table, the correspondence between the type of the internal winning combination and the lottery value set in association with each internal winning combination is defined. In this example, the AT lottery table for when a penalty occurs is configured such that the probability of AT winning is lower than that in the case of performing the AT lottery using the AT lottery table for when a non-penalty occurs. . Note that, in this specification, the state in which the AT winning probability is low in the AT lottery means a state in which the benefit of AT winning is hard to be given, and the configuration of the AT lottery table for when a penalty occurs is such that a non-penalty occurrence occurs. Any configuration can be used as long as the benefit of AT winning is less likely to be provided as compared with the time AT lottery table.

  For example, the AT lottery table for when a penalty occurs is set so that the type of the internal winning combination defined in the AT lottery table (the internal winning combination for which AT can be won) is smaller than that of the AT lottery table for when a non-penalty occurs. You may comprise. Further, for example, the type of the internal winning combination defined in the AT lottery table for when a penalty occurs is the same as that of the AT random determination table for when a non-penalty occurs, and the lottery value associated with each internal winning combination is The AT lottery table at the time of penalty occurrence may be configured to be smaller than that of the AT lottery table at the time of non-penalty occurrence.

  Also, in the penalty processing of this example, similarly to the above-described modification 6, a penalty flag can be used as a determination parameter indicating whether or not to perform the penalty processing (whether or not an irregular push operation has been performed). . In this case, similarly to the above-described modification 6 (refer to the processing at the time of receiving a reel stop command shown in FIG. 152), when the player performs an irregular push operation on the stop button, the penalty flag is set at the first stop. It is turned on and the penalty flag is turned off at the time of the third stop.

  That is, in the penalty processing of this example, for example, instead of the cycle shortening related (during non-penalty) processing performed in S1138 in the reel stop command reception processing of the sixth modification shown in FIG. The AT lottery (during non-penalty) process using the AT lottery table is performed, and the AT lottery (during the penalty) process using the AT lottery table for when a penalty occurs is performed instead of the cycle shortening-related (during penalty) process performed at S1140. Can be realized.

  In this example, a configuration may be adopted in which the AT is not won when a penalty occurs. In this case, for example, the configuration of the AT lottery table for when a penalty occurs may be configured so that the AT is not won, or the AT lottery process may not be performed when the penalty occurs.

  As described above, in this example, if a penalty (irregular push operation) occurs at the third stop of the reel in each game, a penalty is imposed on the AT random determination, and the penalty is applied to the next game. Not carried over. Therefore, also in this example, the same effect as that of the above-described modification 6 can be obtained. (Even if an irregular push operation is performed, the next player is not affected. Can be given).

(2) Modification 9-2
In Modification Example 9-2, an example of penalty processing in the case where the penalty processing of Modification Example 7 is applied to, for example, a gaming machine having gaming properties such as performing an AT lottery in each game in the normal gaming state will be described. I do.

  In this example, first, in the normal game state, an AT lottery (during non-penalty) process using the AT lottery table for non-penalty occurrence is performed at the start of the game (first notification game determining means). Next, when a penalty operation is detected in the game (when the player performs an irregular pressing operation on the stop button: a specific case), a third stop of the reel of the game (corresponding to the third stop) is performed. (When a reel stop command is received), the AT lottery (during penalty) process using the AT lottery table for the occurrence of a penalty is performed again, and the result of the AT lottery is rewritten (second notification game determining means). In this example, as in the case of the above-described Modification Example 9-1, the AT lottery table for the penalty occurrence is determined by using the AT lottery table for the non-penalty occurrence. It is configured to be lower than that of the case.

  Also in the penalty process of this example, a penalty flag can be used as a determination parameter indicating whether or not to perform the penalty process (whether or not an irregular push operation has been performed), similarly to the seventh modification. . In this case, when the player performs an irregular push operation on the stop button, the penalty flag is set at the first stop, as in the above-described modification 7 (refer to the process at the time of receiving the reel stop command shown in FIG. 153). It is turned on and the penalty flag is turned off at the time of the third stop.

  That is, in the penalty process of this example, for example, in the general medium_game start process of the embodiment shown in FIGS. 117 and 118, an AT lottery table for non-penalty occurrence occurs instead of the period shortening lottery related process. 153, and in the processing at the time of receiving the reel stop command of the seventh modification shown in FIG. 153, the cycle shortening-related (during non-penalty) process and the rewriting of the lottery result performed in S1158 and S1159. Instead of the processing, the processing can be realized by performing an AT lottery (during a penalty) process using the AT lottery table for when a penalty occurs and a process of rewriting the result of the AT lottery.

  Note that, in this example as well, similarly to the above-described modified example 9-1, a configuration may be adopted in which the AT is not won when a penalty occurs. In this case, for example, the configuration of the AT lottery table for when a penalty occurs may be configured to prevent the AT from being won, or the AT lottery process may not be performed when the penalty occurs.

  As described above, in this example as well, if a penalty (irregular push operation) occurs at the third stop of the reels in each game, a penalty is imposed on the AT lottery, and the penalty is set in the next game. Not carried over to Therefore, also in this example, the same effect as that of the above-described modification 6 can be obtained. (Even if an irregular push operation is performed, the next player is not affected. Can be given).

[Modification 10]
In the present invention, each of the pachislots of the above embodiment and various modifications is displayed on the liquid crystal screen of the liquid crystal display device 11 at the time of starting the game of the normal game (non-AT game) (before the stop button is stopped). An effect (hereinafter, referred to as “winning combination suggestion effect”) that roughly suggests the type of the internal winning combination (small combination, replay combination, rare combination, loss, etc.) by the video image may be provided. In Modification 10, an example of a winning combination suggestion effect will be described. The configuration other than the configuration (function) of the winning combination suggestion effect in the pachislot of this example can be the same as the configuration corresponding to each pachislot of the above embodiment and various modifications. Therefore, here, only the configuration (function) of the winning combination suggestion effect will be described.

  In Modification 10, as a winning combination suggestion effect performed at the start of a normal game, for example, an effect of changing the color of a predetermined object displayed on the liquid crystal screen according to the type of the internal winning combination (hereinafter, referred to as “first winning”) An effect that changes the combination of the colors of the clothes worn by the two persons (the first person and the second person) displayed on the liquid crystal screen according to the type of the internal winning combination. Hereinafter, this effect is referred to as a “second winning combination suggestion effect”), and an effect of changing the type of a character crossing the liquid crystal screen in the image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 in accordance with the type of the internal winning combination (hereinafter, referred to as “second winning combination”). 3 winning combination suggestion effect).

  Hereinafter, the contents of each winning combination suggestion effect will be described more specifically. In addition, each winning combination suggestion effect described below is controlled by the sub control circuit 101. Further, each winning combination suggestion effect may be performed only in a game that has been won in a lottery for determining whether or not to execute the winning combination suggestion during the normal game period, or may be performed for each game. .

(1) First winning combination suggestion effect (color navigation effect of predetermined object)
In the first winning combination suggestion effect, for example, an effect of changing the color of a predetermined object (for example, a mushroom or the like) to red is performed. In this effect, the internal winning combination is a combination relating to “Cherry” (“Weak Cho”, “Strong Cho”), which is the target combination of the cycle shortening lottery and the pseudo BB lottery (the target combination of the payout related lottery), This is a production that suggests that the possibility of being a "rare role" is high. Therefore, this effect is an effect that has a high degree of expectation for the rare combination winning for the player.

  In the first winning combination suggestion effect, for example, an effect of making the color of a predetermined object white is performed. This effect is an effect that suggests that there is a high possibility that the internal winning combination is any of all winning combinations including “losing”, and is an effect in which the type of the internal winning combination cannot be specified. Therefore, this effect is an effect in which the player has a low degree of expectation for the rare combination winning.

  Further, in the first winning combination suggestion effect, for example, an effect of changing the color of a predetermined object to yellow is also performed. This effect is an effect that suggests that the internal winning combination is highly likely to be a combination related to “bell” (including “push order bell (CT bell)”). Therefore, this effect is an effect in which the player has a high degree of expectation for winning the combination of “Bell”, but has a low degree of expectation in order to win the rare combination.

(2) Second winning combination suggestion effect (clothing color combination navigation effect)
In the second winning combination suggestion effect, for example, an effect of changing the color of the first person's clothes (for example, a woman's kimono) to green and the second person's clothes (for example, a woman's kimono) to red. Is performed. In this effect, the internal winning combination is a combination of “watermelon” (corresponding to the green color of the clothes of the first person) or “cherry” (“weak che”, This is an effect that suggests that there is a high possibility that the role is “role role” (corresponding to the red color of the clothes of the second person). Therefore, this effect is an effect that has a high degree of expectation for the rare combination winning for the player. In the second winning combination suggestion effect, as an effect having a higher expectation for the rare winning combination, for example, the color of the clothes of the first person is rainbow and the color of the clothes of the second person is purple. There is also a production to make.

  In the second winning combination suggestion effect, for example, an effect is performed in which the color of the clothes of the first person is white and the color of the clothes of the second person is blue. In this effect, the internal winning combination is any of the winning combinations including “losing” (corresponding to the white of the clothes of the first person) or the role relating to “replay” (blue of the clothes of the second person). This is an effect that suggests that the possibility of the internal winning combination is high, and the type of the internal winning combination cannot be specified. Therefore, this effect is an effect in which the player has a low degree of expectation for the rare combination winning.

  Furthermore, in the second winning combination suggestion effect, for example, an effect of changing the color of the clothes of the first person to yellow and the color of the clothes of the second person to blue is also performed. In this effect, the internal winning combination is a combination (corresponding to yellow of the clothes of the second person) related to “bell” (including “push order bell (CT bell)”) or a combination related to “replay” (second This is a production that suggests that there is a high possibility that this is the case (corresponding to the blue color of the person's clothes). Therefore, this effect is an effect in which the player has a high degree of expectation for winning the combination of “Bell”, but has a low degree of expectation in order to win the rare combination.

(3) Third winning combination suggestion effect (navigation effect by passing character)
In the third winning combination suggestion effect, in the image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11, for example, an effect is performed in which a specific character (for example, a tengu) crosses the liquid crystal screen. In this effect, the internal winning combination is a combination relating to “watermelon” or a combination relating to “cherry” (“weak cho”, “strong cho”), which is a target combination for the cycle shortening lottery and the pseudo BB lottery, that is, “ It is a production that suggests that it is highly likely that the role is "rare." Therefore, this effect is an effect that has a high degree of expectation for the rare combination winning for the player.

  Further, in the third winning combination suggestion effect, in the image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11, for example, an effect is performed in which a predetermined character (for example, a wild boar or the like) other than the specific character described above crosses the liquid crystal screen. This effect indicates that the internal winning combination is likely to be any of all winning combinations including “losing” or a role other than “rare role” (including a role related to “bell”). This is an effect in which the type of the internal winning combination cannot be specified. Therefore, this effect is an effect in which the player has a low degree of expectation for the rare combination winning.

  In this example, the type of the internal winning combination is roughly given to the player by the above-described first to third winning combination suggesting effects (the degree of the possibility that the internal winning combination is the “rare role” is high). Can be suggested. Note that the combination of the type of the internal winning combination and the display color in the above-described first and second winning combination suggestions, and the combination of the type of the internal winning combination and the type of the character in the third winning combination suggestion are Any of them is not limited to the above example, and can be set arbitrarily.

[Modification 11]
As described in Modification 10, in the present invention, each of the pachislots in the embodiment and the modifications described above generally indicates the effect of roughly indicating the type of the internal winning combination at the start of the normal game (the first to third effects described above). May be provided. However, in a pachislot provided with such an effect function, a switching operation of a stop operation of the player on the stop button (a switching operation between a penalty operation and a non-penalty operation) in accordance with the content of the winning combination suggestion effect at the start of the game. Becomes possible.

  Therefore, the function of the winning combination suggestion effect described in Modification 10 is used in the pachislot described in Modifications 6 to 8, for example, in a game in which a penalty operation is performed (hereinafter, referred to as a penalty generation game). When applied to a pachi-slot that gives a penalty for only the lottery-related lottery, as described in the above-described background art problem, the switching operation of the player's stop operation on the stop button causes an unexpected May cause losses. Here, this problem will be described more specifically.

  In the pachislots of the modified examples 6 to 8, similarly to the pachislot described in the above embodiment, in the unit game of the normal game (non-AT game), the “rare role” (“weak che”, “strong che”, “watermelon”) , "Chance A," "Chance B," and "Fixed Combination": a predetermined internal winning combination), there is a possibility that the pseudo BB lottery and the cycle shortening lottery will be won (the pseudo FIG. 41). A BB lottery (general medium) table, and a cycle shortening lottery table (No. 2) in FIG. 45). That is, in the normal game, when the internal winning combination is “rare combination”, there is a possibility that not only the benefit of the pseudo BB winning but also the benefit (the number of shortened games) related to the AT random determination is obtained.

  In the pachislots of Modifications 6 to 8, similarly to the above-described embodiment, when the "push order bell (CT bell)" (a specific internal winning combination) is won, three medals are required. 10 medals are paid out, and a great profit is given. Note that this “push order bell” (CT bell) occurs when the first stop operation of the stop button is performed on a stop button other than the left stop button 19L (when an irregular push operation is performed). It is a winning role. However, in the pachi-slots of Modifications 6 to 8, as in the above-described embodiment, the pressing order rule of the stop button set in the normal game is such that the first stop operation is performed on the left stop button 19L (order). Push operation). Therefore, in the pachislots of Modifications 6 to 8 described above, the irregular push operation for winning the "push order bell" (CT bell) is a stop operation not intended by the designer in a normal game, and is a penalty operation.

  When the function of the winning combination suggestion effect described in the above modification example 10 is applied to the pachislots of the above modification examples 6 to 8, for example, the internal winning combination is indicated by the suggestion of the winning combination suggestion effect performed at the start of the normal game. Whether or not there is a high possibility of being a “rare role” (whether or not there is a high possibility that the internal winning combination is a role other than “rare role” (including “push order bell (CT bell)”)) Can recognize. Therefore, in the pachislot having such a configuration, when the player determines that the internal winning combination is highly likely to be “rare combination” based on the content of the winning combination suggesting effect, the cycle shortening lottery and the pseudo In order to reliably receive the BB lottery, there is a high possibility that the player performs a forward pressing operation on the stop button (does not perform a penalty operation). On the other hand, if the player determines that the internal winning combination is likely to be a combination other than the “rare combination” (including “push order bell (CT bell)”) based on the content of the winning combination suggestion effect, May require the player to perform an irregular push operation (penalty operation) on the stop button in order to win the "push order bell (CT bell)".

  That is, when the function of the winning combination suggestion effect described in the above modification example 10 is applied to the pachislots of the above modification examples 6 to 8, when the winning combination suggestion effect is performed at the start of the game of the normal game, the content of the effect is displayed. Accordingly, even if the player performs a penalty operation (irregular pressing operation), the player may try to obtain a “push order bell (CT bell)” (a small push order) or perform a cycle shortening lottery and a pseudo BB lottery. For each game, it is possible to select whether or not to perform a penalty operation (whether to perform a forward pressing operation) in order to reliably receive the game.

  Therefore, for example, when a winning combination suggestion effect is highly likely to be performed at the beginning of the normal game in which the internal winning combination is a combination other than the “rare combination” (including the “push order bell (CT bell)”). If the winning combination suggestion effect is not performed, the player performs a penalty operation (irregular pressing operation), and if a “push order bell (CT bell)” wins, an excessive amount that the designer does not intend in the normal game is performed. Profit is awarded to the player and can cause unexpected losses to the gaming establishment.

  In the above-described switching operation of the stop operation of the stop button of the player based on the content of the winning combination suggestion effect at the start of the game, even if a penalty is given only in the penalty generating game, the winning combination suggestion effect is performed in the next game and thereafter. If it is, it can be executed. That is, merely providing the function of imposing a penalty only in a penalty generating game in a pachislot provided with a function of a winning combination suggestion effect cannot suppress the above-described operation of switching the stop operation of the player to the stop button. It cannot prevent unexpected loss occurrence.

  Thus, in a modification 11, a description will be given of an example of a configuration of a pachislot capable of solving the above-mentioned problem in a pachislot provided with an effect roughly suggesting the type of the internal winning combination at the start of the normal game.

  In the pachislot of this example, first, in order to solve various problems that may occur when a penalty is given over a period of a plurality of games (the various problems described in the background art and the modified examples 6 to 8), a normal game is performed. In the case where a penalty operation (irregular push operation) is performed by the player in, a function of imposing a penalty (penalty for lottery-related lottery) is provided only in the game in which the penalty operation is executed. Further, in the pachislot of this example, in order to prevent the above-mentioned switching operation of the stop operation of the stop button of the player, a winning combination suggestion is made in a game subsequent to a penalty generation game (a game in which the penalty operation is executed). Change the style of the effect (giving a pseudo penalty in the effect).

  Hereinafter, in the normal game, the operation is performed in each of the case where the player performs a forward pressing operation (stop operation according to the pressing order rule) on the stop button and the case where the player performs an irregular pressing operation (penalty operation). The details of the operation of the lottery-related lottery operation in this example and the operation of the winning combination suggestion effect after the next game will be described in more detail.

(1) Operation at the time of forward pushing operation In the pachislot of this example, when the player performs forward pushing operation on the stop button (first stop of the left reel 3L: predetermined stop order) in a normal game, a penalty is given. A normal game operation is performed without giving. That is, in this case, the results of various payout-related lotteries (for example, cycle shortening lottery, pseudo BB lottery, etc.) obtained based on the internal winning combination are valid.

  Further, in the case where the player performs a forward push operation on the stop button (first stop of the left reel 3L) in the normal game and a winning combination suggestion effect is performed at the start of the game of the next game, for example, the above-described modification 10 The same effect as the various winning combination suggestion effects (first to third winning combination suggestion effects) described above, that is, the winning combination suggestion effect in which the correspondence between the internal winning combination and the content of the winning combination suggestion is normal is performed. Is done. More specifically, in the next game, for example, when the internal winning combination is “rare combination”, a winning combination suggestion effect (rare) indicating that the internal winning combination is highly likely to be “rare combination” is high. In the case where an effect with a high degree of expectation for the role winning: the first effect) is performed and the internal winning combination is a role other than the “rare role”, an effect in which the internal winning combination cannot be specified (second effect) or an internal A winning combination suggestion effect (effect with a low degree of expectation for the rare combination winning) indicating that there is a high possibility that the winning combination is a combination other than the “rare role” is performed.

(2) Operation at the time of irregular push operation (penalty operation) In the pachislot of this example, in a normal game, the player performs an irregular push operation (reel other than left reel 3L (middle reel 3C or right reel 3R)) on the stop button. When the first stop is performed, a penalty is given to various payout-related lotteries (cycle shortening lottery and pseudo BB lottery) performed based on the internal winning combination in the game.

  Specifically, in the game in which the penalty operation has been executed, the various ball-related random determinations are not performed, or the random determination results of the various ball-related random determinations are invalidated (the number of shortened games is set to 0, and the pseudo BB is not set). Etc.). The penalty for various payout-related lotteries (cycle shortening lottery and pseudo BB lottery) is not carried over after the next game. In addition, as a processing method at the time of imposing this penalty, an arbitrary method can be adopted. For example, each processing method described in the above-described modified examples 6 to 8 may be adopted. In the case of invalidating (updating) the results of the various payout-related lotteries, non-update processing or reset processing of the winning history data may be performed together. However, in this example, in a normal game, when the player performs an irregular pressing operation (penalty operation) on the stop button and a “push order bell (CT bell)” is won, various payouts in the game are performed. Although a penalty is given for the related lottery (the cycle shortening lottery and the pseudo BB lottery), the payout (specific privilege) of ten medals is performed.

  Also, in the pachislot of this example, when the player performs a penalty operation in the normal game, the non-penalty game is performed in the next game after the game (penalty occurrence game) or later (over irregular intervals as described later). The winning combination suggestion effect is performed in a mode (hereinafter, referred to as a penalty mode) different from the mode of the winning combination suggestion effect (at the time of the forward pressing operation).

  Specifically, when the internal winning combination is a combination other than the “rare combination” after the next game after the penalty occurrence game, the winning indicating that the internal winning combination is likely to be the “rare combination” is high. A role suggestion effect, that is, an effect with a high degree of expectation for a rare role winning for the player is performed. At this time, in a game in which the internal winning combination is a combination other than the “rare combination”, a winning combination suggestion effect that suggests that there is a high possibility that the internal winning combination is the “rare combination” may be performed. Alternatively, the winning combination suggestion effect may be generated with a high probability (including a case where the winning combination suggestion effect does not occur with a low probability).

  When such a winning combination suggestion effect is performed, even if the internal winning combination is a role other than the “rare role”, an effect as if the “rare role” has been won is shown to the player. Therefore, there is a high possibility that the player performs a forward pressing operation (does not perform a penalty operation) on the stop button in order to reliably receive the cycle shortening lottery and the pseudo BB lottery.

  On the other hand, if the internal winning combination is “rare role” after the next game after the penalty generating game, for example, a winning combination suggestion effect corresponding to all the winning combinations including “losing” (the degree of expectation for the rare role winning is low) Production). That is, if the internal winning combination is “rare combination” after the next game after the penalty generation game, an effect is performed such that the internal winning combination cannot be specified at the start of the game. In this case, in a game in which the internal winning combination is “rare combination”, a winning combination suggestion effect that cannot specify the internal winning combination may be performed, or the corresponding winning combination suggestion effect may be generated with a high probability ( (Including a case where the winning combination suggestion effect does not occur with a low probability).

  When such a winning combination suggestion effect is performed, the internal winning combination cannot be specified, so that the player can easily perform the forward pressing operation, and the switching of the stop operation of the stop button in the normal game can be suppressed. Further, in this case, even if the player executes the irregular pressing operation (penalty operation) on the stop button in order to win the “push order bell (CT bell)”, the internal winning combination is “rare combination”. Therefore, the "push order bell (CT bell)" does not win. Therefore, in this case, no excessive profit is given to the player in the normal game, and no unexpected loss is given to the game store.

  In this example, after the next game after the penalty generating game, a winning combination suggestion effect at the time of a penalty performed when the internal winning combination is a combination other than the “rare combination” (the internal combination may be the “rare combination”). The content of the effect that indicates that the character is highly likely: the first effect) is the same as the content of the winning combination suggestion effect performed when the internal winning combination is “rare role” at the time of non-penalty. In addition, when the internal winning combination is “rare role” at the time of the penalty, the content of the winning combination suggestion effect (the effect in which the internal winning combination cannot be specified: the second effect) is such that the internal winning combination is “rare at the time of the non-penalty. An internal winning combination to be performed when the winning combination is other than the "role" is the same as the content of the winning combination suggestion effect that cannot be specified. That is, in this example, the correspondence between the winning combination suggested effect performed at the time of the penalty and the internal winning combination is reversed from that at the time of the non-penalty, but the content of each winning combination suggested effect is the same.

  Further, in this example, after the next game after the penalty generating game, the determination as to whether or not to perform the winning combination suggestion effect in the above-described penalty mode is performed by the “effect mode variation flag” (predetermined mode flag) provided in the sub RAM 103. Flag). When the “effect state variation flag” is on, the winning combination suggestion effect is performed in the state of the penalty. When the “effect state variation flag” is off, the non-penalty state (normal, A winning combination suggestion effect is performed in a mode of “a sequential push operation”.

  In this example, when the player performs a penalty operation in a normal game, the “production state variation flag” is turned on in the game. Then, in the subsequent game after the penalty occurrence game, if the “effect state variation flag” is on, the effect state variation continuation for determining whether to keep the “effect state variation flag” on state is continued. A lottery is performed. The on-state of the “effect state variation flag” is maintained until the effect mode variation continuous lottery is not won. Therefore, in this example, the period during which the winning combination suggestion effect is performed in a penalty manner is undefined.

  Note that the winning probability of the effect variation continuous lottery (continuation probability of the winning combination suggesting effect at the time of a penalty) can be set arbitrarily. For example, when the winning probability of the effect variation continuous lottery is set to about 95%, the winning combination suggestion effect is performed in the above-described penalty mode for about 20 games. In addition, any method can be used as the processing method of the production mode variation continuous lottery. For example, the random number value for the production mode variation continuous lottery and the lottery table prepared separately are used in the above-described embodiment and the like. The effect variation continuous lottery process may be performed in the same manner as the various lottery processes described above.

  In addition, in the game (unit game) in which the “effect generation rate change flag” is on, the effect mode change continuous lottery may be performed before or after the execution of the winning combination suggestion effect. At the former timing, the effect-state variation continuous lottery is performed, and if the lottery is not won, the “effect state variation flag” is turned off before execution of the winning combination suggestion effect. A winning combination suggestion effect is performed in a penalty mode. On the other hand, if the effect variation continuous continuation lottery is performed at the latter timing and the lottery is not won, in the game, a winning combination suggestion effect is performed in a penalty mode, but in the next game, the non-penalty The winning combination suggestion effect is performed in the mode of time. In other words, in the former case, the winning combination suggestion effect may not be performed in the form of the penalty in the next game after the penalty generating game, but in the latter case, the penalty is necessarily generated in the next game after the penalty generating game. In this manner, a winning combination suggestion effect is performed.

  As described above, in the pachi-slot of this example, in the game in which the “production state variation flag” is on after the next game after the penalty generation game of the normal game (non-AT game), the above-described penalty state at the start of the game Since the winning combination suggestion effect is performed, the switching operation of the stop operation of the player with respect to the stop button can be suppressed. As a result, an excessive profit unintended by the designer can be prevented from being given to the player, and an unexpected loss can also be prevented from being given to the game store.

  In this example, the period during which the winning combination suggestion effect is performed in a penalty mode is undefined. In this case, since it becomes difficult for the player to grasp the execution period of the pseudo penalty in the effect, the switching operation of the player's stop operation on the stop button in the normal game can be further suppressed. Further, in this example, the correspondence between the winning combination suggestion effect performed at the time of the penalty and the internal winning combination is reversed from that at the time of the non-penalty, but the contents of the respective winning combination suggestion effects are the same. By adopting such a configuration, it becomes difficult for the player to determine whether or not the pseudo penalty in the performance is activated, and therefore, the effect of suppressing the switching operation of the stop operation of the player with respect to the stop button is further improved. be able to.

  Further, in this example, a penalty is imposed on various payout-related lotteries only in the game in which the penalty operation is executed, so that the same effects as those of the above-described modified examples 6 to 8 can be obtained.

  In this example, the example in which the period during which the winning combination suggestion effect is performed in a penalty mode is completely indefinite, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when a penalty operation is performed, a winning combination suggestion effect is always performed in a manner of a penalty at least for a period of a predetermined number of games after the next game, and thereafter, the effect mode variation continuous lottery is performed. It may be configured to determine whether or not the effect is continued. In this case, it is possible to more reliably give a pseudo penalty in the effect.

  Further, in this example, a configuration has been described in which it is determined whether or not to change the mode of the winning combination suggestion effect based on the on / off state of the “effect mode variation flag”. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Any configuration can be used as long as it is possible to determine whether to change the mode of the winning combination suggestion effect. For example, the determination as to whether or not to change the mode of the winning combination suggestion effect may be executed using a parameter other than a flag or the like.

  Further, in this example, an example has been described in which a penalty is imposed on both the cycle shortening lottery and the pseudo BB lottery in the normal game, but the present invention is not limited to this, and one of the cycle shortening lottery and the pseudo BB lottery is applied. A penalty may be imposed. Further, in this example, an example is described in which the above-described penalty function and the mode variation function of the winning combination suggestion effect are applied to a pachislot in which the payout-related lottery in the normal game is a cycle shortening lottery and a pseudo BB lottery, The present invention is not limited to this. For example, the penalty function and the winning combination suggestion effect mode variation function described above in this example can be applied to a pachislot in which an AT lottery is performed as a lottery-related lottery in each game in the normal gaming state (non-AT state). it can.

(3) Various Specific Examples of Mode Changing Operation of Winning Combination Suggested Effect Here, the above described variation function of the winning combination suggesting effect in this example is described in the first to third winning combination suggesting effects described in Modification Example 10. Various specific examples in the case where the present invention is applied will be described.

(3-1) First winning combination suggestion effect (color navigation effect of predetermined object)
When the first winning combination suggestion effect is executed, if the “staging mode variation flag” is in the off state (during non-penalty), the first winning combination suggestion effect has been described in Modification 10 above. An effect similar to the first winning combination suggestion effect is performed. Therefore, the description of the first winning combination suggestion effect at the time of non-penalty in this example is omitted here.

  On the other hand, when the first winning combination suggestion effect is executed, if the “effect state variation flag” is in the ON state (during a penalty), for example, the first winning combination suggestion effect is performed in the following manner. Is performed.

  When the internal winning combination is the “rare combination”, for example, an effect of rendering the color of the predetermined object white (a production with a low degree of expectation for the rare combination winning) is performed. In other words, when the “production mode variation flag” is in the on state (during a penalty) and the internal winning combination is “rare combination”, the “production mode variation flag” is in the off state (during a non-penalty) and the internal A first winning combination suggestion effect in which an internal winning combination cannot be specified, which is performed when the winning combination is any of all winning combinations including “losing”, is performed. In this case, in the game in which the internal winning combination is “rare combination”, the first winning combination suggestion effect in which the internal winning combination cannot be specified may be performed without fail, or the first winning combination suggestion may be performed with a high probability. A configuration in which an effect is generated (a configuration including a case where the first winning combination suggestion effect is not generated with a low probability) may be adopted.

  On the other hand, when the internal winning combination is a combination other than the “rare combination” (including “losing”), for example, an effect of making the color of the predetermined object red (a production having a high degree of expectation for the rare combination winning) is performed. Be done. In other words, when the “production mode variation flag” is in the ON state (during a penalty) and the internal winning combination is a role other than “rare role” (including “losing”), the “production mode variation flag” is turned off. A first winning combination suggestion effect that is performed when the internal winning combination is in the state (non-penalty state) and the internal winning combination is “rare role” and that indicates that the internal winning combination is likely to be “rare combination” is high. Will be implemented. At this time, in a game in which the internal winning combination is a combination other than the “rare combination” (including “losing”), the first winning combination suggestion effect having a high degree of expectation for the rare combination winning may be performed. Alternatively, the first winning combination suggestion effect may be generated with a high probability (including a case where the first winning combination suggestion effect does not occur with a low probability).

(3-2) Second winning combination suggestion effect (clothing color combination navigation effect)
If the “draft effect variation flag” is in the OFF state (when the pen is not penalized) when the second winning combination suggestion effect is executed, the second winning combination suggestion effect has been described in Modification 10 above. An effect similar to the second winning combination suggestion effect is performed. Therefore, here, description of the second winning combination suggestion effect at the time of non-penalty in this example is omitted.

  On the other hand, when the second winning combination suggestion effect is executed, if the “draft effect variation flag” is in the ON state (during a penalty), for example, the second winning combination suggestion effect is performed in the following manner. Is performed.

  When the internal winning combination is “rare role”, for example, an effect in which the color of the clothes of the first person is white and the color of the clothes of the second person is blue (the degree of expectation for the rare role winning is low) Direction) is performed. In other words, when the “production mode variation flag” is in the on state (during a penalty) and the internal winning combination is “rare combination”, the “production mode variation flag” is in the off state (during a non-penalty) and the internal A second winning combination suggestion effect in which an internal winning combination cannot be specified, which is performed when the winning combination is any of all the winning combinations including “losing” or a combination relating to “replay”, is performed. In this case, in the game in which the internal winning combination is “rare combination”, a second winning combination suggestion effect in which the internal winning combination cannot be specified may be performed, or the second winning combination suggestion may be performed with a high probability. A configuration in which an effect is generated (including a case in which the second winning combination suggestion effect is not generated with a low probability) may be adopted.

  On the other hand, when the internal winning combination is a combination other than the “rare combination” (including “losing”), for example, the color of the clothes of the first person is green and the color of the clothes of the second person is red Or an effect in which the color of the clothes of the first person is rainbow and the color of the clothes of the second person is purple (an effect having a high degree of expectation for the rare role winning). In other words, when the “production mode variation flag” is in the ON state (during a penalty) and the internal winning combination is a role other than “rare role” (including “losing”), the “production mode variation flag” is turned off. A second winning combination suggestion effect that is performed when the internal winning combination is in the state (non-penalty state) and the internal winning combination is “rare role” and indicates that the internal winning combination is likely to be “rare role” is high. Will be implemented. In this case, in a game in which the internal winning combination is a combination other than the “rare combination” (including “losing”), the second winning combination suggestion effect having a high degree of expectation for the rare combination winning may be necessarily performed. Alternatively, a configuration in which the second winning combination suggestion effect occurs with a high probability (including a case in which the second winning combination suggestion effect does not occur with a low probability) may be employed.

(3-3) Third winning combination suggestion effect (navigation effect by passing character)
When the third winning combination suggestion effect is executed, if the “staging mode variation flag” is in the OFF state (during non-penalty), the third winning combination suggestion effect has been described in Modification 10 above. An effect similar to the third winning combination suggestion effect is performed. Therefore, here, description of the third winning combination suggestion effect at the time of non-penalty in this example is omitted.

  On the other hand, when the third winning combination suggestion effect is executed, if the “draft effect variation flag” is in the ON state (during a penalty), for example, the third winning combination suggestion effect is performed in the following manner. Is performed.

  When the internal winning combination is a “rare role”, for example, an effect in which a predetermined character (for example, a wild boar or the like) other than a specific character (for example, a tengu) crosses the liquid crystal screen (an effect with a low degree of expectation for the rare role winning) ) Is performed. In other words, when the “production mode variation flag” is in the on state (during a penalty) and the internal winning combination is “rare combination”, the “production mode variation flag” is in the off state (during a non-penalty) and the internal A third winning combination suggestion effect in which the internal winning combination cannot be specified is performed when the winning combination is a combination other than the “rare combination” (including “losing” and “push order bell”). In this case, in the game in which the internal winning combination is “rare role”, a third winning combination suggestion effect in which the internal winning combination cannot be specified may be performed, or the third winning combination suggestion may be performed with a high probability. A configuration in which an effect is generated (including a case in which the third winning combination suggestion effect is not generated with a low probability) may be adopted.

  On the other hand, when the internal winning combination is a combination other than the “rare combination” (including “losing”), for example, an effect in which a specific character (for example, a tengu or the like) crosses the liquid crystal screen (the expectation degree for the rare combination winning) High production). In other words, when the “production mode variation flag” is in the ON state (during a penalty) and the internal winning combination is a role other than “rare role” (including “losing”), the “production mode variation flag” is turned off. A third winning combination suggestion effect, which is performed when the internal winning combination is “rare role” and is in a state (non-penalty state) and the internal winning combination is “rare role”, is high. Will be implemented. In this case, in a game in which the internal winning combination is a combination other than the “rare combination” (including “losing”), the third winning combination suggestion effect having a high degree of expectation for the rare combination winning may be necessarily performed. Alternatively, the third winning combination suggestion effect may be generated with a high probability (including a case where the third winning combination suggestion effect does not occur with a low probability).

  In this example, various winning combination suggestion effects performed at the start of the above-described normal game (unit game in a predetermined game state) are controlled by the sub-control circuit 101. That is, in this example, the sub-control circuit 101 also serves as a means (winning combination suggestion means) for suggesting information on the internal winning combination (information roughly suggesting the type of the internal winning combination) at the start of the normal game. Further, in this example, in the normal game, when the reels other than the left reel 3L are first stopped without performing the first stop (predetermined stop order) of the left reel 3L, various payout related only in the game. A penalty is given to the lottery (privilege giving process), and this process is executed by the sub control circuit 101. That is, in this example, the sub-control circuit 101 also serves as a means (penalty adding means) for imposing a penalty on various payout-related lotteries only in the game when an irregular push operation is performed in the normal game.

  Further, in this example, when the reels other than the left reel 3L are stopped for the first time in the normal game, the “production state variation flag” (predetermined flag) is set to the on state in the game, and this processing is This is executed by the control circuit 101. That is, in this example, the sub-control circuit 101 also sets a state (effect mode changing means) for changing the state of the winning combination suggestion effect when the reels other than the left reel 3L are first stopped in the normal game. Doubles. Further, in this example, when the “effect mode variation flag” (predetermined flag) is on at the start of the game of the normal game, the effect mode variation continuous lottery is performed, and when the lottery is not won, the “effect mode variation flag” is set. The "variation flag" is set to the off state. This process is executed by the sub control circuit 101. That is, in this example, the sub-control circuit 101 performs the production mode variation continuous lottery when the “production mode variation flag” is on at the start of the game in the normal game, and when the lottery result is non-winning. Also, it also serves as a means for canceling the state of changing the winning combination suggesting effect mode (effect mode continuation means).

  In this example, when a lottery-related lottery is won (when a predetermined condition is satisfied), a predetermined privilege (number of shortened games, pseudo BB winning) is given. Is executed by That is, in this example, the sub-control circuit 101 also serves as a means (first benefit providing means) for providing a predetermined privilege (the number of shortened games, pseudo BB winning) when various lottery-related lotteries are won. Further, in this example, when a “push order bell (CT bell)” (a specific internal winning combination) is won by the player's irregular push operation, ten medals are required for three medals. Payout (specific privilege) is performed, and the process of granting the specific privilege is executed by the sub-control circuit 101. That is, in this example, the sub-control circuit 101 also serves as a means (second benefit granting means) for granting a specific privilege when a “push order bell (CT bell)” is won by a player's irregular pressing operation. .

[Modification 12]
In the pachi-slot of the above modification example 11 (a pachi-slot provided with a function of performing a winning combination suggestion effect that roughly indicates the type of the internal winning combination at the start of the normal game), the winning combination is performed after the game following the penalty generation game of the normal game. An example has been described in which the suggestion effect is performed in a mode different from that at the time of non-penalty (normal time) and the period during which the winning combination suggestion effect is performed in the mode of the penalty is undefined, but the present invention is not limited to this. . For example, the period in which a winning combination suggestion effect is performed in a penalty mode may be fixed to a period of a predetermined number of games (for example, 20 games). In a twelfth modification, one configuration example will be described.

  In the pachislot of this example, when the player performs a forward push operation (first stop of the left reel 3L) on the stop button (when a penalty operation is not performed) in a normal game, a normal game operation (various output) is performed. Ball-related lottery, a winning combination suggestion effect, etc.) are performed. That is, in this case, the results of various payout-related lotteries (for example, cycle shortening lottery, pseudo BB lottery, etc.) obtained based on the internal winning combination are valid. In this case, a winning combination suggestion effect in which the correspondence between the internal winning combination and the content of the winning combination suggestion effect is normal is performed at the start of the game (the winning combination suggestion effect is performed in a non-penalty mode). ).

  On the other hand, when the player performs a penalty operation (irregular pressing operation) on the stop button in the normal game, similarly to the above-described modification 11, the penalty for various payout-related lotteries is obtained only in the game. Is given. In this case, also in this example, after the next game after the penalty occurrence game, the winning combination suggestion effect is performed in the form of the penalty described in Modification Example 11 above.

  However, in the above-described modification 11, whether or not the winning combination suggestion effect is performed in the mode of the penalty is determined with reference to the “production mode variation flag”. In this example, however, the “production mode variation counter” (the predetermined It is determined whether or not a winning combination suggestion effect is to be performed in a penalty mode. The “effect mode variation counter” is a counter provided in the sub RAM 103 for managing (counting) a remaining period (the number of remaining games) in which a winning combination suggestion effect is performed in a mode of a penalty.

  A predetermined number of games (for example, 20 games) in a game in which a penalty operation (an irregular pressing operation) is performed on a stop button by a player is set as an initial value in the “effect mode variation counter”. Note that the initial value of the “effect state variation counter” can be set arbitrarily. Then, when the initial value is set in the "effect mode variation counter", the value of the "effect mode variation counter" is thereafter subtracted by "1" for each game. Thereafter, at the start of the game, the winning combination suggestion effect is performed in the penalty mode described in Modification Example 11 until the value of the “effect mode variation counter” becomes “0”.

  Specifically, in a game in which the value of the “draft effect variation counter” is “1” or more, if the internal winning combination is a combination other than “rare combination”, the internal winning combination is “rare combination”. A winning combination suggestion effect that indicates that the possibility is high (an effect with a high degree of expectation for a rare combination winning) is performed. In this case, similarly to the above-described modification 11, in a game in which the internal winning combination is a combination other than the “rare combination”, the winning indicating that the internal winning combination is likely to be the “rare combination” is always high. A combination suggestion effect may be performed, or a configuration in which a corresponding winning combination suggestion effect is generated with a high probability (including a case where a winning combination suggestion effect does not occur) may be employed.

  On the other hand, in the game in which the value of the “effect mode variation counter” is “1” or more, if the internal winning combination is “rare role”, an effect in which the internal winning combination cannot be specified (all winning combinations including “losing”) (A production with a low degree of expectation for a rare combination winning). In this case, similarly to the above-described modification 11, in a game in which the internal winning combination is “rare combination”, a winning combination suggestion effect in which the internal winning combination cannot be specified may be performed, or the corresponding winning combination may be performed with a high probability. A configuration in which a role suggestion effect is generated (including a case where a winning combination suggestion effect does not occur) may be adopted.

  Further, in this example, as described above, the penalty for various payout-related lotteries (for example, cycle shortening lottery, pseudo BB lottery, etc.) is imposed only in the game in which the penalty operation is performed. Therefore, during the period from the next game after the penalty generating game until the value of the “draft effect variation counter” becomes “0”, the results of various payout-related lotteries (for example, cycle shortening lottery, pseudo BB lottery, etc.) Becomes effective. Then, when the value of the “effect state variation counter” becomes “0”, the game returns to the normal game operation.

  If the player performs a penalty operation before the value of the “effect state variation counter” becomes “0”, various payout-related lotteries (for example, cycle shortening lottery, pseudo BB) in the game, (A lottery etc.), a penalty may be imposed, and an initial value or a specific number of games other than the initial value may be added to the current value of the “effect mode variation counter”. It may be returned to the initial value. In the former case, an upper limit value may or may not be set for the value of the “effect state variation counter”.

  Further, in this example, the configuration in which the period during which the winning combination suggestion effect is executed in the penalty mode using the “effect mode variation counter” has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. Any configuration that can manage the period during which the winning combination suggestion effect is executed can be used. For example, the period during which the winning combination suggestion effect is changed may be managed using a parameter or the like instead of the counter.

  As described above, in the pachislot of this example, similarly to the above-described modification 11, the penalty is imposed on various payout-related lotteries only in the game in which the penalty operation is executed, and the next game after the penalty generating game is executed. Hereinafter, in a game in which the value of the “effect mode variation counter” is equal to or greater than “1” (a game that is not “0”), a winning combination suggestion effect is performed in the above-described penalty mode at the start of the game. Therefore, also in this example, effects similar to those of the above-described modification 11 can be obtained.

  Further, in this example, the winning combination suggestion effect is always performed in the above-described penalty mode during the period of the predetermined number of games after the next game after the penalty generation game. Therefore, in this example, when a penalty operation is performed by the player in the normal game, it is possible to reliably give the pseudo penalty in the effect to the predetermined number of games after the next game of the penalty generating game over the period. it can. As a result, it is possible to further improve the effect of suppressing the switching operation of the stop operation of the stop button in the normal game, and it is possible to more reliably prevent an unexpected loss to the game store.

  In this example, as described above, when the reels other than the left reel 3L are stopped for the first time in the normal game, the predetermined game number is set in the “effect mode variation counter” (predetermined counter) in the game. After that, the value of the "effect mode variation counter" is decremented by "1" for each game, and when the value of the "effect mode variation counter" becomes "0", the normal game operation is restarted. This series of processing is executed by the sub control circuit 101. That is, in this example, when the reels other than the left reel 3L are stopped for the first time in the normal game, the sub control circuit 101 changes the mode of the winning combination suggestion effect over a predetermined number of unit games after the next game. It also serves as a means for setting a state to be performed and canceling a state in which the state of the winning combination suggestion effect is changed when the game of the predetermined unit number of games is consumed (effect state changing means).

  Also, in the pachislots of Modifications 10 to 12 described above, at the start of a normal game, an example is described in which a winning combination suggestion effect that roughly suggests the type of an internal winning combination using the liquid crystal display device 11 is provided. It is not limited to this. For example, the 7-segment display 24 provided on the front door 2b may be used to suggest (notify) an internal winning combination. In this case, a pattern such as a number or a pattern (hereinafter referred to as a display pattern) displayed by the 7-segment display 24 is associated with the type of the internal winning combination. The notification operation of the internal winning combination by the 7-segment display 24 is controlled by the main control circuit 71 (main CPU 93). The function of notifying the internal winning combination by the 7-segment display 24 may be provided instead of the winning combination suggesting effect function by the liquid crystal display device 11 described in the above-described modified examples 10 to 12, or the 7-segment display. A configuration may be provided in which both the function of notifying the internal winning combination by 24 and the function of indicating a winning combination by the liquid crystal display device 11 are provided.

  Note that, for example, in a pachislot in which a notification function of an internal winning combination by the 7-segment display 24 is provided instead of the winning combination suggesting effect function by the liquid crystal display device 11, the player sequentially presses the stop button in a normal game. When (the left reel 3L is stopped for the first time) (non-penalty time), when the game of the next game is started, the correspondence between the type of the internal winning combination and the display pattern of the 7-segment display 24 is normal. Is performed. Specifically, for example, when the internal winning combination is “rare combination”, the display pattern corresponding to “rare combination” is notified on the 7-segment display 24, and the internal winning combination is other than “rare combination”. In the case of a winning combination, a display pattern in which the internal winning combination cannot be specified is notified on the 7-segment display 24.

  On the other hand, for example, in a pachislot provided with a notification function of an internal winning combination by the 7-segment display 24 instead of the winning combination suggesting effect function by the liquid crystal display device 11, in a normal game, the player performs an irregular pressing operation on the stop button. When the (penalty operation) is performed (at the time of a penalty), after the next game (over the effective period of the pseudo penalty in the production), the notification mode of the internal winning combination by the 7-segment display 24 performed at the start of the game is Different from that at non-penalty. Specifically, for example, when the internal winning combination is “rare role”, a display pattern in which the internal winning combination cannot be specified is notified on the 7-segment display 24, and the internal winning combination is other than “rare role”. In the case of the combination, the display pattern corresponding to the “rare combination” is notified on the 7-segment display 24.

  Further, for example, in a pachislot provided with both a function of notifying an internal winning combination by the 7-segment display 24 and a function of suggesting a winning combination by the liquid crystal display device 11, the content of the winning combination suggestion effect by the liquid crystal display device 11 and the 7-segment display are provided. The notification content of the internal winning combination by the device 24 may or may not be linked.

  In the former case, when the player performs an irregular pressing operation (penalty operation) on the stop button in a normal game (at the time of a penalty), after the next game (over the effective period of the pseudo penalty in the production), At the start of the game, the winning combination suggestion selection at the time of the penalty described in Modifications 11 and 12 is performed, and the operation of notifying the internal winning combination by the 7-segment display 24 is also the operation at the above-mentioned penalty. On the other hand, in the latter case, when the player performs an irregular push operation (penalty operation) on the stop button in a normal game (at the time of a penalty), the next game or later (over the effective period of the pseudo penalty in the effect) At the start of the game, the winning combination suggestion selection at the time of the penalty described in the above-described modified examples 11 and 12 is performed. However, the operation of notifying the winning combination by the 7-segment display 24 is the same as the above-described non-penalty (normal) operation. Become. In this case, the content of the notification of the internal winning combination by the 7-segment display 24 is different from the content of the winning combination suggesting effect by the liquid crystal display device 11.

[Other variations]
In the above embodiment and various modifications, the example in which the number of games (the number of cycle games) for one set (one cycle) of the normal game is set to a predetermined value (180 games) in advance has been described. The present invention is not limited to this. For example, at the time of startup, a configuration may be adopted in which the number of periodic games of a normal game is determined by lottery at intervals of one cycle or at predetermined intervals.

  Further, in the above-described configuration in which the number of periodic games of the normal game is determined by lottery, a configuration that uses the lottery point counter described in Modification Example 8 may be added. In this case, the upper limit value of the lottery point counter is set according to the number of periodic games determined by lottery. That is, in this case, in the reel stop command receiving process of the eighth modification shown in FIG. 154, the threshold (180) of the lottery point counter used in the determination process of S1180 is determined by the number of periodic games determined by lottery. Change.

  In the above-described embodiment and various modifications, the main control unit performs a lottery process related to the progress of the game such as a lottery process of an internal winning combination (internal lottery process), and performs various lottery processes related to the effect control. Although the example performed by the sub control unit has been described, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, all of these various lottery processes may be performed by the main control unit or may be performed by the sub control unit.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the AT game ends when the game of the specified number of games (AT start game number + additional AT game number) is exhausted, that is, the end condition of the AT game is managed by the number of digested games. Although an example has been described, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the AT gaming state, the AT game is ended when a predetermined number of small combinations (for example, a small combination relating to “Bell”) has been internally won, and the number of navigations in the order in which the stop buttons are pressed has reached the predetermined number. Such a configuration may be adopted. That is, the configuration may be such that the end condition of the AT game is managed by the number of times of navigation. Further, for example, in the AT gaming state, when the number of paid-out medals reaches a predetermined number, the AT gaming may be ended. That is, a configuration may be employed in which the termination condition of the AT game is managed by the number of paid out medals.

In the foregoing, the configuration and operation of the gaming machine according to the present invention have been described, including the effects thereof. However, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments and modifications, and includes other various embodiments and modifications without departing from the gist of the present invention described in the claims. Further, in the above-described embodiment and the modified example, the pachislot has been described as an example of the gaming machine, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is applicable to a gaming machine called “pachinko”. The effect of is obtained.
By the way, conventionally, in a non-AT game, a stop button is pressed (hereinafter, referred to as a penalty operation) in a stop order (a stop order not intended by a designer) other than the stop order of the stop button according to a preset push order rule. Gaming machines with a function of imposing a penalty in some cases have been proposed. However, in such a gaming machine, for example, even if the player unintentionally performs a penalty operation on the stop button (due to a simple operation error or the like), the player is naturally given a penalty ( Disadvantage, such as no AT lottery, is given over a certain period. In this case, the interest of the player may be reduced. Also, for example, if there is a malicious player who intentionally performs a penalty operation and stops the game in a state where a penalty is generated, another player who starts the next game in the gaming machine in the penalty generated state Would be disadvantaged even though he did not perform the penalty operation himself.
Such a problem can be solved, for example, by imposing the above-mentioned penalty (prohibition of the AT lottery) only in the unit game (game) in which the penalty operation is performed. However, when this penalty method is applied to, for example, a gaming machine having an effect function that suggests an internal winning combination at the start of a game, in particular, a combination to be subjected to AT lottery (a so-called “rare combination”). In this case, there is a possibility that the effect of preventing the loss of the game store from being sufficiently obtained. The reason is as follows.
In a gaming machine having an effect function that suggests winning of a “rare role” to be subjected to an AT lottery at the start of a non-AT game, the winning combination may be “rare role” depending on the content of the effect performed at the start of the game. It can be determined whether or not there is a role (whether or not a role other than the “rare role” (including the “push-in winning combination”). Therefore, in such a gaming machine, depending on the contents of the effect at the start of the game, even if the player performs a penalty operation, he or she challenges the acquisition of the "push order winning combination" or reliably performs the AT lottery. Can be selected for each unit game in order to perform a penalty operation in order to receive a penalty operation. That is, the player can switch the stop operation on the stop button between the penalty operation and the non-penalty operation in accordance with the effect at the start of the game.
Then, the player performs a penalty operation according to the content of the effect performed at the start of the non-AT game, and when the “push order winning combination” wins, the designer does not anticipate the excess in the non-AT game. Profit will be given to the player. Therefore, in a gaming machine having an effect function that suggests winning of an AT lottery target combination at the start of a non-AT game, a penalty (prohibition of AT lottery) is given only in a unit game (game) in which a penalty operation is performed. Even if it is given, after the next game, if the above-described switching operation of the stop operation on the stop button of the player is performed according to the content of the effect at the start of the game, an excessive profit is given to the player. However, there is a possibility that an unexpected loss is given to the game store.
SUMMARY An advantage of some aspects of the invention is to provide a gaming machine having a staging function that suggests an internal winning combination at the start of a game, by a penalty operation (designing a stop button) by a player. It is possible to impose a penalty only in a unit game in which a specific stop operation not intended by the player) is performed and to suppress the switching operation of the stop operation of the player's stop button based on the contents of the effect at the time of starting the game described above. It is to provide technology to make.
According to the gaming machine of the present invention having the above configuration, a penalty can be imposed only in a unit game in which a penalty operation has been performed by the player, and the player is stopped based on the contents of the above-described effect at the start of the game. The switching operation of the stop operation for the button can be suppressed. The reason why this effect is obtained is as described in detail in the description of Modifications 10 and 11 described above.
In the meantime, conventionally, the number of basic stay games in the AT state is not determined by one lottery, but is determined over a plurality of games, and the interest of the player in the game with the acquired number of games in the AT state is increased. There is a need for gaming machines that can do this.
An object of the present invention is to determine the number of basic stay games in the AT state over a plurality of games, and to provide a game for the game in which the number of games in the AT state is acquired. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that can enhance the interest of the player.
According to the gaming machine of the present invention having the above configuration, the number of basic stay games in the AT state (notification game) (game period of the notification game) is determined not by one lottery but over a plurality of games. , The player's interest in the game with the number of games in the AT state can be raised.

  DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 ... Pachislot (game machine), 2 ... exterior body, 2a ... cabinet, 2b ... front door, 3L ... left reel, 3C ... middle reel, 3R ... right reel, 4 ... reel display window, 11 ... liquid crystal display, 19L ... left stop button, 19C ... middle stop button, 19R ... right stop button, 20 ... medal slot, 21 ... MAX bet button, 23 ... start lever, 25 ... selection button, 51 ... hopper device, 53 ... power supply device, 55 ... Main control board case, 57 ... Sub-control board case, 71 ... Main control board, 72 ... Sub-control board, 91 ... Main control circuit, 93 ... Main CPU, 101 ... Sub-control circuit, 102 ... Sub-CPU

Claims (3)

When the number of bets is a predetermined number, it is possible to determine a first special role related to the operation of the first special game,
When the bet number is a specific number different from the predetermined number, it is possible to determine a second special role related to the operation of the second special game,
A gaming machine capable of playing in a first specific gaming state in which the first special role is carried over and in a second specific gaming state in which the second special role is carried over,
In the first specific game state, when the bet number is the specific number, the first special game does not operate,
In the second specific game state, when the bet number is the predetermined number, the second special game does not operate,
The first specific gaming state is a more advantageous gaming state than the second specific gaming state,
In the gaming state in which the first special combination and the second special combination have not been carried over, a notification is issued to instruct the bet number to be the predetermined number,
In the second specific gaming state, a notification is provided to instruct the user to set the bet number to the specific number. An internal winning combination determining means for determining an internal winning combination with a predetermined probability according to the number of bets,
When the bet number is the specific number, the probability that no internal winning combination is determined in the first specific gaming state is lower than the probability that no internal winning combination is determined in the second specific gaming state. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein: The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein, in the first specific gaming state, a notification is given to instruct the user to set the bet number to the specific number.

Images